Инструкция по эксплуатации volvo xc60 2010 - Инструкции, руководства, мануалы

VOLVO XC60

РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

WEB EDITION

УВАЖАЕМЫЕ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЫ АВТОМОБИЛЯ VOLVO!

СПАСИБО ЗА ВАШ ВЫБОР АВТОМОБИЛЯ VOLVO!

Мы надеемся, что Вы в течение многих лет получите наслаждение от управления Вашим автомобилем Volvo. Этот автомобиль создан для обеспечения комфорта и безопасности Вам и Вашим пассажирам. Volvo — это один из самых безопасных легковых автомобилей в мире. Ваш Volvo разработан с учетом всех действующих требований по безопасности и охране окружающей среды.

Для того чтобы этот автомобиль доставил Вам истинное удовольствие, мы рекомендуем ознакомиться с информацией об оборудовании, эксплуатации и техническом обслуживании, которая содержится в данном Руководстве по эксплуатации.

Содержание


00 Введение			01 Безопасность
Важная информация……………………………	6		Ремни безопасности …………………………	16
Volvo и окружающая среда………………..	11		Система надувных подушек безопас-
00		ности (SRS — Airbag)…………………………..	19
	01
			Активирование/отключение подушки
			безопасности*…………………………………..	23
			Боковая подушка безопасности (SIPS-
			bag) ………………………………………………….	26
			Надувной занавес (IC) ……………………….	28
			WHIPS ………………………………………………	29
			Roll-Over Protection System (система
			защиты при переворачивании автомо-
			биля) – ROPS…………………………………….	31
			Когда срабатывают системы …………….	32
			Аварийный режим……………………………..	33
			Безопасность детей…………………………..	34

2* Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

02 Замки и сигнализация
Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ…..	48
Замена батарейки в дистанционном
ключе/РСС*……………………………………….	54
Keyless drive*……………………………………..	56
Запирание/отпирание………………………..	59
Замок для безопасности детей………….	64
Сигнализация*02…………………………………..	65

03 Среда обитания водителя
Приборы и органы управления…………..	70
Положения ключа……………………………..	79
Сидения……………………………………………	81
Рулевое колесо…………………………………	86
Освещение………………………………………..	87
Очистители и омыватели…………………..	98
Стекла и зеркала заднего вида………..	101
Компас*…………………………………………..	106
Панорамная крыша с электроприво-
дом* ……………………………………………….	108
Пуск двигателя………………………………..	111
Запуск двигателя – вспомогательный
аккумулятор……………………………………	113
Коробки передач……………………………..	115
Привод на четыре колеса – AWD (All
Wheel Drive)*…………………………………….	119
Рабочие тормоза……………………………..	120
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Система кон-
троля03тяги на спуске……………………….	122
Стояночный тормоз…………………………	124
HomeLink *……………………………………..	127

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения

Использование меню и сообщений…..	132
Климат-контроль…………………………….	138
Топливный обогреватель двигателя и
отопитель салона*…………………………..	147
Дополнительный топливный отопи-
тель*……………………………………………….	150
Аудиосистема………………………………….	151
Бортовой компьютер……………………….	165
DSTC – Система динамической устой-
чивости и тяги…………………………………	167
Регулировка ходовых характеристик.	169
Круиз-контроль*……………………………..	170
Адаптивный круиз-контроль*…………..	172
Контроль сближения……………………….	180
City Safety™…………………………………….	183
Предупреждение о столкновении с
автоторможением*…………………………..	189
Driver04Alert System – DAC*………………… 195
Driver Alert System – LDW*………………..	198
Помощь парковки*…………………………..	201
Парковочная камера*………………………	204
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. .	207
Комфорт в салоне…………………………..	211
Bluetooth, «свободные руки»*……………	215

Содержание

Встроенный телефон*……………………..

221

* Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.	3

Содержание

05 В поездке

Рекомендации во время езды…………..	228
Заправка топливом………………………….	231
Топливо…………………………………………..	232
05	236
Погрузка…………………………………………
Багажное отделение………………………..	238
Треугольный знак аварийной оста-
новки*……………………………………………..	243
Езда с прицепом………………………………	244
Буксировка и эвакуация…………………..	251


06 Уход и обслуживание			07 Технические данные
Двигательный отсек…………………………	256		Обозначения типа……………………………	302
Лампы……………………………………………..	262		Размеры и массы…………………………….	304
Щетки стеклоочистителей и омываю-			Технические данные двигателя………..	307
06		07
щая жидкость………………………………….	269		Масло для двигателя……………………….	308
……………………………………Аккумулятор	271		Жидкости и смазки………………………….	310
………………………………Предохранители	274		Топливо…………………………………………..	312
………………………………..Колеса и шины	282		Электросистема………………………………	313
……………………….Уход за автомобилем	294		Тип разрешения	314

4* Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

Содержание

08 Алфавитный указатель

Алфавитный указатель…………………….

316

Введение

Важная информация

Читайте Руководство по эксплуатации

Введение

Лучший способ познакомиться с Вашим новым автомобилем — это прочитать настоящее руководство, желательно до первой поездки. Из руководства Вы можете узнать о новых функциях, о том, как лучше управлять автомобилем в различных ситуациях и как наиболее эффективно использовать различные свойства и возможности автомобиля. Особое внимание уделяйте приведенным в руководстве инструкциям по безопасности.

Оборудование, описанное в настоящем руководстве по эксплуатации, установлено не на всех автомобилях. Помимо стандартного оборудования в настоящем руководстве по эксплуатации описаны также опции (оборудование, устанавливаемое на заводеизготовителе) и некоторые аксессуары (дополнительное оборудование, устанавливаемое позднее). Если вы не уверены в том, что входит в стандартный или опционный/ дополнительный комплект поставки, мы рекомендуем вам обратиться к дилеру Volvo.

Автомобили Volvo комплектуются в зависимости от требований различных рынков

сбыта и национальных или местных законов и правил.

Технические характеристики, особенности конструкции и иллюстрации в настоящем руководстве по эксплуатации не являются обязательными. Мы сохраняем за собой право вносить изменения без предварительного уведомления.

Опция

Все типы опций/дополнительного оборудования обозначены звездочкой.

Выбор опционного/дополнительного оборудования для различных моделей зависит от рынка. Большинство опционного оборудования монтируется на заводе и не может устанавливаться после выпуска автомобиля. Дополнительное оборудование устанавливается после выпуска автомобиля с завода.

За дополнительной информацией мы рекомендуем вам обратиться к официальному дилеру Volvo.

Специальные рубрики

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Тексты под рубрикой «Предостережение» указывают на опасность получения травм.

ВАЖНО

Тексты под рубрикой «Важно» свидетельствуют об опасности повреждения автомобиля.

ВНИМАНИЕ

В текстах под рубрикой «Внимание» содержатся советы или рекомендации, которые помогут Вам использовать различные свойства и функциональные возможности автомобиля.

Сноска

В Руководстве по эксплуатации приводится информация в виде сносок внизу страницы. Эта информация дополняет текст, в котором указывается номер сноски. Для обозначения сноски к тексту в таблице вместо цифр используются буквы.

Тексты сообщений

В автомобиле установлены дисплеи, на которых появляются текстовые сообщения.

		Введение
		Важная информация
Такие сообщения приведены в Руководстве	зуются для указания об опасности, которая	Информация
по эксплуатации более крупным шрифтом	в случае, если предупреждение игнори-
серого цвета. Пример такого текста приво-	руется, может приводить к опасным или
дится в текстах меню и сообщений на	смертельным травмам.
информационном дисплее (например,	Повреждение имущества
Настройки аудио).

Таблички
В автомобиле имеются различные
таблички, в которых ясно и четко приво-
дится важная информация. Эти таблички в
автомобиле по нисходящей указывают сте-
пень важности предупреждения/информа-
ции.		Символы ISO белого цвета и текст/рисунок
Предупреждение о возможных
	белого цвета на черном поле сообщения.
травмах

		ВНИМАНИЕ

	Символы ISO белого цвета и текст/рисунок	Приводимые в данном руководстве
	белого цвета на черном или синем фоне пре-	таблички могут отличаться от табличек,
	дупреждения и сообщения. Используются	установленных в вашем автомобиле. На
	для указания об опасности, которая в слу-	иллюстрациях приводится лишь пример-
	чае если предупреждение игнорируется,	ное изображение табличек и указы-
	может приводить к повреждению имуще-	вается их ориентировочное местополо-
	жение в автомобиле. Конкретная инфор-
	ства.
	мация по вашему автомобилю приво-

		дится в соответствующих табличках,
		установленных на вашем автомобиле.

Символы ISO черного цвета на желтом фоне предупреждения, текст/рисунок белого цвета на черном поле сообщения. Исполь-

Списки операций

В Руководстве по эксплуатации процедуры, которые необходимо выполнять в опреде-

Введение

Важная информация

ленной последовательности, пронумерованы.

Если поэтапная инструкция оснащена серией рисунков, то нумерация каждого момента аналогична соответствующему рисунку.

Серии рисунков сопровождаются пронумерованными списками с буквенными обозначениями, в которых взаимный порядок инструкций может отличаться.

Стрелки с цифрами и без цифр используются для наглядности перемещений.

Если к поэтапной инструкции отсутствует серия из рисунков, то различные этапы обозначаются обычными цифрами.

Списки позиций

Для обозначения различных участков на обзорных рисунках используются красные кружки с цифрой. Эта же цифра приводится в списке позиций с описанием объекта, соответствующего данному рисунку.

Маркированные списки

При перечислении в Руководстве по эксплуатации используется маркированный список.

Пример:

•Охлаждающая жидкость

•Масло для двигателя

Продолжение следует

« Если раздел продолжается на следующем развороте, данный символ расположен справа внизу.

Запись данных

Компьютеры контролируют и обмениваются информацией о работе автомобиля, используя данные систем управления и безопасности автомобиля. Один или несколько таких компьютеров могут хранить информацию о системах, которые они контролируют в стандартных условиях вождения, во время столкновения или при обмене информации. Хранимая в памяти информация может использоваться:

•Volvo Car Corporation

•Мастерскими по ремонту и обслуживанию автомобиля

•Милицией или другими органами власти

•Другими лицами, имеющими право на законных основаниях или с разрешения владельца автомобиля пользоваться данной информацией.

Аксессуары и дополнительная оснастка

Неправильное подсоединение или установка дополнительного оборудования могут отрицательно повлиять на электронную систему автомобиля. Некоторые аксессуары функционируют только при условии, что соответствующее программное обеспечение установлено в компьютерной системе Вашего автомобиля. Поэтому перед установкой дополнительных принадлежностей, подключаемых или влияющих на электрическую систему автомобиля, мы рекомендуем обязательно обратиться на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo.

Лазерный датчик

На данном автомобиле установлен датчик лазерного излучения. При обращении с лазерным датчиком необходимо четко выполнять предписанные инструкции.

Следующие две таблички относятся к лазерному датчику:

Введение

Важная информация

•На верхней табличке на английском языке приводится классификация лазерного излучения: Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class 1M laser product.

Перевод английского текста дается в следующем предупреждающем окне.

•В нижней табличке на английском языке приводятся физические параметры лазерного излучения:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated

July 26th, 2001.

Детальное описание физических параметров приводится в таблице, а перевод текста

дается в следующем предупреждающем окне.

Параметры излучения лазерного датчика

Максимальная энергия	2,64 μДж
импульса

Максимальная средняя	45	мВт
выходная мощность

Ширина импульса	33	нс

Расходимость (по горизон-	28° × 12°
тали × вертикали)

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Нарушение данных инструкций может приводить к травме глаз!

•Запрещается смотреть в лазерный датчик (испускающий невидимые лазерные лучи) с расстояния менее 100 мм с применением увеличивающей оптики, как например, лупы, микроскопа, объектива или аналогичных оптических приборов.

•Проверка, ремонт, демонтаж, регулировка и/или замена деталей лазерного датчика может проводиться только уполномоченными мастерскими – мы рекомендуем обращаться на официальные станции техобслуживания Volvo.

•Чтобы избежать опасного облучения не проводите процедуры регулировки или обслуживания, не указанные в данном руководстве.

•При работе с лазерным датчиком монтер должен следовать специально разработанной для этого информации.

•Не демонтируйте лазерный датчик (включая линзы). Согласно стандарту IEC 60825-1 снятый лазерный датчик относится к лазерному классу 3В. Лазерный класс 3В не

Введение

Важная информация

безопасен для глаз, и поэтому существует опасность повреждения глаз.

•Перед демонтажем лазерного датчика с ветрового стекла необходимо сначала отсоединить контакт.

•Перед подсоединением контакта необходимо сначала установить лазерный датчик на ветровое стекло.

•Лазерный датчик испускает лазерные лучи, когда дистанционный ключ находится в положении II даже при неработающем двигателе (положения ключа см. стр. 79).

Дополнительную информацию о лазерном датчике см. стр. 183.

Информация в сети Интернет

На сайте www.volvocars.com можно найти дополнительную информацию о вашем автомобиле.

Введение

Volvo и окружающая среда

Экологическая концепция Volvo Car Corporation

G000000

Забота об окружающей среде является одним из основополагающих принципов деятельности всех подразделений Volvo Car Corporation. Мы также верим, что наши клиенты разделяют нашу заботу об окружающей среде.

Ваш автомобиль Volvo отвечает жестким международным стандартам по охране окружающей среды и, кроме того, изготавливается на одном из самых экологически чистых и ресурсосберегающих заводов в мире. Volvo Car Corporation сертифицирован согласно глобальному сертификату ISO, включающему экологический стандарт ISO

14001, в соответствии с которым действуют все наши заводы и большинство других наших подразделений. Мы требуем также, чтобы и наши партнеры систематически занимались вопросами охраны окружающей среды.

Расход топлива

Все автомобили Volvo конкурентоспособны в отношении расхода топлива в соответствующих классах. Чем меньше расход топлива, тем ниже в общем случае уровень выбросов двуокиси углерода — газа, создающего парниковый эффект.

Расход топлива зависит от водителя. С дополнительной информацией можно ознакомиться в рубрике Охрана окружающей среды, расположенной ниже.

Эффективная очистка отработавших газов

Ваш автомобиль Volvo изготовлен в соответствии с концепцией «Чистота внутри и снаружи» – концепция, которая предусматривает как чистую среду в салоне, так и высокую степень очистки отработанных газов. Во многих случаях уровень выбросов отработанных газов намного ниже действующих нормативов.

Введение

Volvo и окружающая среда

Чистый воздух в салоне

Фильтр в салоне препятствует проникновению в салон пыли и пыльцы через воздухозаборник.

Совершенная система контроля качества воздуха IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System), следит за тем, чтобы воздух, поступающий в салон, был чище, чем снаружи в транспортном потоке.

Система состоит из электронного датчика и угольного фильтра. Поступающий воздух постоянно контролируется, и воздухозаборник закрывается при повышенном содержании некоторых вредных для здоровья газов, например, оксида углерода. Подобная ситуация может встречаться, например, в плотном транспортном потоке, пробках или туннелях.

Угольный фильтр препятствует поступлению оксидов азота, приповерхностного озона и углеводородов.

Стандарт для текстильных покрытий

В салоне Volvo создается уютная и приятная атмосфера даже для страдающих контактной аллергией и астмой. Особое внимание уделено выбору экологически безопасных материалов, которые отвечают требованиям стандарта Oeko-Tex 1001 – большой

успех в создании еще более здорового климата в салоне.

Сертификации согласно Оеko-Tex подлежат, например, ремни безопасности, коврики и текстиль. Дубильные вещества для кожаной обивки, отвечающие требованиям этого стандарта, не содержат хрома, а в них входят растительные вещества.

Станции техобслуживания Volvo и экология

Регулярное обслуживание создает условия для увеличения срока службы автомобиля с сохранением низкого расхода топлива. Это способствует сохранению более чистой окружающей среды. Ваш автомобиль становится частью нашей системы, если Вы доверяете мастерским Volvo проводить сервис и обслуживание автомобиля. Мы уделяем внимание организации помещений в наших мастерских с целью предотвращения проливов и выбросов в окружающую среду. Персонал наших станций техобслуживания обладает необходимыми знаниями и оборудованием, что гарантирует максимальную экологическую безопасность.

Охрана окружающей среды

Вы можете внести свой вклад в охрану окружающей среды, например, экономичным

вождением, а также выполняя рекомендации по уходу и техобслуживанию автомобиля, приведенные в Руководстве по эксплуатации.

Несколько советов по защите окружающей среды (дополнительные советы о том, как можно снизить воздействие на окружающую среду, и экономичном вождении стр. 293, 228):

•Для низкого расхода топлива поддерживайте в шинах давление ECO, см. стр. 293.

•Груз на крыше и лыжный кофр увеличивают сопротивление воздуха, в связи с чем повышается расход топлива. Снимайте их сразу же после использования.

•Не возите в автомобиле ненужные вещи. Чем тяжелее груз, тем выше расход топлива.

•Если в автомобиле установлен предпусковой подогреватель, обязательно включайте его перед холодным пуском. Это позволяет уменьшить расход топлива и выбросы в атмосферу.

•Ведите автомобиль плавно, избегая резких торможений.

1 Более подробно см. www.oekotex.com

12 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

Введение

Volvo и окружающая среда

•Используйте максимально высокую передачу. На низких оборотах двигатель расходует меньше топлива.

•Притормаживайте двигателем.

•Не допускайте работу двигателя на холостых оборотах. Выполняйте местные предписания. Выключайте двигатель при длительном ожидании.

•Утилизируйте опасные для окружающей среды отходы, например, батарейки и масло, экологически безопасным способом. Если вы не знаете точно, как поступить с этими отходами, мы рекомендуем обратиться за советом на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo.

•Регулярно проводите техобслуживание автомобиля.

•Расход топлива значительно возрастает на высоких скоростях в связи с увеличением сопротивления воздуха. При увеличении скорости в два раза сопротивление воздуха возрастает в 4 раза.

Следуя этим советам, Вы добьетесь экономии топлива без каких-либо негативных последствий для продолжительности или комфортности поездки. Вы сбережете свой автомобиль, деньги и ресурсы планеты.

Руководство по эксплуатации и окружающая среда

Символ FSC указывает на то, что источником бумажной массы, использованной для публикации данного издания, послужили леса, сертифицированные FSC, или другие контролируемые источники.

Ремни безопасности ………………………………………………………………….	16
Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag)……………..	19
Активирование/отключение подушки безопасности*……………………	23
Боковая подушка безопасности (SIPS-bag) …………………………………	26
Надувной занавес (IC) ………………………………………………………………..	28
WHIPS ……………………………………………………………………………………….	29
Roll-Over Protection System
(система защиты при переворачивании автомобиля) – ROPS……….	31
Когда срабатывают системы ……………………………………………………..	32
Аварийный режим………………………………………………………………………	33
Безопасность детей……………………………………………………………………	34

G020871

14 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

БЕЗОПАСНОСТЬ

01 Безопасность

01		Ремни безопасности
	Общая информация	Громкий щелчок указывает на фиксацию		ную ленту ремня, как показано на пред-
					ремня безопасности.		ыдущем рисунке.

					На заднем сидении определенный язычок
						ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
					подходит только к соответствующему

					замку*.	Ремень безопасности и подушка безо-
					Отстегивание ремня безопасности	пасности срабатывают согласованно.
					Если ремень безопасности не пристегнут
					Нажмите на красную кнопку в замке и дайте	или используется неправильно, это

					катушке втянуть ремень безопасности. Если	может снизить защитные свойства
					ремень безопасности не втянулся полно-	надувной подушки безопасности в слу-
					чае столкновения.
					стью, подайте его вручную, чтобы он не про-

					висал.
					Ремень безопасности блокируется и не		ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ



	Если не пристегнуть ремень безопасности,	вытягивается:	Каждый ремень безопасности рассчитан
	резкое торможение может иметь серьезные	• если вытягивать его резко	только на одного человека.
	последствия. Поэтому проверьте, чтобы все	• во время торможения и ускорения
	пассажиры пристегнули ремни безопас-
	• если автомобиль сильно наклонен.
	ности.
	Для того чтобы ремень безопасности обес-	Всегда помните следующее:
	печивал максимальную защиту, необхо-	• нельзя использовать застежки и т.п.,
	димо, чтобы он плотно прилегал к телу. Не	мешающие нормальному прилеганию
	отклоняйте спинку сидения слишком далеко	ремня безопасности
	назад. Ремень безопасности рассчитан так,	• необходимо следить, чтобы ремень
	чтобы обеспечивать защиту при нормаль-	безопасности не был перекручен и не
	ном положении спинки.	зацепился за что-либо
	Пристегивание ремня безопасности	• набедренная часть ремня должна рас-
	Медленно вытяните ремень безопасности и	полагаться низко (не на животе)
	• необходимо натянуть набедренную
	застегните его, вставив язычок в замок.
					ленту по бедрам, протянув диагональ-

16 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Запрещается самостоятельно вносить изменения или проводить ремонт ремня безопасности. Volvo рекомендует обратиться на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo.

Если ремень безопасности подвергался сильным перегрузкам, например, во время столкновения, замене подлежит весь ремень. Даже если ремень безопасности выглядит неповрежденным, его защитные свойства могут быть частично утрачены. Заменяйте также изношенный или поврежденный ремень безопасности. Новый ремень безопасности должен быть одобрен и предназначен для установки на то же место, что и заменяемый.

Ремни безопасности и беременность

G020998

Следует обязательно пользоваться ремнем безопасности во время беременности, при это очень важно использовать его правильно. Ремень безопасности должен плотно прилегать к плечу, а диагональная часть ремня должна располагаться посередине на груди и сбоку живота.

Набедренная часть ремня безопасности должна плоско лежать на бедрах как можно ниже под животом. Не допускайте, – чтобы она скользила вверх по животу. Необходимо, чтобы ремень безопасности плотно прилегал к телу, не провисая без необходимости. Следите также за тем, чтобы ремень безопасности не был перекручен.

01 Безопасность

Вследствие того, что беременность изменяет фигуру спереди, беременным водителям следует регулировать кресло и рулевое колесо с тем, чтобы не терять возможность управлять автомобилем (это означает, что водитель должен легко доставать рулевое колесо и ножные педали). Следует устанавливать максимальное расстояние между животом и рулевым колесом.

Напоминание о ремне безопасности

G017726

Напоминание пассажирам, не пристегнутым ремнями безопасности, подается в виде звукового и светового сигнала. Звуковое напоминание зависит от скорости, а иногда подается по времени. Световое напоминание расположено в потолочной консоли и в комбинированном приборе.

01 Безопасность

01		Ремни безопасности
	На детские кресла действие системы напо-	Чтобы просмотреть сохраненные сообще-
	минания о ремне безопасности не распро-	ния, нажмите клавишу READ.

	страняется.

Некоторые рынки

Заднее сиденье

Напоминание о ремне безопасности на заднем сидении включает две составляющие функции:

•Информирует о том, какие ремни безопасности используются на заднем сидении. Сообщение показывается на информационном дисплее при использовании ремней безопасности или открытии задней двери. Сообщение удаляется автоматически прим. через 30 секунд, но может также подтверждаться нажатием кнопки READ на подрулевом рычаге мигающих сигналов.

•Напоминает о том, что во время движения отстегнут один из ремней безопасности на заднем сидении. Напоминание поступает в виде сообщения на информационном дисплее в сочетании со звуковым и световым сигналом. Напоминание аннулируется, если ремень безопасности вновь пристегивается, но может также подтверждаться вручную нажатием кнопки READ.

К сообщению на информационном дисплее, показывающему, какие ремни безопасности используются, имеется постоянный доступ.

Напоминание водителю и пассажиру на переднем сидении, не пристегнутому ремнем безопасности, подается в виде звукового и светового сигнала. На низкой скорости звуковое напоминание подается первые 6 секунд.

Натяжитель ремня безопасности

Все ремни безопасности оснащены преднатяжителем ремня. Механизм в преднатяжителе ремня натягивает ремень безопасности при достаточно сильном столкновении. При этом ремень безопасности более эффективно удерживает пассажира.

Предупреждающий символ в комбинированном приборе

G021010

Работа системы надувных подушек безопасности непрерывно контролируется модулем управления системы. Предупреждающий символ в комбинированном приборе включается в положении зажигания II или III. Этот символ гаснет прим. через

6 секунд, если система надувных подушек безопасности исправна.

01 Безопасность

Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag)		01
	Обзор системы надувных подушек
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
	безопасности

Если предупреждающий символ системы подушек безопасности продолжает гореть или включается во время движения, это указывает на нарушение в работе системы надувных подушек. Символ указывает на неисправность системы ремней безопасности, SIPS, системы IC или другую неисправность в системе SRS. Volvo рекомендует незамедлительно обратиться на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo.

	Если это необходимо, то одновременно с	G018665

	предупреждающим символом на информа-	Система SRS, автомобиль с левосторонним
	ционном дисплее появляется сообщение.
	управлением.
	Если предупреждающий символ неиспра-

	вен, загорается предупреждающий треу-
	гольник, и на дисплее появляется
	Возд.подуш. SRS Требует обслуж или
	Возд.подуш. SRS Треб.сроч.обслуж.
	Volvo рекомендует незамедлительно обрат-
	иться на официальную станцию техобслу-
	живания Volvo.
		G018666
		Система SRS, автомобиль с правосторонним
		управлением.

01 Безопасность

01 Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag)

Система SRS состоит из надувных подушек			ВНИМАНИЕ
безопасности и датчиков. Датчики реаги-
	Датчики срабатывают по-разному в
руют на достаточно сильное столкновение,
	зависимости от силы столкновения и от
и подушка/подушки безопасностинаду-
	того, пристегнут ли ремень безопас-
ваются, одновременно нагреваясь при этом.
	ности водителя или пассажира на перед-
Для амортизации удара подушка безопас-
	нем сидении соответственно.
ности выпускает воздух при сжатии. При
	При столкновении возможны ситуации,
этом в салоне появляется небольшое коли-
	когда срабатывает только одна подушка
чество дыма, что абсолютно нормально.
	безопасности (или ни одной). Система
Весь процесс, включая надувание и сдува-
	подушек безопасности распознает силу,
ние подушки безопасности, происходит в		приложенную к автомобилю при столк-
десятые доли секунды.		новении, и реагирует на это срабатыва-
			нием одной или нескольких надувных	Расположение подушки безопасности на сто-
	ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ		подушек безопасности.	роне пассажира в автомобиле с левосторон-
			Мощность подушек безопасности также	ним управлением.
Volvo рекомендует обратиться на офи-
	согласовывается с силой, приложенной
циальную станцию техобслуживания
	к автомобилю при столкновении.
Volvo для проведения ремонта. Непра-

вильное обращение с системой подушек
безопасности может привести к непра-
вильному функционированию и как след-
ствие тяжелым травмам.

Расположение подушки безопасности на стороне пассажира в автомобиле с правосторонним управлением.

Подушка безопасности на стороне водителя

G021011

В качестве дополнения к ремню безопасности на стороне пассажира автомобиль оснащен подушкой безопасности SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). которая в сложенном виде смонтирована в центре рулевого колеса. Такое рулевое колесо имеет маркировку SRS AIRBAG.

01 Безопасность
Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag)
01

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Ремень безопасности и подушка безопасности срабатывают согласованно. Если ремень безопасности не пристегнут или используется неправильно, это может снизить защитные свойства надувной подушки безопасности в случае столкновения.

Подушка безопасности на стороне пассажира

над перчаточным ящиком. Такая панель имеет маркировку SRS AIRBAG.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Для максимальной травмобезопасности при срабатывании надувной подушки безопасности пассажир должен сидеть как можно прямее, его ноги должны стоять на полу, а спина опираться на спинку кресла. Ремень безопасности должен быть натянут и пристегнут.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Не кладите какие-либо предметы перед или на приборной панели там, где находится надувная подушка безопасности пассажира.

В дополнение к ремню безопасности на стороне пассажира автомобиль оснащен надувной подушкой безопасности, которая в сложенном виде находится в отделении

01 Безопасность

01 Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag)

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Запрещено сажать детей в детское кресло или детскую подушку на переднем сиденье, если надувная подушка безопасности активирована1.

Не разрешайте детям стоять или сидеть перед креслом пассажира. На переднем сиденье пассажира запрещено сидеть пассажирам ростом менее 140 см, если подушка безопасности активирована.

Нарушение вышеперечисленных правил может быть опасно для жизни ребенка.

Табличка подушки безопасности

G032244

Табличка подушки безопасности расположена на стойке двери.

1 Информацию об активировании/отключении подушки безопасности см. стр. 23.

01 Безопасность

		Активирование/отключение подушки безопасности*		01
Отключение с помощью
	ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ			ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
автомобильного ключа – PACOS
Нарушение вышеперечисленных правил		Не разрешайте садиться на место пас-

Общая информация	может быть опасно для жизни пассажи-		сажира, если текстовое сообщение в
Подушку безопасности пассажира на	ров.		потолочной панели (см. стр. 24) указы-
			вает, что подушка безопасности отклю-
переднем сидении можно отключить, если
			чена, и одновременно в комбинирован-
автомобиль оснащен переключателем		ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ		ном приборе показывается предупреж-
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).	Если в автомобиле установлена подушка		дающий символ системы Airbag. Это
Информацию о включении/отключении		означает наличие серьезной неисправ-
безопасности на стороне переднего пас-
подушки см. в разделе Активирование/		ности. Незамедлительно обратитесь на
сажира, но переключатель (PACOS,
отключение.		станцию техобслуживания. Volvo реко-
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) отсут-
		мендует обратиться на официальную
	ствует, подушка безопасности всегда
Отключение с помощью		станцию техобслуживания Volvo.
находится в активированном состоянии.
автомобильного ключа/

переключатель

Переключатель подушки безопасности пассажира (PACOS) расположен в торце приборной панели на стороне пассажира и доступен, когда дверь открыта (см. в следующем разделе «Переключатель PACOS»). Контролируйте правильное положение переключателя. Для изменения положения переключателя Volvo рекомендует пользоваться вставным плоским ключом пульта дистанционного управления.

Информацию о плоском ключе, см. стр. 52.

Активирование/отключение

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Запрещено сажать детей в детское кресло или на опорную подушку на переднем сиденье, если надувная подушка безопасности активирована и горит символ в потолочной консоли. Нарушение вышеуказанного правила может быть опасно для жизни ребенка.

Расположение переключателя.

G032072

Подушка безопасности активирована. Если переключатель находится в этом положении, пассажир ростом выше 140 см может сидеть на переднем

* Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.	23

01 Безопасность

01 Активирование/отключение подушки безопасности*

кресле, а ребенок в детском кресле и на	Сообщения
опорной подушке никогда не должен

сидеть на этом месте.

Подушка безопасности отключена. Если переключатель находится в этом положении, ребенок в детском кресле или на опорной подушке может сидеть на месте пассажира на переднем сидении, а пассажирам ростом выше 140 см запрещается занимать это место.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Активированная подушка безопасности (место пассажира):

Запрещено сажать детей в детское кресло или детскую опорную подушку на переднем сиденье, если надувная подушка безопасности активирована. Это относится ко всем лицам ростом менее 140 см.

Отключенная подушка безопасности

(место пассажира):

Пассажирам ростом выше 140 см запрещается занимать переднее сиденье при отключенной подушке безопасности.

Нарушение вышеперечисленных правил может быть опасно для жизни.

Индикация в потолочной консоли, которая указывает, что подушка безопасности на стороне пассажира отключена.

Текстовое сообщение и символ в потолочной панели указывают, что подушка безопасности пассажира на переднем сидении отключена (см. предыдущий рисунок).

G017800

Индикация в потолочной консоли, которая указывает, что подушка безопасности на стороне пассажира активирована.

Предупреждающий символ в потолочной панели указывает, что подушка безопасности переднего пассажира активирована (см. предыдущий рисунок).

24 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

01 Безопасность

Активирование/отключение подушки безопасности*

ВНИМАНИЕ

Когда дистанционный ключ устанавливается в положение зажигания II или III, в комбинированном приборе в течение прим. 6 секунд показывается предупреждающий символ подушки безопасности (см. стр. 19).

После этого включается индикация в потолочной консоли, которая показывает действующий статус подушки безопасности пассажира. Дополнительную информацию о различных положениях зажигания для дистанционного ключа см. стр. 79.

* Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.	25

01 Безопасность

01 Боковая подушка безопасности (SIPS-bag)

Боковая подушка безопасности

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

• Volvo рекомендует проводить ремонт только на официальной станции техобслуживания Volvo. Неправильное обращение с системой боковых подушек SIPS может привести к неправильному функционированию и как следствие тяжелым травмам.

				• Между внешней боковой поверхно-
					стью сиденья и панелью двери не
					должны находиться посторонние
	G032949
				предметы, так как эта зона нахо-
					дится в пределах досягаемости

При боковом столкновении SIPS (Side			боковой подушки безопасности.
	•	Volvo рекомендует использовать
Impact Protection System) направляет боль-
шую часть силы удара на балки, стойки, пол,			только чехлы, одобренные для
крышу и другие элементы кузова автомо-			использования Volvo. Другие чехлы
биля. Боковые подушки безопасности на			могут помешать функционированию
стороне водителя и пассажира защищают		•	боковых подушек безопасности.
грудь и бедра и являются важным элемен-		Боковая подушка безопасности
том системы SIPS.			является дополнением к ремню
Система SIPS-bag состоит из двух основных			безопасности. Обязательно присте-
		гивайтесь ремнем безопасности.
частей: боковой подушки безопасности и

датчиков. Боковая подушка безопасности		Детское кресло и боковая подушка
смонтирована на раме спинки переднего
сидения.		безопасности
				Боковая подушка безопасности не снижает
				защитные свойства автомобиля в отноше-

1 Информацию об активировании/отключении подушки безопасности см. стр. 23.

нии детского кресла или детской опорной подушки.

Детское кресло/опорная подушка может размещаться на переднем сиденье только, если автомобиль не оборудован активируемой1 подушкой безопасности на стороне пассажира.

Расположение

G024377

Место водителя, автомобиль с левосторонним управлением.

G024378

Место пассажира, автомобиль с левосторонним управлением.

Система подушек SIPS состоит из боковых подушек безопасности и датчиков. При достаточно сильном столкновении датчики реагируют, и боковая подушка надувается. Боковая подушка безопасности надувается между пассажиром и дверной панелью и тем самым гасит силу удара, направленную на пассажира, в момент столкновения. Когда в момент удара подушка сдавливается, она сдувается. Обычно боковая подушка безопасности срабатывает только на стороне удара.

01 Безопасность

Боковая подушка безопасности (SIPS-bag)

Табличка, боковая подушка безопасности

G032254

Табличка боковой подушки безопасности расположена на стойке двери.

01 Безопасность

01 Надувной занавес (IC)

Назначение

Надувной занавес IC (Inflatable Curtain) является дополнением к подушкам SIPS и SRS. Он смонтирован в облицовке потолка вдоль боковин автомобиля и защищает пассажиров на внешних местах в автомобиле. При достаточно сильном столкновении датчики реагируют, и занавес надувается. Надувной занавес помогает во время столкновения защитить голову водителя и пассажиров от ударов о внутренние поверхности автомобиля.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Нельзя подвешивать или крепить тяжелые предметы за ручки, расположенные в потолке. Крючок, установленный на ручке, предназначен для легкой одежды (а не для твердых предметов, таких, например, как зонты).

Не вкручивайте и не монтируйте чтолибо на внутренней облицовке потолка, стойках дверей или боковых панелях. Это может снизить защитные свойства автомобиля. Volvo рекомендует устанавливать в этих зонах только оригинальные детали, одобренные Volvo.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Груз в автомобиле должен располагаться на 50 мм ниже верхнего края стекол в дверях. В противном случае может пропасть защитный эффект надувного занавеса, спрятанного за обшивкой потолка автомобиля.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Надувной занавес является дополнением к ремню безопасности.

Обязательно пристегивайтесь ремнем безопасности.

01 Безопасность

				WHIPS	01
Защита от плетевых травм шеи –	Система WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System)	Система WHIPS и детское кресло/
WHIPS	состоит из энергопоглощающей спинки и	опорная подушка

	специально модернизированного для дан-	Система WHIPS не снижает защитные

	ной системы подголовника в передних сиде-	свойства детского кресла или детской
	ниях. Система активируется в момент удара	опорной подушки.
	сзади, и ее срабатывание зависит от угла	Правильная посадка
	удара, скорости и вида транспортного сред-
	ства, нанесшего удар.	Максимальная защита водителя и пасса-
				жира на переднем сиденье обеспечивается,
		ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ		когда они сидят посередине своих сидений
				с минимальным расстоянием между головой
	Система WHIPS является дополнением к
		и подголовником.
	ремню безопасности. Обязательно при-

	стегивайтесь ремнем безопасности.		Не создавайте помех для

	Функции кресла	функционирования системы WHIPS


	При активировании системы WHIPS спинки
	передних кресел откидываются назад,
	изменяя положение водителя и пассажира
	на переднем сиденье. Это снижает опас-
	ность повреждения шейных позвонков при
	резком ударе, т.н. плетевых травмы.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Запрещается самостоятельно вносить изменения или проводить ремонт кресла или системы WHIPS. Volvo рекомендует обратиться на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo.

Не кладите какие-либо предметы на пол за креслом водителя/пассажира.

01 Безопасность

01	WHIPS

		ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ			ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
	Не кладите коробки и другой аналогич-		Если кресло подвергалось сильным
	ный багаж так, чтобы он оказался зажа-		перегрузкам, например, при наезде
	тым между подушкой заднего сидения и		сзади, необходимо проверить работу
	спинкой переднего сидения. Не созда-		системы WHIPS. Volvo рекомендует про-
	вайте помех функционированию		вести проверку на официальной станции
	системы WHIPS.		техобслуживания Volvo.
				Даже если кресло не имеет видимых

				повреждений, защитные свойства
				системы WHIPS могут быть частично
				утрачены.
				Volvo рекомендует обратиться на офи-
				циальную станцию техобслуживания
				Volvo для проверки системы даже при
				незначительных наездах сзади.

Не кладите посторонние предметы на заднее сидение.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Если спинка заднего сидения опущена вниз, следует переместить переднее кресло вперед так, чтобы оно не соприкасалось с опущенной спинкой.

01 Безопасность

Roll-Over Protection System (система защиты при переворачивании автомобиля) – ROPS		01
Функция
	ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
Система Volvo Roll-Over Protection System	При нормальном стиле вождения
(ROPS) разработана для снижения риска
система RSC повышает безопасность
переворачивания автомобиля, а также для
автомобиля на дороге, но это не должно
обеспечения максимально возможной	служить основанием для увеличения
защиты в случае, если столкновение все же	скорости. Для безопасного вождения
произошло.	всегда соблюдайте обычные меры пре-
Система состоит из системы стабилизации	досторожности.


Roll Stability Control (RSC), которая снижает
риск переворотов и разворотов, например,
при сильных выруливаниях или в случае
заноса.
В системе RSC используется датчик, кото-
рый регистрирует изменение бокового
наклона автомобиля. С помощью этой
информации рассчитывается риск перево-
рота автомобиля. Если риск существует,
подключается система DSTC, момент дви-
гателя падает, и притормаживаются одно
или несколько колес с тем, чтобы вернуть
устойчивость автомобилю.
О системе DSTC см. далее на стр. 167.

01 Безопасность

01		Когда срабатывают системы
	Когда срабатывают системы		Если подушки безопасности сработали,
				ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
					рекомендуется следующее:
		Система	Активирование			Модуль управления системами подушек
			• Доставка автомобиля. Volvo рекомен-
						безопасности расположен в централь-
		Преднатяжитель	При фронтальном
				дует доставить автомобиль на офи-		ной консоли. Если центральная консоль
		ремня безопас-	и/или боковом			циальную станцию техобслуживания		окажется погруженной в воду или другую
		ности, передние	столкновении и/			Volvo. Запрещается управлять автомо-		жидкость, отсоедините провода аккуму-
		сидения	или наезде сзади и/			билем со сработавшими подушками		ляторной батареи. Не запускайте двига-
			или перевороте			безопасности.		тель, так как могут сработать подушки
					• Volvo рекомендует доверить официаль-		безопасности. Доставка автомобиля.
		Преднатяжители	При фронтальном			Volvo рекомендует доставить автомо-
				ной станции техобслуживания Volvo
		ремней безопас-	столкновении и/				биль на официальную станцию техоб-
				замену компонентов в системах безо-		служивания Volvo.
		ности задних сиде-	или перевороте
				пасности автомобиля.
		ний
				• Обязательно обратитесь к врачу.
							ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
		Надувные подушки	При фронтальном

		безопасности SRS	столкновенииA			ВНИМАНИЕ		Запрещается управлять автомобилем со
								сработавшими подушками безопас-
		Боковые подушки	При боковом		Активирование системы SRS, SIPS, IC и		ности. Это может затруднить управле-
		безопасности SIPS	столкновении		ремней безопасности во время столкно-		ние автомобилем. Другие системы
					вения происходит только однократно.		защиты также могут быть повреждены.
		Надувной занавес	При боковом					Интенсивное задымление и запыление
		IC	столкновении и/					во время срабатывания подушек безо-
						пасности может вызвать раздражение/
			или перевороте
							травмы глаз и кожи. При раздражении

		Защита от травм	При наезде сзади					промойте холодной водой. Быстрое сра-
						батывание подушек безопасности в
		шеи WHIPS
							сочетании с материалом подушек может

	A В результате столкновения автомобиль может быть					также вызвать ожоги кожи и раздраже-
		сильно деформирован, но подушки безопасности при					ние вследствие трения.
		этом могут не срабатывать. На способ активирования
		различных систем безопасности автомобиля влияют
		ряд факторов, как, например, жесткость и вес объекта
		столкновения, скорость автомобиля, угол, под которым
		произошло столкновение и пр.

Ограничение действия функций

G021062

Если автомобиль участвовал в столкновении, на информационном дисплее может появиться текст Аварийный режим См. руководство. Это означает, что не все функции автомобиля выполняются в полном объеме. Режим безопасности это защита, которая задействуется, когда во время столкновения могли быть повреждены важные функции автомобиля, например, топливопроводы, датчики одной из систем защиты или система тормозов.

Попытка пуска двигателя

Сначала убедитесь, что из автомобиля не вытекает топливо. Запах топлива также не допускается.

01 Безопасность

		Аварийный режим	01
Если все выглядит нормально, то после про-
	ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
верки отсутствия утечки топлива можно
Не пытайтесь самостоятельно ремонти-
попытаться завести двигатель.
ровать автомобиль или возвращать
Сначала выньте из замка пульт дистанцион-
электронику в исходное положение
ного управления и вновь вставьте его на	после регистрации аварийного режима.
место. Электронные системы автомобиля	Это может привести к травмам или
попытаются самовосстановиться до нор-	неправильной работе систем автомо-
биля. Volvo рекомендует доверить офи-
мального состояния. После этого попытай-
циальной станции техобслуживания
тесь запустить двигатель. Если сообщение
Volvo провести проверку и возврат авто-
Аварийный режим См. руководство
мобиля в нормальный режим работы
остается на дисплее, автомобилем запре-	после того, как было показано сообще-
щается управлять или буксировать; его	ние Аварийный режим См.
необходимо эвакуировать. Скрытые	руководство.
повреждения могут препятствовать упра-

влению автомобилем во время движения,
	ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
даже если Вам кажется, что автомобиль не
Ни при каких обстоятельствах не заво-
потерял управление.
Перемещение	дите двигатель после появления сооб-
щения Режим безопасности, если чув-
Если Normal mode показывается после	ствуется запах топлива. Без промедле-
сброса Аварийный режим См.	ния покиньте автомобиль.
руководство, автомобиль можно осто-
рожно убрать с проезжей части. Не переме-		ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
щайте автомобиль дальше, чем это необхо-
Если автомобиль остается в аварийном
димо.
режиме, его запрещается буксировать.

	Его следует эвакуировать с места ава-
	рии. Volvo рекомендует доставить авто-
	мобиль на официальную станцию техоб-
	служивания Volvo.

01 Безопасность

01		Безопасность детей
	Дети должны сидеть так, чтобы им
		ВНИМАНИЕ
	было удобно и безопасно
	С вопросами по монтажу оборудования
	Место ребенка в автомобиле и необходимое
	для безопасности детей обращайтесь к
	оборудование выбирается в зависимости от
	его изготовителю за более четкими
	веса и роста ребенка; подробную информа-	инструкциями.
	цию см. стр. 36.

ВНИМАНИЕ

В разных странах существуют разные правила, регламентирующие размещение ребенка в автомобиле. Ознакомьтесь с действующими правилами.

Дети любого возраста и роста должны всегда сидеть в автомобиле правильно пристегнутыми. Ребенок, ни при каких обстоятельствах не должен сидеть на коленях пассажира.

Оригинальное оборудование Volvo для безопасности детей сконструировано специально для Вашего автомобиля. Volvo рекомендует использовать оригинальное оборудование Volvo, чтобы быть уверенным в правильном расположении и надежности точек крепления и крепежных деталей.

Детские кресла

G020739

Детское кресло и надувная подушка безопасности несовместимы.

Volvo выпускает изделия, обеспечивающие безопасность детей, которые разработаны специально для автомобилей Volvo и проверены на них.

1 Информацию об активированной/отключенной подушке безопасности (SRS) см. стр. 23.

ВНИМАНИЕ

При использовании изделий для безопасности детей необходимо ознакомиться с прилагаемыми инструкциями по монтажу.

Не закрепляйте крепежные ленты детского кресла на штоке продольного перемещения кресла, пружинах или различных направляющих и балках под сидением. Острые края могут повредить крепежные ленты.

Для правильной установки ознакомьтесь с инструкциями по монтажу детского кресла.

Местоположение детских кресел

Следует размещать:

•детское кресло/опорную подушку на кресле пассажира, если на месте пассажира отсутствует активированная подушка безопасности1.

•повернутое назад детское кресло на заднем сидении.

Ребенок должен находиться на заднем сидении, если подушка на стороне пассажира активирована. Если ребенок находится на месте пассажира, то, когда

01 Безопасность

подушка безопасности надувается, он	ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ	Табличка с информацией о подушке
может получить серьезные травмы.	Запрещается использовать детские	безопасности

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ	опорные подушки/детские кресла, осна-
щенные стальными скобами или другими

Запрещено сажать детей в детское	элементами, которые могут соприка-
кресло или детскую подушку на перед-	саться с кнопкой замка ремня безопас-
нем сиденье, если активирована надув-	ности, так как это может привести к слу-
ная подушка безопасности (SRS).	чайному открытию замка ремня.

На переднем сиденье пассажира запре-	Следите за тем, чтобы верхняя часть	Табличка расположена в торце приборной
панели на стороне пассажира.
щено сидеть лицам ростом менее 140 см,	детского кресла не опиралась на ветро-

если активирована подушка безопас-	вое стекло.
ности (SRS).

Нарушение вышеперечисленных правил
может быть опасно для жизни ребенка.

01 Безопасность

01		Безопасность детей
	Рекомендуемое детское защитное оборудование2
		Вес/Возраст	Переднее сиденье		Внешние места заднего сиде-	Среднее место заднего сиде-
					ния	ния

		Группа 0	Детское кресло Volvo – Повернутое		Детское кресло Volvo – Повернутое
		макс. 10 кг	назад детское защитное кресло,		назад детское защитное кресло,
		крепится с помощью ремня безопас-		крепится с помощью ремня безопас-
		(0-9 месяцев)
		ности автомобиля и крепежной		ности автомобиля, крепежной
		и	ленты.		ленты и опоры.

		Группа 0+	Тип разрешения: E5 03135		Тип разрешения: E5 03135

		макс. 13 кг	Младенческая вставка Volvo –		Младенческая вставка Volvo –	Младенческая вставка Volvo –
			Повернутое назад детское защитное		Повернутое назад детское защитное	Повернутое назад детское защитное
			кресло, крепится с помощью		кресло, крепится с помощью	кресло, крепится с помощью ремня
			системы ISOFIX.		системы ISOFIX.	безопасности автомобиля.
			Тип разрешения: E1 03301146		Тип разрешения: E1 03301146	Тип разрешения: E1 03301146

			Младенческая вставка Volvo –		Младенческая вставка Volvo –
			Повернутое назад детское защитное		Повернутое назад детское защитное
			кресло, крепится с помощью ремня		кресло, крепится с помощью ремня
			безопасности автомобиля.		безопасности автомобиля.
			Тип разрешения: E1 03301146		Тип разрешения: E1 03301146

2В отношении другого оборудования для защиты детей Ваш автомобиль должен быть включен в соответствующий перечень производителя или соответствовать в целом нормативным требованиям ECE R44.

01 Безопасность

			Безопасность детей	01

Вес/Возраст	Переднее сиденье	Внешние места заднего сиде-	Среднее место заднего сиде-
		ния	ния
Группа 1	Детское кресло Volvo – Повернутое	Детское кресло Volvo – Повернутое
9-18 кг	назад детское защитное кресло,	назад детское защитное кресло,
крепится с помощью ремня безопас-	крепится с помощью ремня безопас-
(9-36 месяцев)
ности автомобиля и крепежной	ности автомобиля, крепежной
	ленты.	ленты и опоры.
	Тип разрешения: E5 03135	Тип разрешения: E5 03135

	Детское поворотное кресло Volvo –	Детское поворотное кресло Volvo –
	Повернутое назад детское защитное	Повернутое назад детское защитное
	кресло, крепится с помощью ремня	кресло, крепится с помощью ремня
	автомобиля и крепежной ленты.	автомобиля и крепежной ленты.
	Тип разрешения: E5 04192	Тип разрешения: E5 04192

	Britax Frixway – Повернутое назад	Britax Frixway – Повернутое назад
	детское защитное кресло с систе-	детское защитное кресло с систе-
	мой крепления ISOFIX и крепежной	мой крепления ISOFIX и крепежной
	лентой.	лентой.
	Тип разрешения: E5 03171	Тип разрешения: E5 03171

01 Безопасность

01	Безопасность детей

	Вес/Возраст	Переднее сиденье	Внешние места заднего сиде-	Среднее место заднего сиде-
			ния	ния
	Группа 2, 15-25 кг, 3-6	Детское поворотное кресло Volvo –	Детское поворотное кресло Volvo –	Детское поворотное кресло Volvo –
	лет	Повернутое вперед детское защит-	Повернутое вперед детское защит-	Повернутое вперед детское защит-
		ное кресло, крепится с помощью	ное кресло, крепится с помощью	ное кресло, крепится с помощью
		ремня автомобиля.	ремня автомобиля.	ремня автомобиля.
		Тип разрешения: E5 04191	Тип разрешения: E5 04191	Тип разрешения: E5 04191

		Детское поворотное кресло Volvo –	Детское поворотное кресло Volvo –
		Повернутое назад детское защитное	Повернутое назад детское защитное
		кресло, крепится с помощью ремня	кресло, крепится с помощью ремня
		безопасности автомобиля и крепеж-	безопасности автомобиля и крепеж-
		ной ленты.	ной ленты.
		Тип разрешения: E5 04192	Тип разрешения: E5 04192
	Группа 2/3	Опорная подушка Volvo – с или без	Опорная подушка Volvo – с или без	Опорная подушка Volvo – с или без
	15-36 кг	спинки.	спинки.	спинки.

	(3-12 лет)	Тип разрешения: E5 03139	Тип разрешения: E5 03139	Тип разрешения: E5 03139
		Детская опорная подушка Volvo со	Детская опорная подушка Volvo со	Детская опорная подушка Volvo со
		спинкой.	спинкой.	спинкой.
		Тип разрешения: E1 04301198	Тип разрешения: E1 04301198	Тип разрешения: E1 04301198
			Встроенная фиксируемая ремнем
			двухуровневая опорная подушка –
			опция, устанавливаемая на заводе-
			изготовителе.
			Тип разрешения: E5 04189

Интегрированные двухуровневые фиксируемые ремнем опорные подушки*

G017875

Правильное положение, ремень лежит на плече.

01 Безопасность

•что ремень безопасности не лежит на горле ребенка или ниже плеча (см. предыдущие рисунки)

•что для наилучшей защиты набедренная часть ремня безопасности расположена низко на бедрах.

		Уровень 1	Уровень 2
	Вес	22-36 кг	15-25 кг
G017719	Длина	115-140 см	95-120 см
Неправильное положение, голова не должна	Инструкции по регулировке опорной
находиться выше подголовника, и ремень не
подушки на двух уровнях см. страницы 39-
должен лежать ниже плеча.
41.
Интегрированные двухуровневые фикси-
Раскладывание двухуровневой
руемые ремнем опорные подушки скон-
струированы специально для обеспечения	опорной подушки
безопасности детей. В комбинации с ремнем	Уровень 1
безопасности опорная подушка одобрена

для детей весом от 15 до 36 кг и ростом от
95 до 140 см.

Перед началом поездки проверьте:

•что встроенная двухуровневая опорная подушка установлена правильно (см. таблицу ниже) и зафиксирована

•что ремень безопасности плотно приле-

гает к телу ребенка, не провисает и не перевернут

* Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.	39

01 Безопасность

01		Безопасность детей
			Чтобы освободить опорную подушку,	Из нижнего положения. Нажмите кнопку.

	потяните за ручку вперед и вверх.




						G017784
		G017697

Для фиксирования вдавите опорную подушку назад.

Уровень 2

Поднимите подушку за передний край и для фиксации надавите назад в направлении спинки сидения.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Volvo рекомендует ремонт или замену проводить только на официальной станции техобслуживания Volvo. Не вносите изменений и дополнений в конструкцию опорной подушки. Если встроенная опорная подушка подвергалась сильным перегрузкам, например, во время столкновения, замене подлежит подушка целиком. Даже если опорная подушка не имеет видимых повреждений, ее защитные свойства могут быть частично утрачены. Опорную подушку следует также заменить, если она сильно изношена.

ВНИМАНИЕ

Нельзя установить опорную подушку в положение 1 из положения 2. Для этого сначала необходимо вернуть ее в исходное положение, полностью опустив подушку сидения. См. ниже раздел «Складывание двухуровневой опорной подушки».

Складывание двухуровневой опорной подушки

Полное складывание в подушку сидения можно проводить как из верхнего, так и нижнего положения. Но переместить опорную подушку из верхнего положения в нижнее положение нельзя.

Чтобы освободить подушку, потяните за ручку вперед.

Для фиксации подушки потяните вниз за ручку в середине подушки.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Невыполнение инструкций по использованию двухуровневой опорной подушки может в случае аварии привести к серьезным травмам ребенка.

ВАЖНО

При складывании подушки, убедитесь, что под подушкой отсутствуют посторонние предметы (например, игрушки).

01 Безопасность

ВНИМАНИЕ

При складывании спинки заднего сидения необходимо сначала опустить опорную подушку.

Замок для безопасности детей

Ручки управления стеклоподъемниками и дверные ручки задних дверей можно заблокировать, чтобы они не срабатывали изнутри. Более подробно см. стр. 64.

Система крепления детской защиты ISOFIX

G021064

Точки крепления системы ISOFIX спрятаны сзади в нижней части спинки внешних мест заднего сидения.

01 Безопасность

01		Безопасность детей
	Местоположение точек крепления показано
		Класс	Описание		Класс	Описание
	символами на обивке спинки (см. предыду-
		размера			размера
	щий рисунок).
	Для доступа к точкам крепления нажмите на		A	Максимальный размер,			F	Поперечная вставка для
			повернутая вперед детская				младенца, левая
	подушку сидения.
			защита
								G	Поперечная вставка для

			ВНИМАНИЕ		В	Уменьшенный размер (или
							младенца, правая
		Система креплений ISOFIX дополнитель-			1), повернутая вперед дет-
		ное оборудование для кресла пасса-			ская защита
						ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
		жира.
			B1	Уменьшенный размер (или		Запрещается сажать ребенка на место


						2), повернутая вперед дет-
	Крепление защиты для детей к точкам креп-				пассажира, если в автомобиле установ-
			ская защита		лена активированная подушка безопас-
	ления ISOFIX проводите только согласно
					ности.
	инструкциям по монтажу производителя.		C	Максимальный размер,


	Классы размеров			повернутая назад детская
					ВНИМАНИЕ
			защита
	И детская защита и автомобили — выпуск					Если на детской защите ISOFIX отсут-
		D	Уменьшенный размер,
	аются разного размера. Поэтому не любая
			ствует классификация по размеру, то в
	детская защита подходит для различных			повернутая назад детская
				этом случае данная модель автомобиля
	мест в автомобилях разных моделей.			защита
				должна быть указана в списке моделей,
	В связи с этим для детской защиты, устана-		Е	Повернутая назад вставка		для которых предназначена данная
			защита для детей.
	вливаемой в креплениях ISOFIX, введена			для младенца


	классификация по размеру, что помогает

	пользователю выбирать правильную						ВНИМАНИЕ
	защиту для детей (см. предыдущую
					Volvo рекомендует получить информа-
	таблицу).
					цию о том, какую детскую защиту ISOFIX

								рекомендует Volvo, у авторизованного
								дилера Volvo.

01 Безопасность

							Безопасность детей	01
Типы защиты для детей с креплением ISOFIX

Тип защиты для детей	Вес (Возраст)		Класс размера		Места для пассажиров с креплением детской
					защиты ISOFIX
					Переднее сиденье		Внешние места заднего
							сидения

Вставка для младенцапо-	макс. 10 кг (0-9 мес.)		F		–		–
перечная
		G		–		–

Вставка для младенца	макс. 10 кг (0-9 мес.)		Е		ДА		ДА
повернутая назад

Вставка для младенца	макс. 13 кг (0 — 12 мес.)		Е		ДА		ДА
повернутая назад
		D		ДА		ДА


			C		ДА		ДА

Защита для детей повер-	9-18 кг (9-36 мес.)		D		ДА		ДА
нутая назад
		C		ДА		ДА


Детская защита, устано-	9-18 кг (9-36 мес.)		В		ДАA		ДАA
вленная по ходу движения
		B1		ДАA		ДАA


			A		ДАA		ДАA

A Для данной группы Volvo рекомендует повернутую назад защиту для детей.

01 Безопасность

01		Безопасность детей
	Верхние точки крепления детских
			ВНИМАНИЕ
	кресел
		Если в автомобиле установлены склады-

						вающиеся подголовники внешних мест,
						то для облегчения монтажа детской
						защиты такого типа их следует сложить.


							ВНИМАНИЕ

						В автомобилях с установленной защит-
						ной шторкой поверх багажа в багажном
						отделении: перед креплением защиты
						для детей ее следует снять.
				G017676
					Детальную информацию о креплении детс-


	Для некоторых устанавливаемых по ходу		ких кресел в верхних точках см. инструкции
		по монтажу от производителя детских кре-
	движения детских кресел в автомобилях
		сел.
	имеются верхние точки крепления. Эти

	точки крепления расположены на обратной
			ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
	стороне сидения.
	Верхние точки крепления предназначены,		Перед тем, как крепежные ленты дет-
		ского кресла натянуть и закрепить в точ-
	прежде всего, для использования вместе с
		ках крепления, их следует обязательно
	детскими креслами, устанавливаемыми по
		протянуть под задними подголовниками.
	ходу движения. Volvo рекомендует, как


	можно дольше сажать маленьких детей в
	повернутые назад детские кресла.

01 Безопасность

Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ……………………………………………	48
Замена батарейки в дистанционном ключе/РСС*…………………………	54
Keyless drive*………………………………………………………………………………	56
Запирание/отпирание…………………………………………………………………	59
Замок для безопасности детей…………………………………………………..	64
Сигнализация*……………………………………………………………………………	65

46 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

ЗАМКИ И СИГНАЛИЗАЦИЯ

02 Замки и сигнализация

Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ

Общие сведения

Автомобиль поставляется с двумя дистанционными ключами или двумя коммуникаторами РСС (Personal Car Communicator. Они используются для пуска двигателя, а также для запирания и отпирания автомобиля.

Вы можете заказать ключи дополнительно – к одному автомобилю можно запрограммировать и использовать до шести ключей.

В РСС входит больше функций по сравнению с дистанционным ключом. Далее в данной главе приводится описание функций, общих для РСС и дистанционного ключа.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Если в автомобиле находятся дети:

Если водитель покидает автомобиль, обязательно, вынув дистанционный ключ, отключите питание от стеклоподъемников и люка в крыше.

Вставной плоский ключ

В дистанционном ключе находится вставной плоский металлический ключ для механического запирания/отпирания двери водителя и перчаточного ящика.

Плоский ключ используется также для отключения/включения PACOS*, см. стр. 23.

Функции вставного плоского ключа см. стр. 52.

Оригинальный код плоского ключа имеется на официальных станциях техобслуживания Volvo, где рекомендуется заказывать новые плоские ключи.

Утрата дистанционного ключа

В случае утраты дистанционного ключа новый ключ можно заказать в мастерской – рекомендуется обращаться на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo. При этом на станцию техобслуживания следует взять все оставшиеся ключи. Для предотвращения возможности угона автомобиля необходимо удалить код утраченного ключа из системы.

Число ключей, зарегистрированных для данного автомобиля, можно проверить в

Настройки машиныПамять ключа машиныКоличество ключей. Описание системы меню см. стр. 132.

Память ключа – внешние зеркала заднего вида и кресло водителя

Настройки автоматически подсоединяются к соответствующему дистанционному ключу, см. страницы 82 и 103.

Функцию можно активировать/отключить в

Настройки машиныПамять ключа

машиныРаспол. сиден. и зерк. Описание системы меню см. стр. 132.

Для автомобилей с функцией «без ключа» Keyless drive см. стр. 56.

Индикация при запирании/отпирании

Когда автомобиль запирается или отпирается дистанционным ключом, мигающие сигналы следующим образом указывают на правильное запирание/отпирание:

•Запирание – однократное мигание

•Отпирание – двукратное мигание.

При запирании индикация включается только, если после закрытия дверей все замки были заперты.

Функцию можно активировать/отключить в

Настройки машиныНастройки освещенияБлок. подтверж. свет и

Настройки машиныНастройки освещенияРазблок. подтв. свет соответственно.

Описание системы меню см. стр. 132.

Электронная блокировка запуска двигателя

Каждому дистанционному ключу соответствует однозначно определяемый код. Двигатель можно запустить только при исполь-

48 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

02 Замки и сигнализация

Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ

зовании подходящего дистанционного ключа с правильным кодом.

В информационном дисплее комбинированного прибора с электронной блокировкой старта связаны следующие сообщения о неисправности:

Сообщение	Значение

Ошибка ключа	Ошибка при считы-
Вын./встав. ключ	вании ключа во
	время пуска.
	Повторить пуск
	автомобиля.

Ключ автомо-	Относится только к
биля не найден	функции вождения
	без ключа PCC.
	Ошибки считыва-
	ния PCC при запу-
	ске. Повторить
	пуск автомобиля.

Иммобилайзер	Ошибка в работе
Повтор. попытку	дистанционного
	ключа во время
	пуска. Если ошибка
	сохраняется, реко-
	мендуется обрат-
	иться на офи-
	циальную станцию
	техобслуживания
	Volvo.

Пуск двигателя см. стр. 111.

Функции

G021078

Дистанционный ключ.

Запирание

Отпирание

Прод. удал. вкл.свет

Дверь задка Функция паники

Loading…

Источник

Страница 1 из 331

VOLVO XC60 РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ WEB EDITION Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&&%%*Gjhh^Vc!6I%.’%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\’%%.!8deng^\]i’%%%»‘%%.Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc

Страница 2 из 331

УВАЖАЕМЫЕ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЫ АВТОМОБИЛЯ VOLVO! СПАСИБО ЗА ВАШ ВЫБОР АВТОМОБИЛЯ VOLVO! Мы надеемся, что Вы в течение многих лет получите наслаждение от управления Вашим автомобилем Volvo. Этот автомобиль создан для обеспечения комфорта и безопасности Вам и Вашим пассажирам. Volvo — это один из самых

Страница 3 из 331

Содержание 00 01 02 2 00 Введение 01 Безопасность Важная информация…………………………… 6 Volvo и окружающая среда……………….. 11 Ремни безопасности ………………………… Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag)…………………………..

Страница 4 из 331

Содержание Встроенный телефон*…………………….. 221 03 04 04 03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления………….. 70 Положения ключа…………………………….. 79 Сидения…………………………………………… 81 Рулевое

Страница 5 из 331

Содержание 05 06 07 05 В поездке Рекомендации во время езды………….. Заправка топливом…………………………. Топливо………………………………………….. Погрузка………………………………………… Багажное отделение……………………….. Треугольный

Страница 6 из 331

Содержание 08 08 Алфавитный указатель Алфавитный указатель……………………. 316 5

Страница 7 из 331

Введение Важная информация Читайте Руководство по эксплуатации сбыта и национальных или местных законов и правил. Введение Технические характеристики, особенности конструкции и иллюстрации в настоящем руководстве по эксплуатации не являются обязательными. Мы сохраняем за собой право вносить

Страница 8 из 331

Введение Важная информация Такие сообщения приведены в Руководстве по эксплуатации более крупным шрифтом серого цвета. Пример такого текста приводится в текстах меню и сообщений на информационном дисплее (например, Настройки аудио). зуются для указания об опасности, которая в случае, если

Страница 9 из 331

Введение Важная информация ленной последовательности, пронумерованы. Если поэтапная инструкция оснащена серией рисунков, то нумерация каждого момента аналогична соответствующему рисунку. Серии рисунков сопровождаются пронумерованными списками с буквенными обозначениями, в которых взаимный порядок

Страница 10 из 331

Введение Важная информация дается в следующем предупреждающем окне. G033853 Параметры излучения лазерного датчика • На верхней табличке на английском языке приводится классификация лазерного излучения: Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class 1M

Страница 11 из 331

Введение Важная информация безопасен для глаз, и поэтому существует опасность повреждения глаз. • Перед демонтажем лазерного датчика с ветрового стекла необходимо сначала отсоединить контакт. • Перед подсоединением контакта необходимо сначала установить лазерный датчик на ветровое стекло. •

Страница 12 из 331

Введение Volvo и окружающая среда G000000 Экологическая концепция Volvo Car Corporation Забота об окружающей среде является одним из основополагающих принципов деятельности всех подразделений Volvo Car Corporation. Мы также верим, что наши клиенты разделяют нашу заботу об окружающей среде. 14001, в

Страница 13 из 331

Введение Volvo и окружающая среда Чистый воздух в салоне Фильтр в салоне препятствует проникновению в салон пыли и пыльцы через воздухозаборник. Совершенная система контроля качества воздуха IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System), следит за тем, чтобы воздух, поступающий в салон, был чище, чем снаружи

Страница 14 из 331

Введение Volvo и окружающая среда • Используйте максимально высокую передачу. На низких оборотах двигатель расходует меньше топлива. • • Притормаживайте двигателем. • Утилизируйте опасные для окружающей среды отходы, например, батарейки и масло, экологически безопасным способом. Если вы не знаете

Страница 15 из 331

14 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение. 16 19 23 26 28 29 31 32 33 34 G020871 Ремни безопасности …………………………………………………………………. Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag)……………..

Страница 16 из 331

БЕЗОПАСНОСТЬ 01

Страница 17 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 Ремни безопасности Общая информация Громкий щелчок указывает на фиксацию ремня безопасности. На заднем сидении определенный язычок подходит только к соответствующему замку*. Отстегивание ремня безопасности Нажмите на красную кнопку в замке и дайте катушке втянуть ремень

Страница 18 из 331

01 Безопасность Ремни безопасности Если ремень безопасности подвергался сильным перегрузкам, например, во время столкновения, замене подлежит весь ремень. Даже если ремень безопасности выглядит неповрежденным, его защитные свойства могут быть частично утрачены. Заменяйте также изношенный или

Страница 19 из 331

01 Безопасность Ремни безопасности 01 На детские кресла действие системы напоминания о ремне безопасности не распространяется. Чтобы просмотреть сохраненные сообщения, нажмите клавишу READ. Некоторые рынки Заднее сиденье Напоминание о ремне безопасности на заднем сидении включает две составляющие

Страница 20 из 331

01 Безопасность Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag) o Работа системы надувных подушек безопасности непрерывно контролируется модулем управления системы. Предупреждающий символ в комбинированном приборе включается в положении зажигания II или III. Этот символ гаснет прим. через 6

Страница 21 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag) Система SRS состоит из надувных подушек безопасности и датчиков. Датчики реагируют на достаточно сильное столкновение, и подушка/подушки безопасностинадуваются, одновременно нагреваясь при этом. Для амортизации удара подушка

Страница 22 из 331

01 Безопасность Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag) Подушка безопасности на стороне водителя ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Ремень безопасности и подушка безопасности срабатывают согласованно. Если ремень безопасности не пристегнут или используется неправильно, это может снизить защитные свойства

Страница 23 из 331

01 Безопасность Система надувных подушек безопасности (SRS — Airbag) 01 ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Запрещено сажать детей в детское кресло или детскую подушку на переднем сиденье, если надувная подушка безопасности активирована1. Не разрешайте детям стоять или сидеть перед креслом пассажира. На переднем

Страница 24 из 331

01 Безопасность Активирование/отключение подушки безопасности* Общая информация Подушку безопасности пассажира на переднем сидении можно отключить, если автомобиль оснащен переключателем PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). Информацию о включении/отключении подушки см. в разделе Активирование/

Страница 25 из 331

01 Безопасность Активирование/отключение подушки безопасности* Сообщения Подушка безопасности отключена. Если переключатель находится в этом положении, ребенок в детском кресле или на опорной подушке может сидеть на месте пассажира на переднем сидении, а пассажирам ростом выше 140 см запрещается

Страница 26 из 331

01 Безопасность Активирование/отключение подушки безопасности* 01 ВНИМАНИЕ Когда дистанционный ключ устанавливается в положение зажигания II или III, в комбинированном приборе в течение прим. 6 секунд показывается предупреждающий символ подушки безопасности (см. стр. 19). После этого включается

Страница 27 из 331

01 Безопасность Боковая подушка безопасности (SIPS-bag) Боковая подушка безопасности ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Volvo рекомендует проводить ремонт только на официальной станции техобслуживания Volvo. Неправильное обращение с системой боковых подушек SIPS может привести к неправильному функционированию и как

Страница 28 из 331

01 Безопасность Боковая подушка безопасности (SIPS-bag) 01 Место пассажира, автомобиль с левосторонним управлением. Система подушек SIPS состоит из боковых подушек безопасности и датчиков. При достаточно сильном столкновении датчики реагируют, и боковая подушка надувается. Боковая подушка

Страница 29 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 Надувной занавес (IC) Назначение ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Нельзя подвешивать или крепить тяжелые предметы за ручки, расположенные в потолке. Крючок, установленный на ручке, предназначен для легкой одежды (а не для твердых предметов, таких, например, как зонты). Не вкручивайте и не

Страница 30 из 331

01 Безопасность WHIPS Защита от плетевых травм шеи – WHIPS Система WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) состоит из энергопоглощающей спинки и специально модернизированного для данной системы подголовника в передних сидениях. Система активируется в момент удара сзади, и ее срабатывание зависит от угла

Страница 31 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 WHIPS ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Не кладите коробки и другой аналогичный багаж так, чтобы он оказался зажатым между подушкой заднего сидения и спинкой переднего сидения. Не создавайте помех функционированию системы WHIPS. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Если кресло подвергалось сильным перегрузкам,

Страница 32 из 331

01 Безопасность Roll-Over Protection System (система защиты при переворачивании автомобиля) – ROPS Функция Система Volvo Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) разработана для снижения риска переворачивания автомобиля, а также для обеспечения максимально возможной защиты в случае, если столкновение все

Страница 33 из 331

01 Безопасность Когда срабатывают системы 01 Когда срабатывают системы A 32 Система Активирование Преднатяжитель ремня безопасности, передние сидения При фронтальном и/или боковом столкновении и/ или наезде сзади и/ или перевороте Преднатяжители ремней безопасности задних сидений При фронтальном

Страница 34 из 331

01 Безопасность Аварийный режим Ограничение действия функций G021062 Если все выглядит нормально, то после проверки отсутствия утечки топлива можно попытаться завести двигатель. Если автомобиль участвовал в столкновении, на информационном дисплее может появиться текст Аварийный режим См.

Страница 35 из 331

01 Безопасность Безопасность детей 01 Дети должны сидеть так, чтобы им было удобно и безопасно Место ребенка в автомобиле и необходимое оборудование выбирается в зависимости от веса и роста ребенка; подробную информацию см. стр. 36. ВНИМАНИЕ ВНИМАНИЕ ВНИМАНИЕ С вопросами по монтажу оборудования для

Страница 36 из 331

01 Безопасность Безопасность детей подушка безопасности надувается, он может получить серьезные травмы. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Запрещено сажать детей в детское кресло или детскую подушку на переднем сиденье, если активирована надувная подушка безопасности (SRS). На переднем сиденье пассажира запрещено

Страница 37 из 331

01 Безопасность Безопасность детей 01 Рекомендуемое детское защитное оборудование2 Вес/Возраст Переднее сиденье Внешние места заднего сидения Группа 0 и Детское кресло Volvo – Повернутое назад детское защитное кресло, крепится с помощью ремня безопасности автомобиля и крепежной ленты. Детское

Страница 38 из 331

01 Безопасность Безопасность детей Вес/Возраст Переднее сиденье Внешние места заднего сидения Группа 1 Детское кресло Volvo – Повернутое назад детское защитное кресло, крепится с помощью ремня безопасности автомобиля и крепежной ленты. Детское кресло Volvo – Повернутое назад детское защитное

Страница 39 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 Безопасность детей Вес/Возраст Переднее сиденье Внешние места заднего сидения Среднее место заднего сидения Группа 2, 15-25 кг, 3-6 лет Детское поворотное кресло Volvo – Повернутое вперед детское защитное кресло, крепится с помощью ремня автомобиля. Детское поворотное кресло

Страница 40 из 331

01 Безопасность Безопасность детей Интегрированные двухуровневые фиксируемые ремнем опорные подушки* • что ремень безопасности не лежит на горле ребенка или ниже плеча (см. предыдущие рисунки) • что для наилучшей защиты набедренная часть ремня безопасности расположена низко на бедрах. G017875

Страница 41 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 Безопасность детей Чтобы освободить опорную подушку, потяните за ручку вперед и вверх. Из нижнего положения. Нажмите кнопку. Поднимите подушку за передний край и для фиксации надавите назад в направлении спинки сидения. Для фиксирования вдавите опорную подушку назад. G017784

Страница 42 из 331

01 Безопасность Безопасность детей Складывание двухуровневой опорной подушки 01 ВНИМАНИЕ При складывании спинки заднего сидения необходимо сначала опустить опорную подушку. Полное складывание в подушку сидения можно проводить как из верхнего, так и нижнего положения. Но переместить опорную подушку

Страница 43 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 Безопасность детей Местоположение точек крепления показано символами на обивке спинки (см. предыдущий рисунок). Класс размера Для доступа к точкам крепления нажмите на подушку сидения. A Максимальный размер, повернутая вперед детская защита В Уменьшенный размер (или 1),

Страница 44 из 331

01 Безопасность Безопасность детей 01 Типы защиты для детей с креплением ISOFIX Тип защиты для детей A Вес (Возраст) Класс размера Места для пассажиров с креплением детской защиты ISOFIX Переднее сиденье Внешние места заднего сидения F – – G – – Вставка для младенцапоперечная макс. 10 кг (0-9 мес.)

Страница 45 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 Безопасность детей Верхние точки крепления детских кресел ВНИМАНИЕ Если в автомобиле установлены складывающиеся подголовники внешних мест, то для облегчения монтажа детской защиты такого типа их следует сложить. ВНИМАНИЕ G017676 В автомобилях с установленной защитной шторкой

Страница 46 из 331

01 Безопасность 01 45

Страница 47 из 331

Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ…………………………………………… Замена батарейки в дистанционном ключе/РСС*………………………… Keyless drive*………………………………………………………………………………

Страница 48 из 331

ЗАМКИ И СИГНАЛИЗАЦИЯ 02

Страница 49 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ Общие сведения 02 Автомобиль поставляется с двумя дистанционными ключами или двумя коммуникаторами РСС (Personal Car Communicator. Они используются для пуска двигателя, а также для запирания и отпирания автомобиля. Вы можете заказать ключи

Страница 50 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ Сообщение Значение В информационном дисплее комбинированного прибора с электронной блокировкой старта связаны следующие сообщения о неисправности: Ошибка ключа Вын./встав. ключ Ошибка при считывании ключа во время пуска. Повторить пуск

Страница 51 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ G021079 02 PCC* (Personal Car Communicator). Информация Функциональные клавиши Запирание – одновременно с активированием сигнализации запираются двери и дверь задка. При длительном нажатии (не менее 4 секунд) одновременно закрываются все

Страница 52 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ Особые функции РСC* Если в течение этого времени нажать какую-либо другую кнопку, считывание прерывается. 02 Если индикаторные лампы не горят при неоднократном использовании информационной кнопки со сменой местоположения (а также через 7

Страница 53 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ ВНИМАНИЕ Работа информационной кнопки может быть нарушена помехами от радиоволн, строений, топографических особенностей местности и пр. ВНИМАНИЕ Если при использовании информационной кнопки ни одна из индикаторных ламп не горит, это может быть

Страница 54 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ Установка на место плоского ключа Чтобы не повредить плоский ключ, осторожно вставьте его на место в дистанционном ключе. 02 1. Держите дистанционный ключ прорезью вверх, и отпустите плоский ключ в прорезь. 2. Слегка нажмите на плоский ключ.

Страница 55 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Замена батарейки в дистанционном ключе/РСС* Замена батарейки 02 ВАЖНО Батарейки следует заменить, если: • Не прикасайтесь пальцами к новым батарейкам и контактным поверхностям, так как это может снизить эффективность их работы. включается информационный символ и на дисплее

Страница 56 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Замена батарейки в дистанционном ключе/РСС* Сборка 1. Соедините вместе части дистанционного ключа. 02 2. Держите дистанционный ключ прорезью вверх, и отпустите плоский ключ в прорезь. 3. Слегка нажмите на плоский ключ. При фиксации плоского ключа Вы услышите щелчок. ВАЖНО

Страница 57 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Keyless drive* Keyless drive (только PCC) 02 Система запирание без ключей и запуска означает, что тот, кто собирается запереть или отпереть дверь должен иметь РСС с собой. Нельзя запереть или отпереть дверь, если РСС находится по другую сторону автомобиля. Красные окружности

Страница 58 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Keyless drive* При отпирании плоским ключом срабатывает сигнализация. Отключение см. стр. 66. Память ключа – кресло водителя и внешние зеркала заднего вида Функция памяти в РСС Если несколько человек каждый со своим РСС находятся вблизи автомобиля, настройки кресла и зеркала

Страница 59 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Keyless drive* ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ 02 58 Лица с имплантированным электрокардиостимулятором не должны подходить к антеннам системы Keyless на расстояние менее 22 см. Это позволит избежать помех между кардиостимулятором и системой Keyless. * Опция/дополнительное оборудование,

Страница 60 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Запирание/отпирание Снаружи открывается, если потянуть за ручку еще один раз. Изнутри Дистанционным ключом можно запирать/ отпирать одновременно все двери и дверь задка. Вы можете выбрать различные схемы запирания/отпирания, см. стр. 132. 02 Запирание Нажмите на кнопку

Страница 61 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Запирание/отпирание Отделение для перчаток Дверь задка 02 тия двери задка автоматически отключаются. Двери остаются запертыми под сигнализацию. ВНИМАНИЕ Когда крышка закрывается, она остается незапертой до того момента, когда автомобиль вновь запирается кнопкой на

Страница 62 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Запирание/отпирание Запирание дистанционным ключом ВНИМАНИЕ Чтобы запереть, нажмите кнопку на дистанционном ключе, см. стр. 49. Если в автомобиле установлена охранная сигнализация*, индикатор сигнализации на приборной панели начинает мигать, указывая, что сигнализация

Страница 63 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Запирание/отпирание живайте кнопку нажатой до тех пор, пока крышка не начнет открываться. 02 • Слегка нажмите на обрезиненную пластину под наружной дверной ручкой и поднимите крышку. Закрытие двери задка Закрытие происходит с помощью этой кнопки на двери задка или вручную. •

Страница 64 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Запирание/отпирание Если вы хотите отключить блокировку замков ± Нажмите ENTER и заприте автомобиль. (Если в автомобиле установлена сигнализация с датчиками движения и крена*, они отключаются одновременно, см. стр. 66.) > В следующий раз при пуске двигателя система

Страница 65 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Замок для безопасности детей Блокировка вручную задних дверей Регулятор замка для безопасности детей находится на задней кромке задних дверей, и доступ к нему возможен только при открытой двери. ± Используя плоский ключ, поверните регулятор и активируйте или отключите замок

Страница 66 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Сигнализация* Общие сведения Сигнализация срабатывает: • если открываются дверь, капот или дверь задка • при попытке использовать неподходящий дистанционный ключ или попытке взломать замок зажигания • при регистрации движения в салоне (если установлен датчик движения*) • при

Страница 67 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Сигнализация* Диод не горит – охранная сигнализация отключена • Диод мигает один раз в две секунды – сигнализация подключена • Диод часто мигает после отключения сигнализации (и до момента, когда дистанционный ключ вставлен в замок запуска и установлен в положение I) –

Страница 68 из 331

02 Замки и сигнализация Сигнализация* Можно временно отключать датчики движения и крена для предотвращения непреднамеренного срабатывания сигнализации, например, если в автомобиле оставлена собака, или во время перевозки автомобиля на пароме. Для этого: Для отключения датчика движения и крена: ± 1.

Страница 69 из 331

HomeLink *……………………………………………………………………………… 127 68 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение. G020912 Приборы и органы управления…………………………………………………… 70 Положения

Страница 70 из 331

СРЕДА ОБИТАНИЯ ВОДИТЕЛЯ 03

Страница 71 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления Обзор приборов 03 Автомобиль с левосторонним управлением. 70

Страница 72 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления Принцип действия Стр. Принцип действия Стр. Использование меню и сообщений, указатели поворотов, ближний/ дальний свет фар, бортовой компьютер 87, 91, 135, 165 Аварийные мигающие сигналы 90 Управление меню и звуковоспроизведение 132, 152

Страница 73 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления 03 Автомобиль с правосторонним управлением. 72

Страница 74 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления Информационные дисплеи Принцип действия Стр. Принцип действия Стр. Информационный дисплей управления меню 132 Стояночный тормоз 124 Открытие капота 257 Замок зажигания 79 Регулировка руля 86 Кнопка пуска/останова 111 Круиз-контроль 170, 172

Страница 75 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления Измерительные приборы Контрольные, информационные и предупреждающие символы исключением стояночного тормоза, который гаснет после отпускания тормоза. Если двигатель не запущен или если проверка функционирования проводится в положении ключа II,

Страница 76 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления Символ Значение Предпусковой обогреватель двигателя (дизель) Низкий уровень топлива в баке Информация, прочтите текст на дисплее Дальний свет включен Неисправность в системе ABS Низкий уровень топлива в баке Если символ горит, то система не

Страница 77 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления Контрольные и предупреждающие символы Символ Значение Стояночный тормоз затянут Низкое давление маслаA 03 Стояночный тормоз затянут Надувные подушки безопасности – SRS Напоминание о ремне безопасности Генератор не дает тока Неисправность в

Страница 78 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления • Если оба символа погасли, можно продолжать движение. • Если символы продолжают гореть, проверьте уровень тормозной жидкости в бачке, см. стр. 260. Если уровень жидкости в бачке в норме, а символы горят, автомобиль можно очень осторожно своим

Страница 79 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Приборы и органы управления Счетчики пройденного пути Часы Счетчик пройденного пути и органы управления. Часы и ручка установки. 03 Дисплей счетчика пройденного пути Ручка переключения между счетчиками пройденного пути T1 и T2 и обнуление счетчика. Счетчики используются

Страница 80 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Положения ключа Установка дистанционного ключа ВАЖНО Посторонние предметы в замке могут вызвать сбой в функционировании замка или повредить замок. Не вставляйте дистанционный ключ, повернутый неправильно – Держите за конец со вставным плоским ключом, см. стр. 52.

Страница 81 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Положения ключа Принцип действия Пуск и остановка двигателя 0 Загорается счетчик пройденных километров, часы и указатель температуры. Замок рулевого колеса отключен. Аудиосистемой можно пользоваться. Буксировка I Вы можете пользоваться панорамной крышей*,

Страница 82 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Сидения Передние кресла ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Придайте сиденью водителя правильное положение перед поездкой, ни в коем случае не во время езды. Убедитесь, что сиденье зафиксировано. Поднимите защелки сзади на спинке и сложите ее вперед. Откидывание на место проводится в

Страница 83 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Сидения 03 На передние кресла с электроприводом установлена защита от перегрузки, которая срабатывает, если кресло блокируется посторонним предметом. В этом случае установите ключ в положение I или 0 и подождите мгновение перед повторной установкой кресла. Кресло с

Страница 84 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Сидения дверь водителя, кресло водителя и внешние зеркала заднего вида автоматически устанавливаются в положения, сохраненные в памяти ключа. Для повторного запуска с целью установить кресло в положение, сохраненное в памяти, нажмите кнопку отпирания на дистанционном

Страница 85 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Сидения Складывание вручную внешних подголовников заднего сидения 03 Чтобы сложить подголовник вперед, потяните за фиксатор рядом с подголовником. Подголовник перемещается на место вручную до слышимого щелчка. Складывание спинки заднего сидения Трехсекционную спинку

Страница 86 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Сидения ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Убедитесь после установки на место правильность фиксации спинок и подголовников сидения. 03 85

Страница 87 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Рулевое колесо Регулировка ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Звуковой сигнал До поездки отрегулируйте и зафиксируйте рулевое колесо. Для адаптивного (по скорости) сервоуправления* можно регулировать эффект усиления, см. стр. 169. 03 G021138 Клавиатуры* Регулировка рулевого колеса. Звуковой

Страница 88 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение Регуляторы света Подсветка дисплея автоматически ослабевает в темное время; яркость регулируется кольцом. Дальний/ближний свет фар Сила подсветки приборов регулируется кольцом. G031407 Регулировка высоты света фар Общий вид регуляторов света. Регулировочное

Страница 89 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение Положение Значение Автоматический*/отключенный ближний свет фар. Только мигание дальним светом. 03 Габаритные/стояночные огни Автоматический ближний свет фар. В этом положении можно включить дальний свет фар и мигать дальним светом. ВНИМАНИЕ Дальний свет можно

Страница 90 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение Дисплей Значение Неиспр. фара Требует обслуж Система не работает. Если сообщение сохраняется, обратитесь в мастерскую. Volvo рекомендует обратиться на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo. Функция действует только в сумерках или темное время и только, если

Страница 91 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение Противотуманные фары* Противотуманный свет сзади ВНИМАНИЕ Правила использования противотуманного света сзади отличаются в разных странах. 03 Кнопка противотуманных фар. Кнопка противотуманного света сзади. Противотуманные фары можно включать в сочетании с

Страница 92 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение автоматически, когда вы вновь начинаете движение или нажмете кнопку. Непрерывное мигание Указатели поворотов/мигающие сигналы Рычаг остается в этом положении и перемещается назад вручную или автоматически при повороте рулевого колеса. Переместите подрулевой

Страница 93 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение крышка отрывается и закрывается соответственно. Освещение грузового отделения Освещение в грузовом отделении включается и выключается, когда дверь задка открывается и соответственно закрывается. 03 • • двигатель запускается автомобиль запирается. Освещение

Страница 94 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение Продолжительность освещения при подходе к автомобилю можно установить в Настройки машины Настройки освещения Прод. огней безопас.. Описание системы меню см. стр. 132. Регулировка формы светового пятна фар Для предотвращения ослепления встречного транспорта форму

Страница 95 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение 03 • A = LHD Right (левостороннее управление, правое стекло) • B = LHD Left (левостороннее управление, левое стекло) • C = RHD Right (правостороннее управление, правое стекло) • D = RHD Left (правостороннее управление, левое стекло) 2. Перенесите шаблон на

Страница 96 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение Расположение шаблонов 03 Верхний ряд: маскировка автомобиля с левосторонним управлением, шаблоны А и В. Нижний ряд: маскировка автомобиля с правосторонним управ- « 95

Страница 97 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение лением, шаблоны С и D. 03 96

Страница 98 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Освещение Шаблоны для галогенных фар 03 97

Страница 99 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Очистители и омыватели Очистители ветрового стекла1 Интервальный режим работы Датчик дождя* После выбора интервального режима очистки установите число ходов в единицу времени с помощью регулировочного кольца. Датчик дождя контролирует количество воды на ветровом стекле и

Страница 100 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Очистители и омыватели щении кольца вверх очистители делают дополнительный ход.) Омывание фар и стекол Обогреваемые форсунки омывателя* Отключите датчик дождя, нажав на кнопку Форсунка омывателя обогревается автоматически в холодную погоду, чтобы не допустить замерзания

Страница 101 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Очистители и омыватели Очиститель и омыватель заднего стекла Если непрерывный режим работы очистителя заднего стекла уже был включен, никаких изменений не происходит. ВНИМАНИЕ На автомобилях с датчиком дождя при движении задним ходом в дождь активируется очиститель

Страница 102 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стекла и зеркала заднего вида Общие сведения Теплоотражающее ветровое стекло* Стеклоподъемники Ламинированное стекло Ветровое стекло и панорамная крыша выполнены из ламинированного стекла. Это усиленное стекло повышает защиту от взлома и звукоизоляцию салона. Прочие

Страница 103 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стекла и зеркала заднего вида ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ При закрытии стекол следите за тем, чтобы никто из детей или других пассажиров не оказался зажат даже при использовании дистанционного ключа. 03 ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Если в автомобиле остаются дети, помните, что необходимо всегда

Страница 104 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стекла и зеркала заднего вида 2. Быстро отпустите клавишу. Складные зеркала заднего вида с электроприводом* 3. Потяните вверх переднюю часть клавиши еще раз на однусекунду. Для парковки/проезда в узком месте наружные зеркала можно сложить: ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ 1. Одновременно

Страница 105 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стекла и зеркала заднего вида Наклон зеркал заднего вида во время парковки1 Зеркала заднего вида наклоняются вниз, что позволяет водителю видеть, например, край дороги во время парковки. 03 ± Включите передачу заднего хода и нажмите кнопу L или R. При выключении передачи

Страница 106 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стекла и зеркала заднего вида Режим автоматического антиобледенения можно выбрать в Настройки климата Автом. зад. антиоблед.. Выберите между Вкл или Выкл. Описание системы меню см. стр. 132. Внутреннее зеркало заднего вида помощью регулятора противоослепляющего положения:

Страница 107 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Компас* Использование Калибровка Земной шар разделен на 15 магнитных зон. Компас настроен на тот географический регион, в который осуществлена поставка данного автомобиля. Необходимо провести калибровку компаса, если автомобиль перемещается через несколько магнитных зон.

Страница 108 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Компас* 8. При необходимости повторите описанную выше процедуру. 03 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение. 107

Страница 109 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Панорамная крыша с электроприводом* Общие сведения Панорамная крыша состоит из двух секций, при этом только передняя секция может открываться горизонтально или вертикально за задний край (положение вентиляции). 03 В панорамной крыше также имеется солнцезащитная шторка из

Страница 110 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Панорамная крыша с электроприводом* лятор назад в положение для автоматического открытия и отпустите. Чтобы закрыть крышу/шторку, повторите процедуру в обратном порядке – отведите регулятор вперед в положение для автоматического закрытия. Быстрое открытие/закрытие

Страница 111 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Панорамная крыша с электроприводом* Закрытие дистанционным ключом или кнопкой центрального замка 03 Длительным нажатием на кнопку запирания, см. стр. 49 (дистанционный ключ) и 59 (кнопка центрального замка) закрываются панорамная крыша и все стекла. Внешние зеркала

Страница 112 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Пуск двигателя Бензиновые и дизельные двигатели 3. После этого нажмите и отпустите кнопку START/STOP ENGINE. Стартер работает до пуска двигателя, но не более 10 секунд (дизель до 60 секунд). Если двигатель не запускается в течение 10 секунд, повторите попытку, удерживая

Страница 113 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Пуск двигателя катится – Нажмите 2 раза или удерживайте нажатой кнопку до остановки двигателя. Замок рулевого колеса2 03 Замок рулевого колеса отключается, когда дистанционный ключ защелкивается в замке зажигания, и включается, когда ключ вынимается из замка запуска.

Страница 114 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Запуск двигателя – вспомогательный аккумулятор Пуск от вспомогательного источника убедитесь, что автомобили не касаются друг друга. 4. Присоедините красный пусковой провод к положительному выводу вспомо. гательной аккумуляторной батареи 5. Откройте зажим на передней

Страница 115 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Запуск двигателя – вспомогательный аккумулятор ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ 03 114 В аккумуляторной батарее может образовываться очень взрывоопасный гремучий газ. Достаточно одной искры, образовавшейся из-за неправильного подсоединения пусковых проводов, чтобы вызвать взрыв

Страница 116 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Коробки передач Механическая КП – шесть передач Блокиратор включения заднего хода – шесть передач Автоматическая коробка передач Geartronic 03 • Полностью выжимайте педаль сцепления при каждом переключении передачи. • Снимайте ногу с педали сцепления между переключениями

Страница 117 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Коробки передач ВАЖНО Автомобиль должен стоять неподвижно, когда выбирается положение P. Положение передачи заднего хода (R) 03 Автомобиль должен стоять неподвижно, когда выбирается положение R. Нейтральное положение (N) Ни одна из передач не включена, и можно пускать

Страница 118 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Коробки передач Geartronic – Зимний режим Функция защиты Трогаться с места на скользком дорожном покрытии легче, если 3-я передача включается вручную. Для предотвращения резкого повышения оборотов двигателя в программе управления коробкой передач предусмотрена защита от

Страница 119 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Коробки передач селектор передач находился в положении P. Во всех других положениях дистанционный ключ заблокирован. Отмена автоматической блокировки переключения передач Положение для стоянки (P) Автомобиль стоит неподвижно, двигатель работает: Держите ногу на педали

Страница 120 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Привод на четыре колеса – AWD (All Wheel Drive)* Привод на четыре колеса всегда подключен 03 Привод на четыре колеса означает, что автомобиль приводится в движение одновременно всеми четырьмя колесами. Усилие распределяется автоматически между передними и задними

Страница 121 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Рабочие тормоза Общие сведения 03 В автомобиле смонтированы два тормозных контура. Если один тормозной контур выходит из строя, это означает, что тормоза схватывают позднее и для нормального тормозного эффекта потребуется приложение большего усилия на педаль тормоза.

Страница 122 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Рабочие тормоза Символы в комбинированном приборе Символ Значение Постоянный свет – проверьте уровень тормозной жидкости в бачке. Если уровень низкий, долейте тормозную жидкость и проверьте, в чем причина потери жидкости. Постоянный свет в течение 2х секунд при пуске

Страница 123 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Hill Descent Control (HDC) Система контроля тяги на спуске Общие сведения 03 HDC можно сравнить с автоматическим торможением двигателем. При отпускании педали газа на спуске автомобиль обычно притормаживается за счет того, что двигатель стремится к низким оборотам

Страница 124 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Hill Descent Control (HDC) Система контроля тяги на спуске • кнопкой вкл/выкл на центральной консоли • для механической коробки передач выбором скорости выше 1 • для автоматической коробки передач выбором скорости выше 1 или перемещением селектора передач в положение D.

Страница 125 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стояночный тормоз В экстренной ситуации, если автомобиль находится в движении, стояночный тормоз можно приложить, удерживая ручку нажатой. Если ручку отпустить или нажать педаль газа, торможение прекращается. Как затягивать стояночный тормоз Электрический стояночный

Страница 126 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стояночный тормоз Автомобиль с механической коробкой передач Автомобиль с автоматической коробкой передач Освобождение вручную Освобождение вручную 1. Вставьте дистанционный ключ в замок зажигания. 1. Пристегните ремень безопасности. 2. Выжмите с усилием педаль тормоза.

Страница 127 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя Стояночный тормоз рости с открытой дверью, привлекая внимание водителя к тому, что стояночный тормоз мог быть отпущен случайно. Сообщения Стояноч.тормоз Требует обслуж – Возникла неисправность. Если неисправность сохраняется, обратитесь в мастерскую – рекомендуется

Страница 128 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя HomeLink * Общие сведения ВНИМАНИЕ Конструктивно HomeLink создан так, что он не действует, если автомобиль заперт снаружи. Сохраните исходные пульты дистанционного управления для дальнейшего программирования (например, другого автомобиля). Перед продажей автомобиля

Страница 129 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя HomeLink * выполнять, если перепрограммируется только одна кнопка. 03 1. Нажмите две внешние кнопки и не отпускайте до тех пор, пока индикаторная лампа не начинает мигать прим. через 20 секунд. Мигание означает, что HomeLink установлен в «режим обучения» и готов к

Страница 130 из 331

03 Среда обитания водителя HomeLink * Расстояние, которое следует установить между оригинальным дистанционный пультом и HomeLink, зависит от программируемого устройства. Может потребоваться несколько попыток программирования с разного расстояния. Перед новой попыткой сохраняйте каждое положение в

Страница 131 из 331

130 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение. 132 138 147 150 151 165 167 169 170 172 180 183 189 195 198 201 204 207 211 215 221 G020908 Использование меню и сообщений……………………………………………

Страница 132 из 331

КОМФОРТ И УДОВОЛЬСТВИЕ ОТ ВОЖДЕНИЯ 04

Страница 133 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Использование меню и сообщений Центральная консоль Часть функций регулируется с центральной консоли через систему меню или с клавиатуры на рулевом колесе. Описание таких функций приведено в соответствующем разделе. Действующий уровень меню показывается наверху

Страница 134 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Использование меню и сообщений открыть только, когда данный источник звучания активирован, см. стр. 152. В Основное меню входят следующие выборы меню: Память ключа машины Положение сидения и зеркал* Настройки машины Информация Настройки освещения Настройки

Страница 135 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Использование меню и сообщений Основное меню USB Настройки USB Новости ТР (дорож.информация) Настройки аудио2 Информация о дорожке Основное меню iPod Настройки iPod 04 Новости ТР (дорож.информация) Настройки аудио2 Информация о дорожке Основное меню Bluetooth

Страница 136 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Использование меню и сообщений Сбросить настр. тел. плее комбинированного прибора. Показ меню зависит от положения зажигания, см. стр. 79. Чтобы показать меню при наличии сообщения, его следует подтвердить с помощью READ. Комбинированный прибор DSTC Сообщение

Страница 137 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Использование меню и сообщений ВНИМАНИЕ Если предупреждающее сообщение отображается во время использования бортового компьютера, работу можно возобновить только после прочтения сообщения (нажать кнопку READ). Сообщение Значение Остановиться Остановиться и

Страница 138 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Использование меню и сообщений Сообщение Значение Сообщение Значение Масло КПП Треб. заменить Volvo рекомендует как можно быстрее доверить проверку автомобиля официальной станции техосблуживания Volvo. Выс. темп. КПП Остановиться Коробка передач огранич. функц.

Страница 139 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль Общие сведения Кондиционирование воздуха В автомобиле установлена система электронного климат-контроля (ЕСС). Климатическая установка охлаждает или нагревает, а также осушает воздух в салоне. ВНИМАНИЕ 04 Кондиционирование воздуха можно

Страница 140 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль лицензию на дозаправку/замену хладагента. Volvo рекомендует обратиться на официальную станцию техобслуживания Volvo. Функция общего проветривания тельную информацию о CZIP см. брошюру, прилагаемую к автомобилю при покупке. Использование для

Страница 141 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль Распределение воздуха Поступающий воздух распределяется между 20 соплами салона. В режиме AUTO* распределение воздуха происходит полностью в автоматическом режиме. При необходимости это можно осуществить вручную, см. стр. 145. Открыто Закрыто

Страница 142 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль ВНИМАНИЕ Помните, что маленькие дети могут быть чувствительны к воздушным потокам и сквознякам. Климатическая установка Электронная климатическая установка, ЕСС Регулирование температуры, правая сторона AC ON/OFF – Кондиционирование воздуха

Страница 143 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль Распределение воздуха ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Кресло с электрообогревом не следует использовать людям, которые затрудняются с оценкой повышения температуры вследствие потери чувствительности или по какой-либо другой причине не могут правильно обращаться

Страница 144 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль АС – Кондиционирование воздуха вкл/ выкл ВКЛ: Кондиционирование воздуха регулируется автоматикой системы. В этом случае поступающий воздух охлаждается и подсушивается. OFF: При включении функции дефростера кондиционирование включается

Страница 145 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль зуется для охлаждения в жаркую погоду. Активирование рециркуляции/ датчика контроля качества воздуха Повторными нажатиями на клавишу осуществляется переключение между тремя функциями. • 04 • 144 Левая оранжевая лампа горит – датчик контроля

Страница 146 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль Таблица распределения воздуха Распределение воздуха Используется Распределение воздуха Используется Воздух к стеклам. Некоторое количество воздуха поступает из вентиляционных сопел. Рециркуляция воздуха не работает. Кондиционирование воздуха

Страница 147 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Климат-контроль 04 146 Распределение воздуха Используется Распределение воздуха Используется Поток воздуха направляется к стеклам и через вентиляционные сопла панели приборов. Для достижения хороших комфортных условий в жаркую и сухую погоду. Воздух к полу.

Страница 148 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Топливный обогреватель двигателя и отопитель салона* Топливный отопитель Заправка топливом Общие сведения о стояночном отопителе Аккумулятор и топливо Если аккумуляторная батарея недостаточно заряжена или в баке слишком мало топлива, стояночный отопитель

Страница 149 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Топливный обогреватель двигателя и отопитель салона* G025102 G021364 04 Дисплей Значение Топл.ото питель ВКЛ Отопитель включен и работает. Таймер установл. Топл.ото питель Отопитель включится в установленное время после того, как Вы покинете автомобиль и выньте

Страница 150 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Топливный обогреватель двигателя и отопитель салона* Прямой пуск и отключение 1. Регулировочным кольцом перейдите к Прямой пуск Доп.отоп.. 2. Нажмите RESET, чтобы выбрать между ON и OFF. ВНИМАНИЕ Таймер можно программировать только положение дистанционного

Страница 151 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Дополнительный топливный отопитель* Дополнительный обогреватель (дизель) ВНИМАНИЕ Когда дополнительный обогреватель включен, из правой колесной ниши может появляться дым, что вполне нормально. Автоматический режим или отключение Дополнительный обогреватель

Страница 152 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема Общие сведения Аудиосистема может комплектоваться различными опциями и выпускается в трех базовых классах: • • • Performance High Performance Premium Sound Класс показывается на дисплее при включении аудиосистемы. Dolby Surround Pro Logic II и

Страница 153 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема граммированным радиостанциям. При длительном нажатии прокрутка дорожки компакт-диска или поиск следующей доступной радиостанции. Вкл/Выкл. Подключение через AUX или USB см. стр. 154. Функции звучания Ввод для наушников (3,5 мм).

Страница 154 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема хронно с увеличением скорости автомобиля. Уровень компенсации можно устанавливать на низкий, средний или высокий. Выберите уровень в Настройки аудио Автом. контроль звука. Громкость звука внешнего источника звучания К вводу AUX можно подключать,

Страница 155 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема 1. Перейдите к Настройки аудио и выберите Передний эквалайзер или Задний эквалайзер. Уровень громкости для диапазона частот регулируется с помощью / на джойстике. Нажмите / , чтобы выбрать другой диапазон частот. 2. Сохраните с помощью ENTER или

Страница 156 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема Система поддерживает воспроизведение музыкальных файлов форматов mp3, wma и wav. Однако некоторые варианты этих файловых форматов система не поддерживает. Система поддерживает ряд моделей iPod, выпущенных, начиная с 2005 года. iPod Shuffle не

Страница 157 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема Сканирование cd Выбор позиции в чейнджере компактдисков (относится только к аудиосистемам High Performance и Premium Sound)* Воспроизведение (проигрыватель компакт-дисков) 04 Если в проигрывателе находится музыкальный компакт-диск, то при нажатии

Страница 158 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема пользоваться клавиатурой на рулевом колесе. Можно перейти на другую дорожку также поворотом TUNING. Сканирование cd С помощью этой функции проигрываются первые десять секунд на каждой дорожке диска/звуковом файле. Для активирования нажмите SCAN.

Страница 159 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема Функции радиоприемника Поиск станции, автоматический режим 1. Выберите диапазон частот с помощью FM или AM. 2. Нажмите / на джойстике. Поиск станции, ручной режим 1. Выберите диапазон частот с помощью FM или AM. 2. Поверните TUNING. G031441 04

Страница 160 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема ного диапазона частот. Если станция найдена, она транслируется в течение прим. 8 секунд, а затем поиск продолжается. 1. Выберите диапазон частот с помощью AM или FM. 2. Нажмите SCAN. На дисплее показывается SCAN. Завершите с помощью SCAN или EXIT.

Страница 161 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема Новости Функция прерывает для передачи новостей, транслируемых в сети RDS настроенной радиостанции. Символ НОВОСТИ показывает, что функция активирована. ± Активируется/отключается в Настройки FM Новости. Новости от включенной станции/всех станций

Страница 162 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема ± Активируйте/отмените в режиме FM в Настройки FM Допол. настройки радио Региональные. Enhanced Other Networks – EON Данной функцией удобно пользоваться в крупных городах с большим количеством региональных станций. Она позволяет по расстоянию между

Страница 163 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема Джаз Радиосистема – DAB* Кантри Общие сведения Национальная музыка DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) представляет собой цифровую радиотрансляционную систему. Музыка старших Народная музыка Документация 04 1.5. 1.4.2 Поиск PTY 1.4.3 Показать текст

Страница 164 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема находятся. Список можно также фильтровать с помощью DAB PTY (см. ниже). • Подканал – Подканалы выбранного Для того, чтобы получить доступ к подканалу: ± канала. Доступ к спискам возможен в меню. Группы каналов можно также открыть, если нажать

Страница 165 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Аудиосистема 4.5. Спорт 4.27. Национальная музыка 4.6. Образование 4.28. Музыка старших 4.7. Театр 4.29. Народная музыка 4.8. Культура 4.30. Документация 4.9. Наука 5. Изучение группы 4.10. Различная речь 6. Настройки DAB 4.11. Поп музыка 4.12. Рок музыка

Страница 166 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Бортовой компьютер Общие сведения Функции В среднем ВНИМАНИЕ G021364 Если при использовании бортового компьютера появляется предупреждающее сообщение, необходимо сначала подтвердить сообщение, чтобы появилась возможность вернуться к работе с бортовым

Страница 167 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Бортовой компьютер ВНИМАНИЕ Ошибочные показания возможны при изменении стиля вождения. Обнуление 1. Выберите Средняя скорость или Средний расход. 04 2. Удерживайте нажатой RESET в течение прим. 1 секунды, чтобы обнулить выбранную функцию. Если RESET удерживать

Страница 168 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения DSTC – Система динамической устойчивости и тяги Общие сведения о DSTC Система динамической устойчивости и тяги, DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) помогает водителю предотвращать проскальзывание и улучшает проходимость автомобиля. При торможении

Страница 169 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения DSTC – Система динамической устойчивости и тяги Символы в комбинированном приборе Если символы и появляются одновременно, прочитайте сообщение на информационном дисплее. Если появляется только один символ , это может быть следствием следующего: 04 168 •

Страница 170 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Регулировка ходовых характеристик Активное шасси (Four-C)* Активное шасси, Four-C (Continously Controlled Chassis Concept), за счет изменения параметров амортизаторов позволяет регулировать ходовые характеристики автомобиля. Существует три вида настройки:

Страница 171 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Круиз-контроль* Использование После этого круиз-контроль активируется с помощью или , а затем действующая скорость сохраняется и используется, как заданная скорость. Текст на дисплее (—) км/ч изменяется на величину установленной скорости, например, 100 км/ч.

Страница 172 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Круиз-контроль* этом скорость устанавливается, равной заданному ранее значению. ВНИМАНИЕ Заметное увеличение скорости возможно после возврата к заданной скорости с помощью . 04 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение. 171

Страница 173 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* Общие сведения Адаптивный круиз-контроль (Adaptive Cruise Control – ACC) является вспомогательной функцией для разгрузки водителя на длинных прямых участках дороги в равномерном транспортном потоке, например, автомагистралях и шоссе.

Страница 174 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Педаль тормоза двигается, если круизконтроль осуществляет торможение. Не держите ногу под педалью тормоза, так как она может быть зажата. В задачу круиз-контроля входит следовать в своем ряду на заданном расстоянии за

Страница 175 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* Включение и установка скорости Установленная скорость (в скобках = режим готовности) Установленное отставание по времени во время регулировки Установленное отставание по времени после регулировки Значок автомобиля появляется на

Страница 176 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* Для того, чтобы плавно и комфортно следовать за движущимся перед вами автомобилем, адаптивный круиз-контроль в определенных ситуациях допускает некоторые изменения в отставании от него. Обратите внимание, что короткий временной

Страница 177 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* ской стабилизации и контроля силы тяги (DSTC). Если одна из этих систем не работает, круиз-контроль отключается автоматически. 04 При автоматическом отключении подается звуковой сигнал, и на дисплее отображается сообщение

Страница 178 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* Небольшие транспортные средства, например, мотоциклы или транспортные средства, двигающиеся не в середине ряда, могут остаться не обнаруженными. На поворотах радиолокационный датчик может по ошибке обнаружить транспортное средство или

Страница 179 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* Причина Меры по устранению Поверхность радара в решетке загрязнена или заблокирована льдом или снегом. Очистите поверхность радара в решетке от грязи, льда и снега. Сильный дождь или снег блокируют сигналы от радара. Меры не

Страница 180 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Адаптивный круиз-контроль* Символ Сообщение Значение Круиз-контроль Круиз-контроль не активируется. Недоступен Это может быть связано, в том числе, с: • • слишком высокой температуры тормозов блокировкой радара, например, мокрым снегом или дождем. Радар

Страница 181 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Контроль сближения Общие сведения Контроль сближения (Distance Alert) – это функция, отражающая отставание по времени до движущегося перед вами автомобиля. 04 Информация о расстоянии предоставляется только для транспортного средства, движущегося перед вашим

Страница 182 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Контроль сближения Можно выбрать пять значений временного интервала, которые показываются горизонтальными штрихами от 1 до 5 – чем больше штрихов на дисплее, тем больше отставание по времени. Число штрихов Отставание (секунды) 1 1,0 2 1,4 3 1,8 4 2,2 5 2,6

Страница 183 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Контроль сближения Символы и сообщения на дисплее Символ Сообщение Значение Установленное отставание по времени во время регулировки. Установленное отставание по времени после регулировки. Радар блокирован. Контроль сближения временно не работает. См.

Страница 184 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения City Safety™ Общие сведения City Safety™ – эта функция помогает водителю избежать столкновения, например, при движении в пробках, когда неравномерное движение транспорта впереди и снижение внимания могут приводить к авариям. Функция активирована на скорости до

Страница 185 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения City Safety™ Если различие в скорости между автомобилями составляет 15-30 км/ч, City Safety™ не может своими силами предотвратить столкновение – для приложения полного тормозного усилия водитель должен выжать педаль тормоза, и тогда столкновение можно

Страница 186 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения City Safety™ При запуске двигателя в следующий раз функция будет вновь включена, даже если система была отключена на неработающем двигателе. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Лазерный датчик испускает лазерное излучение даже, когда City Safety™ отключена вручную. Для повторного

Страница 187 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения City Safety™ ВНИМАНИЕ • • • 04 Счищайте с поверхности ветрового стекла перед лазерным датчиком лед, снег и грязь (расположение датчика см. на рисунке на стр. 184). Не приклеивайте и не крепите посторонние предметы на ветровое стекло перед лазерным датчиком

Страница 188 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения City Safety™ Лазерный датчик Детальную информацию о лазерном датчике см. стр. 8. В функцию City Safety™ включен датчик, создающий лазерное излучение. При работе с лазерным датчиков необходимо четко выполнять предписанные инструкции. Символы и сообщения на

Страница 189 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения City Safety™ Символ 04 Сообщение Значение/Меры по устранению City Safety Требует обслуж. City Safety™ не работает. City Safety ВКЛ/ВЫКЛ City Safety™ можно выключить/выключить вручную, для чего выбирается OFF или ON, см. раздел «Вкл/Выкл». City safety Недоступен

Страница 190 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Предупреждение о столкновении с автоторможением* Общие сведения Предупреждение о столкновении с автоторможением (Collision Warning with Auto Brake) является функцией помощи водителю, который рискует столкнуться с находящимся перед ним неподвижным или движущимся

Страница 191 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Предупреждение о столкновении с автоторможением* Предупреждение о столкновении активируется на скорости от 7 км/ч. Поддержка торможением 04 При возрастании опасности столкновения после подачи предупреждения о столкновении активируется поддержка торможением.

Страница 192 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Предупреждение о столкновении с автоторможением* ВНИМАНИЕ При использовании адаптивного круизконтроля предупреждающая лампа и звуковой сигнал используются круизконтролем даже, если предупреждение о столкновении отключено. Предупреждение о столкновении

Страница 193 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Предупреждение о столкновении с автоторможением* Если Вам кажется, что предупреждения поступают слишком часто и раздражают Вас, Вы можете уменьшить дистанцию предупрждения. Это приводит к тому, что предупреждения от системы поступают позднее, снижая их общее

Страница 194 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Предупреждение о столкновении с автоторможением* Символы и сообщения на дисплее Символ Сообщение Значение Пред. столкн. ВЫКЛ Система предупреждения о столкновении отключена. Показывается при пуске двигателя. Сообщение гаснет прим. через 5 секунд или при нажатии

Страница 195 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Предупреждение о столкновении с автоторможением* Символ Сообщение Значение Радар блокирован См. руководство Предупреждение о столкновении и автоторможение временно не работают. Радиолокационный датчик заблокирован и не может обнаруживать другие транспортные

Страница 196 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Driver Alert System – DAC* Введение Driver Alert System создана в помощь водителю, который неуверенно ведет себя на дороге или собирается неосознанно съехать с полосы движения. Общие сведения о Driver Alert Control – DAC DAC предназначен для обнаружения

Страница 197 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Driver Alert System – DAC* • если водитель проверяет работу функции LDW. • • при сильном боковом ветре. если на дороге проложена колея. Использование 04 Ряд настроек проводится на дисплее и системе меню центральной консоли. Информацию о использовании системы

Страница 198 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Driver Alert System – DAC* Символы и сообщения на дисплее Символ Сообщение Значение Driver Alert ВЫКЛ Функция отключена. Driver Alert Недоступен Скорость ниже 60 км/ч, отсутствует четкая дорожная разметка или датчики камеры временно не работают. Ограничения

Страница 199 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Driver Alert System – LDW* Общие сведения о Lane Departure Warning – LDW Использование и принцип действия Если дорожная разметка пропадает из поля зрения камеры или скорость падает ниже 60 км/ч, функция возвращается в режим готовности, и на дисплее показывается

Страница 200 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Driver Alert System – LDW* ВНИМАНИЕ При каждом пересечении колесами разметки водитель получает предупреждение только один раз. Сигнал не поступает, если разметка находится между колесами автомобиля. Символы и сообщения на дисплее Символ Сообщение Значение Lane

Страница 201 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Driver Alert System – LDW* Символ Сообщение Значение Ветров. стекло Блокир. датчика Датчик камеры временно не работает. Показывается, если, например, ветровое стекло покрыто снегом, льдом или грязью. Очистите поверхность ветрового стекла перед датчиком камеры.

Страница 202 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Помощь парковки* Общие сведения Принцип действия Помощь при парковке используется как вспомогательное средство при парковке. Звуковой сигнал и символы на дисплее аудиосистемы указывают расстояние до обнаруженного препятствия. 1 Active Помощь при парковке

Страница 203 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Помощь парковки* ствующего датчика полностью закрашено, см. рис. (2). Если обнаруженное препятствие находится внутри зоны подачи непрерывного сигнала, как перед, так и позади автомобиля, звуковой сигнал поступает из динамиков попеременно. Помощь при парковке

Страница 204 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Помощь парковки* ВАЖНО В некоторых случаях система помощи при парковке может подавать ложные предупреждающие сигналы, вызванные внешними источниками звука, работающими на таких же ультразвуковых частотах, что и система. Примером таких источников являются

Страница 205 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Парковочная камера* Общие сведения о РАC Принцип действия Парковочная камера – PAC (Park Assist Camera) отображает на экране при движении задним ходом объекты, которые находятся за автомобилем. 04 С помощью линий на экране система показывает также, где

Страница 206 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Парковочная камера* Использование Вспомогательные линии Парковочная камера активируется при включении передачи заднего хода при условии, что данная функция установлена в системе меню, см. стр. 132. Если включена навигация RTI, система РАС автоматически

Страница 207 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Парковочная камера* Сплошная линия (1) ограничивает зону на расстоянии прим. до 30 см от бампера. Пунктирная линия (2) ограничивает свободную от препятствий зону прим. до 1,5 м от заднего бампера. Одновременно это является границей для наиболее выступающих

Страница 208 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System Общие сведения о BLIS ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ G031404 Система является лишь дополнением и не заменяет безопасного вождения и использования зеркал заднего вида. Она ни при каких обстоятельствах не заменяет внимание и ответственность

Страница 209 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System Активирование/отключение Когда BLIS работает Система работает, когда ваш автомобиль двигается со скоростью выше 10 км/ч. Обгон Данная система предназначена для реагирования в случае, когда: • вы совершаете обгон со

Страница 210 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Система не реагирует на велосипедистов и мотопедистов. Камеры BLIS могут выйти из строя из-за яркого света или при движении в темноте, когда отсутствуют источники света (например, дорожное освещение или

Страница 211 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System Ограничения В некоторых ситуациях индикаторная лампа BLIS горит при отсутствии транспортного средства в «мертвой зоне». ВНИМАНИЕ 04 Если в отдельных случаях индикаторная лампа BLIS горит при отсутствии транспортного

Страница 212 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Комфорт в салоне Места для хранения вещей G031433 04 « 211

Страница 213 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Комфорт в салоне Отделение для хранения в дверной панели Туннельная консоль Карман для хранения* в передней кромке подушек передних сидений Клипса для билетов Прикуриватель активируется нажатием на кнопку. Когда прикуриватель нагрет, кнопка выскакивает обратно.

Страница 214 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Комфорт в салоне Гнездо на 12 В Напольные коврики* ного оборудования на 12 В, например, мобильного телефона или холодильника. Максимальная сила тока 10 А. Для того чтобы на гнездо подавалось питание, необходимо установить дистанционный ключ в положение не ниже

Страница 215 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Комфорт в салоне ВНИМАНИЕ Помните, что использование этого электрического гнезда при неработающем двигателе может привести к разрядке аккумуляторной батареи. 04 214

Страница 216 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Bluetooth, «свободные руки»* Общие сведения лять с собственной клавиатуры телефона независимо от того, подключен он или нет. ВНИМАНИЕ Лишь некоторые мобильные телефоны полностью совместимы с функцией громкой связи. Volvo рекомендует обратиться к официальному

Страница 217 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Bluetooth, «свободные руки»* Подключение мобильного телефона Подсоединение мобильного телефона может происходить разными способами в зависимости от того, был ли мобильный телефон подсоединен ранее. Если мобильный телефон подсоединяется впервые, следуйте

Страница 218 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Bluetooth, «свободные руки»* когда мотор останавливается или открывается дверь1. При отсоединении мобильного телефона текущий разговор можно продолжить через встроенный в мобильный телефон микрофон и динамик. ВНИМАНИЕ Для некоторых мобильных телефонов переход

Страница 219 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Bluetooth, «свободные руки»* Сигналы звонка 3, и т.д. Сигнал звонка 1, 2, ВНИМАНИЕ Сигнал звонка подключенного мобильного телефона не выключается при использовании одного из сигналов системы «свободные руки». 04 Для выбора сигнала звонка подключенного телефона2

Страница 220 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Bluetooth, «свободные руки»* Поиск записи Самым простым способом поиска в телефонной книжке является длительное нажатие на кнопки 2–9. Таким образом начинается поиск в телефонной книжке по первой букве кнопки. Телефонную книжку можно также открыть с / на

Страница 221 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Bluetooth, «свободные руки»* Кнопка Принцип действия +0@*#&$£/% Переключение между заглавными и строчными буквами. 04 220 * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

Страница 222 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Встроенный телефон* Общие сведения систему меню в зависимости от скорости автомобиля, см. стр. 223. Приведение в действие SIM карта Телефоном можно пользоваться только при наличии действующей SIM-карты (Subscriber Identity Module). Установку см. стр. 224.

Страница 223 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Встроенный телефон* дуального разговора. Если вызов поступает, когда телефонная трубка снята, ответить на звонок следует, используя ENTER. Завершите разговор с помощью EXIT или положите телефонную трубку. Откажитесь от разговора с помощью EXIT. Авто-ответ См.

Страница 224 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Встроенный телефон* Громкость сигнала звонка регулируется в Настройки телефона Звук и громкость Громкость звонка. Регулировку проводите с помощью / на джойстике. Телефонная книга Данные записи можно сохранить в SIMкарте или телефоне. Сохранение записи в

Страница 225 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Встроенный телефон* щих, исходящих и пропущенных звонков. Исходящие звонки также показываются, если нажать ENTER. Номера телефонов из списка могут сохраняться в телефонной книжке. Продолж. звонка 04 Длительность разговора сохраняется в Реестр звонков Продолж.

Страница 226 из 331

04 Комфорт и удовольствие от вождения Встроенный телефон* Убедитесь, что телефон отключен. Выньте держатель SIM-карты, расположенный в перчаточном ящике. Расположите SIM-карту металлической , и наденьте футляр стороной к себе держателя SIM-карты . Установите на место держатель. 04 *

Страница 227 из 331

Рекомендации во время езды…………………………………………………… Заправка топливом………………………………………………………………….. Топливо……………………………………………………………………………………

Страница 228 из 331

В ПОЕЗДКЕ 05

Страница 229 из 331

05 В поездке Рекомендации во время езды Общие сведения Экономичное вождение Экономичное вождение и охрана окружающей среды означают предвидение дорожной ситуации и плавное вождение, а также адаптацию манеры вождения и скорости к условиям дорожного движения (советы по охране окружающей среды см.

Страница 230 из 331

05 В поездке Рекомендации во время езды Открытая дверь задка Не ездите с открытой дверью задка. Если это все же необходимо, то только на короткое расстояние. Закройте все окна, направьте воздух к стеклам и на пол и включите самую высокую скорость вентилятора. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Не ездите с открытой

Страница 231 из 331

05 В поездке Рекомендации во время езды сцепления с дорожным покрытием устанавливать зимние шины на все четыре колеса. ВНИМАНИЕ В соответствии с законодательством некоторых странах использование зимних шин обязательно. Ошипованные шины запрещены в некоторых странах. Скользкое дорожное покрытие

Страница 232 из 331

05 В поездке Заправка топливом Заправка топливом Открытие/закрытие крышки топливного бака Откройте крышку топливного бака кнопкой на панели освещения. Крышка расположена на правом заднем крыле, что указывается стрелкой на символе ного дисплея. информацион- Закройте, нажав на крышку так, чтобы

Страница 233 из 331

05 В поездке Топливо Общие сведения о топливе Запрещается использовать топливо более низкого качества по сравнению с рекомендуемым Volvo, так как это может отрицательно сказаться на мощности двигателя и расходе топлива. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Ни при каких обстоятельствах не вдыхайте пары топлива и

Страница 234 из 331

05 В поездке Топливо вблизи двигателя, чтобы быстро достигалась рабочая температура. Катализаторы состоят из монолитного блока (керамзит или металл), в котором проходят каналы. На стенки каналов нанесено покрытие из платины/родия/палладия. Эти металлы выполняют функцию катализатора, т.е. ускоряют

Страница 235 из 331

05 В поездке Топливо 1. Залейте в бак не менее 5 литров дизельного топлива. Фильтр грубой очистки дизельного топлива (DPF) 2. Вставьте дистанционный ключ в замок запуска и легко нажмите, так чтобы он втянулся в замок (см. стр. 79). Для более эффективной очистки отработавших газов в автомобилях с

Страница 236 из 331

05 В поездке Топливо Расход топлива и выбросы диоксида углерода Расход топлива может иметь другое значение, если автомобиль оснащен дополнительным оборудованием, влияющим на массу автомобиля. Информацию и массах см. на стр. 304 и в таблице на стр. 312. На расход топлива также влияет манера езды и

Страница 237 из 331

05 В поездке Погрузка Общие сведения Допустимая нагрузка зависит от рабочего веса автомобиля. Общий вес пассажиров и всего дополнительного оборудования пропорционально на этот же вес снижают грузоподъемность автомобиля. Дополнительную информацию о различных весах см. стр. 304. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Страница 238 из 331

05 В поездке Погрузка Крепление груза В каждом углу багажного отделения имеются места для крепления груза. 05 ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Твердые, острые и/или тяжелые предметы, которые лежат или выступают, могут при резком торможении стать причиной травм. Всегда закрепляйте большие, тяжелые предметы при

Страница 239 из 331

05 В поездке Багажное отделение Держатель для сумок* Защитная сетка* ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Груз в багажном отделении должен надежно крепиться, даже при наличии правильно установленной защитной сетки. Установка на место 05 Держатель пакетов под крышкой в полу. Защитная сетка крепится в четырех точках.

Страница 240 из 331

05 В поездке Багажное отделение 3. Навесив, закрепите другой конец штанги в потолочном креплении на другой стороне – телескопические подпружиненные крепежные крюки облегчают установку. ВАЖНО Если кресло/спинка упираются слишком сильно в защитную сетку, можно повредить сетку и/или потолочные

Страница 241 из 331

05 В поездке Багажное отделение Перегните в середине и сложите штангу и сверните сетку. Сложенная защитная сетка может храниться под настилом в багажном отделении. Защитная решетка* ВАЖНО Защитная решетка не может складываться или разворачиваться при установке защитной шторки. G018369 Установка на

Страница 242 из 331

05 В поездке Багажное отделение на рисунке (1). Закрепите решетку пово. ротом ручки на 90° Установка защитной шторки Заведите один наконечник защиты в углубление на боковой панели. Снятие Заведите другой наконечник в противоположное углубление. Снятие решетки проводится в обратном порядке к

Страница 243 из 331

05 В поездке Багажное отделение ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Положение центра тяжести и динамические характеристики автомобиля зависят от груза, размещаемого на крыше. Информацию о максимально разрешенном грузе на крыше с учетом багажника и багажного кофра, см. стр. 304. 05 242

Страница 244 из 331

05 В поездке Треугольный знак аварийной остановки* Выньте треугольный знак из чехла, раскройте и соедините две стороны вместе. Откиньте опоры знака аварийной остановки. Следуйте действующим правилам использования треугольного знака аварийной остановки. Треугольный знак аварийной остановки ставится

Страница 245 из 331

05 В поездке Езда с прицепом Допустимая нагрузка зависит от рабочего веса автомобиля. Общий вес пассажиров и всего дополнительного оборудования, например, буксирного крюка, пропорционально на этот же вес снижают грузоподъемность автомобиля. Дополнительную информацию о различных весах см. стр. 304.

Страница 246 из 331

05 В поездке Езда с прицепом специальный переходник. Используйте переходный кабель, одобренный Volvo. Проверьте, чтобы кабель не волочился по земле. Указатели поворотов и стоп-сигналы прицепа Если неисправна одна из ламп указателей поворотов прицепа, символ указателей поворотов в комбинированном

Страница 247 из 331

05 В поездке Езда с прицепом G021485 Технические данные G031713 Хранение шарового сцепного устройства Размеры, точки крепления (мм) 05 Место хранения шарового сцепного устройства. ВАЖНО После использования обязательно снимайте шаровое сцепное устройство и храните его в автомобиле в определенном

Страница 248 из 331

05 В поездке Езда с прицепом Снимите защитную крышку, надавив а затем потясначала на фиксатор, нув крышку назад . Индикаторное окошко должно быть красного цвета. G021490 G018928 G021488 Установка шаровой части Индикаторное окошко должно быть зеленого цвета. G021487 Повернув ключ по часовой стрелке,

Страница 249 из 331

05 В поездке Убедитесь, что шаровое устройство зафиксировано, подергав вверх, вниз и назад. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ 05 Если шаровое устройство установлено неправильно, его следует снять и вновь установить в соответствии с указанными ранее этапами. G021495 G021494 Езда с прицепом Страховочный трос.

Страница 250 из 331

05 В поездке Езда с прицепом Принцип действия ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ При хранении съемного шарового устройства буксирного крюка в автомобиле его следует надежно закреплять, см. стр. 246. Явление автоколебания автомобиля с прицепом возможно для любых комбинаций автомобилей и прицепов. В обычных случаях

Страница 251 из 331

05 В поездке Езда с прицепом Когда система TSA действует, в комбинированном приборе мигает символ DSTC. 05 250

Страница 252 из 331

05 В поездке Буксировка и эвакуация Буксировка ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Перед буксировкой автомобиля выясните, какая максимальная скорость буксировки разрешена законом. Замок рулевого колеса остается в том положении, в котором он был в момент отключения напряжения. Перед буксировкой замок рулевого колеса

Страница 253 из 331

05 В поездке Буксировка и эвакуация Буксирная скоба Эвакуация Если автомобиль следует отбуксировать по дороге, используйте буксировочную скобу. Буксировочная скоба закрепляется в нише с правой стороны переднего или заднего бампера. ВАЖНО Помните, что автомобиль должен буксироваться только вперед. •

Страница 254 из 331

05 В поездке 05 253

Страница 255 из 331

254 256 262 269 271 274 282 294 G020922 Двигательный отсек…………………………………………………………………. Лампы……………………………………………………………………………………… Щетки стеклоочистителей и омывающая

Страница 256 из 331

УХОД И ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕ 06

Страница 257 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Двигательный отсек Общие сведения Программа техобслуживания Volvo Для поддержания на высоком уровне дорожной безопасности и эксплуатационной надежности Вашего автомобиля Volvo необходимо следовать программе техобслуживания Volvo, которая приведена в Сервисной и гарантийной

Страница 258 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Двигательный отсек Двигательный отсек, обзор Открытие и закрытие капота Заправка омывающей жидкости Воздушный фильтр ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ В системе зажигания создается очень высокое напряжение. Напряжение в системе зажигания опасно для жизни. При проведении работ в двигательном

Страница 259 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Двигательный отсек Volvo рекомендует маслопродукты Castrol. При эксплуатации в неблагоприятных условиях, см. стр. 310. ВАЖНО 06 Для соблюдения интервалов техобслуживания во все двигатели производителем заливается специализированное синтетическое моторное масло. При выборе

Страница 260 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Двигательный отсек ВАЖНО Никогда не заливайте выше отметки MAX. Расход масла может возрастать, если в двигатель залить слишком много масла. Охлаждающая жидкость Охлаждающая жидкость, проверка уровня и заправка G021737 ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Уровень масла должен находиться в

Страница 261 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Двигательный отсек ВАЖНО • 06 • Используйте охлаждающую жидкость с антикоррозионной добавкой согласно рекомендациям Volvo. • Следите за тем, чтобы смесь охлаждающей жидкости состояла из 50 % воды и 50 % охлаждающей жидкости. • Смешивайте охлаждающую жидкость с водопроводной

Страница 262 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Двигательный отсек Дозаправка Масло сервоусилителя руля ВНИМАНИЕ В случае выхода из строя системы усилителя руля или необходимости буксировки автомобиля с выключенным двигателем управляемость автомобиля попрежнему сохраняется. Бачок с жидкостью расположен на стороне водителя.

Страница 263 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Лампы Общие сведения Список всех ламп накаливания см. стр. 268. Лампы накаливания и точечные лампы специального типа или лампы, замена которых возможна только на станции техобслуживания: • Общее освещение в потолке, лампы для чтения • • Освещение отделения для перчаток • •

Страница 264 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Лампы 4. Извлеките корпус фары и положите его на мягкую поверхность, чтобы не повредить рассеиватель. ния корпус лампы должен быть подсоединен и установлен на место. 5. Замените лампу, см. стр. 268. Снятие защитной крышки Ближний свет фар, галогенный Установка фары 1. Снимите

Страница 265 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Лампы Дальний свет, галогенный Дополнительный дальний свет, ксенон* Указатели поворотов/мигающие сигналы 2. Снимите защитную крышку. 1. Снимите фару. 1. Снимите фару. 3. Чтобы снять лампу, поверните против часовой стрелки и затем выньте. 2. Снимите защитную крышку, см. стр.

Страница 266 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Лампы Установите на место все детали в обратном порядке. Противотуманные фары Задние противотуманные фары Снимите колпак, потянув за ближний к решетке верхний угол, см. рисунок выше. Доступ к заднему противотуманному фонарю за бампером. 1. Потяните колпак наружу по

Страница 267 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Лампы Расположение ламп в заднем фонаре Стекло фонаря, правая сторона 06 Стоп-сигнал и фонарь заднего хода Освещение номерного знака Стоп-сигнал и фонарь заднего хода заменяются из багажного отделения. 1. Отверткой открутите винты. Габаритные (светодиоды)/боковые габаритные

Страница 268 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Лампы Освещение порогов Освещение грузового отделения Освещение косметического зеркала G031942 Снятие зеркальной вставки Перед началом замены лампы накаливания см. стр. 262. 1. Вставьте отвертку и, осторожно отогнув, освободите корпус лампы. 1. Вставьте отвертку с короткой

Страница 269 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Лампы 2. Затем вдавите на место три нижних выступа. Лампы накаливания, технические характеристики 06 Освещение W Тип Дополнительный дальний свет, ксенон, ABL 65 H9 Ближний свет фар, галогенный 55 H7 LL Дальний свет, галогенный 65 H9 Мигающие сигналы спереди 21 PY21W

Страница 270 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Щетки стеклоочистителей и омывающая жидкость Щетки стеклоочистителей Сервисное положение Чтобы заменить, очистить или поднять щетки стеклоочистителей (для удаления льда с ветрового стекла скребком), необходимо установить их в сервисное положение. G021763 1. Установите

Страница 271 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Щетки стеклоочистителей и омывающая жидкость Замена щеток стеклоочистителей, заднее стекло Чистка Чистка щеток стеклоочистителей и ветрового стекла см. стр. 294. ВАЖНО Регулярно проверяйте состояние щеток. Несвоевременный уход сокращает срок службы щеток. G032770 Заправка

Страница 272 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Аккумулятор Предупреждающие символы на пусковом аккумуляторе Избегайте искр открытого огня. Пользуйтесь защитными очками. ВАЖНО Опасность взрыва. Для зарядки пускового аккумулятора запрещается пользоваться устройством быстрой зарядки. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Дополнительную информацию

Страница 273 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Аккумулятор ВНИМАНИЕ Если аккумуляторная батарея разряжается многократно, это отрицательно сказывается на сроке ее службы. Замена Снятие Срок службы аккумуляторной батареи зависит от ряда факторов, к которым относятся стиль вождения и климат. Емкость аккумуляторной батареи

Страница 274 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Аккумулятор ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Крепите и снимайте положительный и отрицательный пусковой провод в правильной последовательности. 2. Задвиньте аккумулятор внутрь и в сторону до заднего края подставки. 3. Закрепите аккумулятор винтом хомута. 4. Подсоедините продувочный шланг. 5.

Страница 275 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители Общие сведения Все электрические устройства и компоненты защищены плавкими предохранителями, которые предотвращают повреждение системы электрооборудования автомобиля в случае короткого замыкания или перегрузки. Отказ электрического компонента или функции может

Страница 276 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители Двигательный отсек 06 « 275

Страница 277 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители Предохранители общего назначения в двигательном отсеке Принцип действия A Принцип действия A Под крышкой находятся специальные щипцы, которые помогут Вам вынуть и поставить на место предохранитель. Первичный предохранитель RJBA KL30 60 10 Первичный

Страница 278 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители Принцип действия A Принцип действия A Реле, блок в двигательном отсеке 5 10 Дополнительные фары* 20 Модуль управления двигателем, дроссель бензин Звуковой сигнал 15 Модуль управления двигателем 10 Модуль управления автоматической коробкой передач* 15 Компрессор

Страница 279 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители Под перчаточным ящиком 06 278 1. Отогните внутреннюю обивку, закрывающую блок предохранителей. Принцип действия 2. Нажмите на замок в крышке и откиньте ее вверх. 3. Доступ к предохранителям открыт. Педаль газа, подогреватель воздуха (РТС)*, кресла с

Страница 280 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители Принцип действия A Принцип действия A Адаптивный круиз-контроль, АСС* 10 Замок топливного бака/ двери задка 10 — Сирена сигнализации*, ЕСС 5 Кнопка пуска/останова 5 Переключатель стоп-сигналов 5 Потолочное освещение, панель управления в двери водителя/кресло

Страница 281 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители Багажное отделение Блок предохранителей расположен за облицовкой с левой стороны. 06 Панель управления в правой задней двери Позиции (черный) 280 (черный) A Панель управления, дверь водителя 25 Панель управления, дверь пассажира 25 Панель управления в левой

Страница 282 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Предохранители (белый) A Помощь при парковке*, камера помощи при парковке* 5 Модуль управления FourC* 15 Обогрев кресла на стороне водителя впереди* 15 Обогрев кресла на стороне пассажира впереди* 15 Обогрев кресла, правое заднее* 15 Модуль управления AWD 10 Обогрев кресла,

Страница 283 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Общие сведения Для управляемости автомобилем шины имеют очень большое значение. От типа шин, размера, давления в шинах и класса скорости зависит поведение автомобиля. ристик и потере способности выдавливать воду и снежную грязь с дорожного покрытия. ВНИМАНИЕ

Страница 284 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Летние и зимние шины При замене летних колес на зимние и наоборот, см. стр. 286, на колесах следует пометить, с какой стороны они были сняты, например, Л с левой стороны и П с правой стороны. Шины с индикатором износа протектора Диски и колесные болты ВАЖНО

Страница 285 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины ВНИМАНИЕ За советом в отношении наиболее подходящих дисков и типа шин Volvo рекомендует обратиться за советом к дилеру Volvo. Ошипованные шины На протяжении первых 500-1000 км после установки новых ошипованных шин необходимо ездить как можно более плавно и

Страница 286 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Домкрат* Пользуйтесь оригинальным домкратом только для замены колес. Болт домкрата должен быть всегда хорошо смазан. Запасное колесо* Запасное колесо (Temporary spare) предназначено только для временного использования. Как можно быстрее заменяйте запасное колесо

Страница 287 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Замена колес Снятие ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Убедитесь, что домкрат чистый, без повреждений и резьба тщательно смазана. ВНИМАНИЕ Volvo рекомендует пользоваться домкратом,* предназначенным только для соответствующей модели автомобиля. 06 Выставьте треугольный знак

Страница 288 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины 2. Установите колесо. Закрутите колесные болты. 6. 3. Опустите автомобиль так, чтобы колесо не прокручивалось. ВНИМАНИЕ При монтаже вывод для ниппеля в колпаке ступицы должен совпадать с ниппелем в колесном диске. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Запрещается забираться под

Страница 289 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Общие сведения Шиноремонтный комплект используется для герметизации прокола, а также для контроля и регулировки давления в шинах. Комплект состоит из компрессора и упаковки с жидким герметиком, и предназначен для проведения временного ремонта. Банка с жидким

Страница 290 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Герметизация прокола в шине ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Жидкий герметик может вызвать раздражение кожи. При попадании на кожу немедленно смойте жидкость с кожи водой с мылом. 3. Убедитесь, что переключатель находится в положении 0 и выньте провод и воздушный шланг. ВНИМАНИЕ

Страница 291 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины 9. Накачивайте шину в течение 7 минут. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Если давление ниже 1,8 бар, прокол в шине слишком большого размера. От дальнейшей поездки следует отказаться. Рекомендуется обратиться в авторизованную шиноремонтную мастерскую. 10. Чтобы проверить давление

Страница 292 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины 4. Положите шиноремонтный комплект на место в грузовое отделение. ВНИМАНИЕ После использования банку с герметиком и шланг следует заменить. Volvo рекомендует такую замену проводить на официальной станции техобслуживания Volvo. ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ Регулярно

Страница 293 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Классы скорости Ваш автомобиль был принят и одобрен как единое целое. Это означает, что Вы не можете изменять размеры шин и классы скорости, указанные в регистрационном свидетельстве на автомобиль. Единственным исключением из этого правила являются зимние шины

Страница 294 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Колеса и шины Рекомендуемое давление в шинах Вариант Все двигатели Размер шин Скорость (км/ч) Груз, 1 – 3 человека Максимальный груз Давление ЕСОA Передние (кПа)B Задние (кПа) Передние (кПа) Задние (кПа) Передние/ задние (кПа) 235/65 R 17 0 — 160 240 240 270 270 270 235/60 R

Страница 295 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Уход за автомобилем Мойка автомобиля Мойте автомобиль, как только он загрязняется. Поставьте автомобиль на специальной площадке для мойки с сепаратором для масла. Пользуйтесь автомобильным шампунем. • 06 • • Промывайте днище автомобиля. • Для мойки используйте губку,

Страница 296 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Уход за автомобилем ности автомобиля (расстояние до всех внешних деталей). Не направляйте струю прямо на замки. Проверка тормозов ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ После мойки обязательно, притормаживая, просушите тормоза, включая стояночный тормоз, чтобы тормозные колодки не подверглись

Страница 297 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Уход за автомобилем Водоотталкивающий слой* Никогда не применяйте такие материалы, как автовоск, обезжиривающие средства или им подобные для обработки поверхности стекол, так как это может нарушить их водоотталкивающие свойства. Во время очистки следите за тем, чтобы не

Страница 298 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Уход за автомобилем и внешнего вида требуется регулярная чистка. Volvo предлагает полный спектр продуктов для чистки и последующей обработки обивки из кожи, при использовании которых в соответствии с инструкциями на коже сохраняется защитный слой.Все же со временем кожа

Страница 299 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание Уход за автомобилем Материал • • грунтовка в банке (праймер) • • кисть тить неповрежденное лакокрасочное покрытие. Восстановление сколов эмали эмаль в банке или «карандаш» для подкраски 4. Через несколько дней отполируйте восстановленные участки. Используйте для этого мягкую

Страница 300 из 331

06 Уход и обслуживание 06 299

Страница 301 из 331

300 302 304 307 308 310 312 313 314 G000000 Обозначения типа……………………………………………………………………. Размеры и массы…………………………………………………………………….. Технические данные

Страница 302 из 331

ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЕ ДАННЫЕ 07

Страница 303 из 331

07 Технические данные Обозначения типа Расположение табличек 07 302

Страница 304 из 331

07 Технические данные Обозначения типа Общение с дилером Volvo или заказ запасных частей и аксессуаров для автомобиля существенно упрощается, если Вам известны обозначение типа, номер шасси и номер двигателя автомобиля. Обозначение типа, номер шасси, максимально разрешенные веса и код цвета и

Страница 305 из 331

07 Технические данные Размеры и массы Размеры Размеры мм A Колесная база 2774 В Длина 4627 C Длина груза, пол, сложенное заднее сидение 1789 07 304 D Длина груза, пол Е Высота F Высота груза G Ширина передней колеи 972 1713 802 1632 Размеры мм Н Ширина задней колеи 1586 I Ширина груза, пол 1090 J

Страница 306 из 331

07 Технические данные Размеры и массы ВНИМАНИЕ Подтвержденный в документации рабочий вес относится к автомобилю в базовой комплектации, т.е. автомобиль без дополнительного или опционного оборудования. Это означает, что каждая добавленная единица опционного оборудования снижает грузоподъемность

Страница 307 из 331

07 Технические данные Размеры и массы Масса, разрешенная для буксировки, и нагрузка на шаровое устройство прицепа A Двигатель Коробка передач Макс. вес прицепа с тормозами (кг) Макс. давление на шаровое устройство (кг) Все Все 0-1200 50 3.2 Автомат, TF–80SC 1800 90 3.2 AWD Автомат, TF–80SC 1800 90

Страница 308 из 331

07 Технические данные Технические данные двигателя Технические данные двигателя Модель A Двигатель Мощность (кВт/об/ м) Мощность (л.с./об/ мин) Крутящий момент (Нм/ об/м) Числ о цили ндро в Диаметр цилиндр а (мм) Рабочий ход поршня (мм) Рабочий объем цилиндров (литры) Коэффициент сжатия T6 B6304T2

Страница 309 из 331

07 Технические данные Масло для двигателя Экстремальные условия вождения Эксплуатация в экстремальных условиях может привести к аномальному повышению температуры или расходу масла. Проверяйте уровень масла более часто при длительной эксплуатации: • во время буксировки кемпера или прицепа • • • в

Страница 310 из 331

07 Технические данные Масло для двигателя Наклейка с указанием масла Вариант двигателя Заправочный объем между MIN и MAX (литры) Объем (литры) B6304T2 1,2 7,4 3.2 B6324S 1,2 7,4 2.4D D5244T14 1,5 6,0 D5 D5244T10 G032078 T6 Если указанная табличка установлена в двигательном отсеке автомобиля, это

Страница 311 из 331

07 Технические данные Жидкости и смазки Прочие жидкости и смазочные вещества Жидкость Система Охлаждающая жидкость Бензиновый двигатель T6 Объем (литры) 8,9 Дизельный двигатель D5 12,6 Motor Diesel 2.4D Хладагент Кондиционирование воздуха B Рекомендуемое качество Охлаждающая жидкость с

Страница 312 из 331

07 Технические данные Жидкости и смазки Двигатель Коробка передач Объем (литры) Требования по качеству трансмиссионного масла D5 дизель Механическая, М66 1,9 BOT 350M3 D5 дизель Автоматическая, TF–80SC 7,0 JWS 3309 ВНИМАНИЕ При эксплуатации в обычных условиях масло в коробке передач не требуется

Страница 313 из 331

07 Технические данные Топливо Выбросы CO2, расход топлива и объем бака Модель A Двигатель Коробка передач Объем топливного бака (литры) B6304T2 Автомат (TF–80SC) AWD 274 11,7 прим. 70 3.2 B6324S Автомат (TF–80SC) AWD 267 11,2 прим. 70 D5 D5244T10 Механическая (М66) AWD 183 6,9 прим. 70 D5 D5244T10

Страница 314 из 331

07 Технические данные Электросистема Электросистема Отрицательный полюс подсоединен к шасси. Система на 12В с генератором переменного тока, регулируемым напряжением. Однополюсная система, в которой шасси и корпус двигателя используются как проводники. ВАЖНО При замене аккумуляторной батареи

Страница 315 из 331

07 Технические данные Тип разрешения Система дистанционного управления BR Страна A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, E, EST, F, FIN, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, SK, SLO IS, LI, N, CH HR ROK 07 314 Страна Настоящим Delphi подтверждает, что данная система дистанционного ключа соответствует

Страница 316 из 331

07 Технические данные 07 315

Страница 317 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель A D H ACC – Адаптивный круиз-контроль….. 172 DAB, структура меню………………………. 164 HBS – Heart Beat Sensor…………………….. 52 Active Bending Lights (ABL)…………………. 88 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II……………….. 151

Страница 318 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель P U PACOS………………………………………………. 23 USB, подключение…………………………… 154 PACOS, переключатель…………………….. 23 PCC – Personal Car Communicator радиус действия……………………… 50, 51

Страница 319 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Б Багажное отделение точки крепления…………………………. 237 Беременные женщины, ремень безопасности………………………………………………… 17 Блокиратор включения передачи заднего хода……………………………………. 115

Страница 320 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Д Дизель…………………………………………….. 233 Дист. освещения при подходе……………. 93 Давление ЕСО…………………………………. 292 Дальний/ближний света фар, см. Освещение……………………………………………….. 87

Страница 321 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Запотевание……………………………………. 143 конденсат внутри фар…………………. 294 обработка стекол……………………….. 138 устранение с помощью вентиляционных сопел…………………………………… 145 функция

Страница 322 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Комбинированный прибор……………….. 135 Компас……………………………………………. 106 калибровка…………………………………. 106 Комфорт в салоне…………………………… 211 Конденсат внутри фар…………………….. 294

Страница 323 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель О Ожидающие звонки…………………………. 222 Обзор приборов автомобиль с левосторонним управлением…………………………………………. 70 автомобиль с правосторонним управлением…………………………………. 72 Омыватель ветровое

Страница 324 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель П Панорамная крыша открытие и закрытие…………………… 108 положение вентиляции……………….. 109 шторка……………………………………….. 108 Панорамная крыша с электроприводом…………………………………………………. 108

Страница 325 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Противотуманный свет, вкл/выкл………. 90 Регуляторы света……………………………… 87 Пульт дистанционного управления программируемый……………………….. 127 Режим безопасности…………………………. 33 Пуск без ключа (keyless drive)………

Страница 326 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель контрольные символы…………………… 74 предупреждающие символы………….. 74 Смазки……………………………………………. 310 Сообщения системы BLIS………………… 209 Смазки, заправочные объемы………….. 310 Символы и сообщения Driver

Страница 327 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Счетчики в комбинированном приборе спидометр…………………………………….. 74 счетчик топлива……………………………. 74 тахометр………………………………………. 74 Сообщения…………………………………. 223 телефонная

Страница 328 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Ф Ч Фары………………………………………………. 262 Часы, установка………………………………… 78 Фильтр в салоне……………………………… 139 Чистка автоматическая мойка автомобилей………………………………………………

Страница 329 из 331

08 Алфавитный указатель Электрическое гнездо багажное отделение……………………. 213 переднее сиденье……………………….. 213 Электронная блокировка запуска двигателя……………………………………………….. 48 Электрообогрев заднее

Страница 330 из 331

VOLVO XC60 РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&&%%*Gjhh^Vc!6I%.’%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\’%%.!8deng^\]i’%%%»‘%%.Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc

Страница 331 из 331

Источник

Просмотр

Доступно к просмотру 330 страниц. Рекомендуем вам скачать файл инструкции, поскольку онлайн просмотр документа может сильно отличаться от оригинала.

VOLVO XC60
РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
WEB EDITION
Kdakd 8Vg 8dgedgVi^dc IE &&%%*  Gjhh^Vc ! 6I %.'%! Eg^ciZY ^c HlZYZc!

УВАЖАЕМЫЕ ВЛАДЕЛЬЦЫ АВТОМОБИЛЯ
VOLVO!
СПАСИБО ЗА ВАШ ВЫБОР АВТОМОБИЛЯ VOLVO!
Мы надеемся, что Вы в течение многих лет получите
наслаждение от управления Вашим автомобилем Volvo.
Этот автомобиль создан для обеспечения комфорта и
безопасности Вам и Вашим пассажирам. Volvo — это один
из самых безопасных легковых автомобилей в мире. Ваш
Volvo разработан с учетом всех действующих требований
по безопасности и охране окружающей среды.
Для того чтобы этот автомобиль доставил Вам истинное
удовольствие, мы рекомендуем ознакомиться с информа-
цией об оборудовании, эксплуатации и техническом обслу-
живании, которая содержится в данном Руководстве по
эксплуатации.

Содержание
00 Введение                        01 Безопасность                     02 Замки и сигнализация
Важная информация................................. 6  Ремни безопасности .............................. 16  Дистанционный ключ/плоский ключ..... 48
Volvo и окружающая среда.................... 11  Система надувных подушек безопас-  Замена батарейки в дистанционном
ности (SRS - Airbag)................................ 19  ключе/РСС*.............................................. 54
Активирование/отключение подушки    Keyless drive*............................................ 56
безопасности*......................................... 23
Запирание/отпирание............................. 59
Боковая подушка безопасности (SIPS-  Замок для безопасности детей............. 64
bag) .......................................................... 26
Сигнализация*......................................... 65
Надувной занавес (IC) ............................ 28
WHIPS ...................................................... 29
Roll-Over Protection System (система
защиты при переворачивании автомо-
биля) – ROPS........................................... 31
Когда срабатывают системы ................ 32
Аварийный режим................................... 33
Безопасность детей................................ 34
00 01 02
2    * Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

Источник

Перейти к контенту

Автомобили Volvo

Размер инструкции: 7.92 Мб
Формат файла: pdf

Если вы потеряли инструкцию от автомобили Volvo XC60 2010, можете скачать файл для просмотра на компьютере или печати.

Инструкция для автомобили Volvo XC60 2010 на русском языке. В руководстве описаны возможности и полезные функции, а также правила эксплуатации. Перед использованием внимательно ознакомьтесь с инструкцией.

Чтобы не читать всю инструкцию вы можете выполнить поиск по содержимому внутри инструкции и быстро найти необходимую информацию. Рекомендации по использованию помогут увеличить срок службы автомобили Volvo XC60 2010. Если у вас появилась проблема, то найдите раздел с описанием неисправностей и способами их решения. В нем указаны типичные поломки и способы их решения.

Источник

VOLVO XC60

OWNERS MANUAL

WEB EDITION

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your

Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of

you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the

world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current

safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend

that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions

and maintenance information contained in this owner’s manual.

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

00 00 Introduction

Important information…………………………… 6

Volvo and the environment………………….. 10

01 01 Safety

Seatbelts ………………………………………….. 16

Airbag system (SRS — Airbag)………………. 19

Activating/deactivating the airbag*……….. 22

Side airbags (SIPS bags) ……………………. 24

Inflatable Curtain (IC) …………………………. 26

WHIPS ……………………………………………… 27

Roll-Over Protection System — ROPS……. 29

When the systems deploy …………………… 30

Safety mode………………………………………. 31

Child safety……………………………………….. 32 02 02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade……………… 44

Battery replacement, remote control key/ PCC*………………………………………………… 49

Keyless drive*…………………………………….. 51

Locking/unlocking………………………………. 53

Child safety locks……………………………….. 58

Alarm*………………………………………………. 59

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls…………………….. 64

Key positions…………………………………….. 73

Seats………………………………………………… 75

Steering wheel…………………………………… 79

Lighting…………………………………………….. 80

Wipers and washing……………………………. 89

Windows, rearview and door mirrors…….. 92

Compass*…………………………………………. 97

Power panorama roof* ……………………….. 98

Starting the engine……………………………. 100

Starting the engine external battery….. 102

Gearboxes……………………………………….. 103

All-wheel drive AWD*……………………… 107

Foot brake……………………………………….. 108

Hill Descent Control (HDC)………………… 110

Parking brake…………………………………… 112

HomeLink *…………………………………….. 115

04 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages……………………….. 120

Climate control…………………………………. 126

Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*……………… 133

Fuel-driven additional heater*…………….. 136

Audio system…………………………………… 137

Trip computer………………………………….. 150

DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem…………………………………………………. 152

Adapting driving characteristics…………. 154

Cruise control*…………………………………. 155

Adaptive cruise control*…………………….. 156

Distance Alert…………………………………… 162

City Safety……………………………………. 165

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*…….. 170

Driver Alert System DAC*………………… 175

Driver Alert System — LDW*………………… 178

Park assist syst*……………………………….. 181

Park assist camera*………………………….. 184

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 187

Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment……………………………………………….. 191

Bluetooth handsfree*………………………… 194

Built-in phone*…………………………………. 199

05 05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving……….. 206

Refuelling………………………………………… 208

Fuel………………………………………………… 209

Loading…………………………………………… 212

Cargo area………………………………………. 213

Warning triangle*………………………………. 217

Driving with a trailer………………………….. 218

Towing and recovery………………………… 224

Table of contents

06 06 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment…………………………. 228

Lamps…………………………………………….. 234

Wiper blades and washer fluid……………. 241

Battery…………………………………………….. 243

Fuses……………………………………………… 246

Wheels and tyres……………………………… 254

Car care………………………………………….. 265

07 07 Specifications

Type designations…………………………….. 272

Dimensions and weights……………………. 274

Engine specifications………………………… 277

Engine oil………………………………………… 278

Fluids and lubricants…………………………. 280

Fuel………………………………………………… 282

Electrical system………………………………. 283

Type approval………………………………….. 284 08 08 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index……………………………. 286

Introduction

Important information

Reading the Owner’s Manual

Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is

to read the owner’s manual, ideally before your

first journey. This will give you the opportunity

to familiarise yourself with new functions, to

see how best to handle the car in different sit-

uations, and to make the best use of all the

car’s features. Please pay attention to the

safety instructions contained in the manual.

The equipment described in the owner’s man-

ual is not present in all cars. In addition to

standard equipment, this manual also

describes options (factory fitted equipment)

and certain accessories (retrofitted extra

equipment). If you are uncertain over what is

standard or option/accessory then we recom-

mend that you contact your Volvo dealer.

Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require-

ments of different markets, as well as for

national or local legal requirements and regu-

lations.

The specifications, design features and illus-

trations in this owner’s manual are not binding.

We reserve the right to make modifications

without prior notice.

Volvo Car Corporation

Option All types of option/accessory are marked with

an asterisk .

The range of options/accessories for the dif-

ferent car models varies depending on the mar-

ket. The majority of options are factory fitted

and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret-

rofitted.

We recommend that you contact your author-

ised Volvo dealer for more information.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner’s

manual that is located at the bottom of the

page. This information is an addition to the text

that it refers to via a number. If the footnote

refers to text in a table then letters are used

instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show text

messages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner’s manual by means of the

text being slightly larger and printed in grey.

Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-

sage texts on the information display (e.g.

Audio settings).

Decals The car contains different types of decal which

are designed to convey important information

in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the

car have the following descending degree of

importance for the warning/information.

Introduction

Important information

Warning for personal injury

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,

white text/image on black message field. Used

to indicate the presence of danger which, if the

warning is ignored, may result in serious per-

sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black or blue warning field and message field.

Used to indicate the presence of danger which,

if the warning is ignored, may result in damage

to property.

Information

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

black message field.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner’s manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a

certain sequence are numbered in the owner’s

manual.

Introduction

Important information

When there is a series of illustrations for

step-by-step instructions each step is

numbered in the same way as the corres-

ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja-

cent to the series of illustrations where the

order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-

bered and are used to illustrate a move-

ment.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-

step instructions then the different steps are

numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used

in overview images where different com-

ponents are pointed out. The number

recurs in the position list featured in con-

nection with the illustration that describes

the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of

points in the owner’s manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the

right when a section continues on the following

page.

Recording data

The driving and safety systems in the car use

computers which check and share information

with each other on the car’s function. One or

more of these computers may store informa-

tion on the systems they check during normal

driving, during the course of a collision or near-

collision. Stored information may be used by:

Volvo Car Corporation

Service or repair workshops

Police or other authorities

Other parties who claim legal entitlement for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to access the information.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation of

accessories can negatively affect the car’s

electrical system. Certain accessories only

function when their associated software is

installed in the car’s computer system. We

therefore recommend that you always contact

an authorised Volvo workshop before installing

accessories which are connected to or affect

the electrical system.

Laser sensor

This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which

transmits laser light. It is absolutely essential to

follow the prescribed instructions when han-

dling the laser sensor.

The following two decals relate to the laser

sensor:

G 03

38 53

Introduction

Important information

The upper decal describes the laser light’s classification, Invisible Laser radiation Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers) Class 1M laser product.

This text is printed in the next warning box.

The lower decal describes the laser light’s physical data: IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001.

The physical data is specified in the following

table and other text is printed in the next warn-

ing box.

Radiation data for the laser sensor

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal verti-

cal)

28 12

WARNING

If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!

Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar opti- cal instruments.

Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sen- sor’s spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop — we rec- ommend an authorised Volvo work- shop.

To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here.

The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.

Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.

The laser sensor’s connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen.

The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor’s con- nector is plugged in.

The laser sensor transmits laser light when the remote control key is in posi- tion II and also with the engine switched off (see page 73 on key positions).

For more information on the laser sensor, see

page 165.

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-

mation concerning your car.

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Cars’ environmental philosophy

G 00

00 00

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-

ration’s core values which influence all opera-

tions. We also believe that our customers share

our consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international

environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-

efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-

ration has global ISO certification, which

includes the environmental standard ISO

14001 covering all factories and several of our

other units. We also set requirements for our

partners so that they work systematically with

environmental issues.

Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption

in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel

consumption generally results in lower emis-

sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-

sumption. For more information read under the

heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-

cept «Clean inside and out» a concept that

encompasses a clean interior environment as

well as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are well

below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust

and pollen from entering the passenger com-

partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-

rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-

ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-

side.

The system consists of an electronic sensor

and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-

tored continuously and if there is an increase in

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

the level of certain unhealthy gases such as

carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.

Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,

queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone

and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon

filter.

Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-

sant and comfortable, even for people with

contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Extreme attention has been given to choosing

environmentally-compatible materials. This

means that they also fulfil the requirements in

the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance

towards a healthier passenger compartment

environment.

Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-

pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the

upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning

with plant substances and fulfils the certifica-

tion requirements.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions

for a long service life and low fuel consumption

for your car. In this way you contribute to a

cleaner environment. When Volvo’s workshops

are entrusted with the service and mainte-

nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-

tem. We make clear demands regarding the

way in which our workshops are designed in

order to prevent spills and discharges into the

environment. Our workshop staff have the

knowledge and the tools required to guarantee

good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental

impact, for example, by driving economically

and by servicing and maintaining the car

according to the instructions in the owner’s

manual.

The following advice will help you to do your bit

for the environment: (for further advice on how

you can reduce environmental impact and

drive economically, see pages 264, 206).

Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 264.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.

Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from

cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.

Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.

Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down.

Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. We rec- ommend that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice if you are uncer- tain about the disposal of this type of waste.

Service your car regularly.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

These hints will help reduce fuel consumption

without increasing travel time or lessening the

enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to

your car, you’ll be saving money — and the

Earth’s resources.

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

The owner’s manual and the environment

The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in

this publication comes from FSC certified for-

ests or other controlled sources.

G 02

08 71

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seatbelts …………………………………………………………………………………… 16

Airbag system (SRS — Airbag)……………………………………………………….. 19

Activating/deactivating the airbag*………………………………………………… 22

Side airbags (SIPS bags) …………………………………………………………….. 24

Inflatable Curtain (IC) ………………………………………………………………….. 26

WHIPS ………………………………………………………………………………………. 27

Roll-Over Protection System — ROPS…………………………………………….. 29

When the systems deploy ……………………………………………………………. 30

Safety mode……………………………………………………………………………….. 31

Child safety………………………………………………………………………………… 32

01 Safety

Seatbelts01

16 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information

Heavy braking can have serious consequences

if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all

passengers use their seatbelts.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the

body so it can provide maximum protection.

Do not lean the backrest too far back. The

seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal

seating position.

Putting on a seatbelt Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by

pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud «click»

indicates that the seatbelt has locked.

The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear

seat*.

Releasing the seatbelt Press the red lock button and then let the seat-

belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully,

feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not

hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following

do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly

ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything

the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)

tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as in the pre- ceding illustration.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characteristics of the seat- belt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G 02

09 98

The seatbelt should always be worn during

pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn

in the correct way. The diagonal section should

wrap over the shoulder then be routed between

the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs

and as low as possible under the abdomen.

It must never be allowed to ride upward.

Remove all slack from the seatbelt and ensure

that it fits close to the body. In addition, check

that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the

vehicle as they drive (which means that they

must be able to easily operate the foot pedals

and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi-

tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-

ble between abdomen and steering wheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G 01

77 26

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten

their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual

reminder. The audio reminder is speed

dependent, and in some cases time depend-

ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof

console and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt

reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two

subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The mes- sage is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are being used or when a rear door is opened. The message is automatically cleared after approx. 30 sec- onds or can be acknowledged manually by pressing the direction indicator lever’s READ button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by press- ing the READ button.

The message on the information display show-

ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-

able. Press the READ button to see stored

messages.

01 Safety

Seatbelts01

Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind

the driver and front seat passenger to use a

seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At

low speed, the audio reminder will sound for

the first 6 seconds.

Seatbelt tensioner

All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten-

sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner

tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-

ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-

vides more effective restraint for the occu-

pants.

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS — Airbag) 01

Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel

o 0 1

G 02

10 10

The airbag system is continuously monitored

by the system’s control module. The warning

symbol in the combined instrument panel illu-

minates when the remote control key is in posi-

tion II or III. The symbol clears after

approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system

is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, the IC system or another fault in the SRS system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

As well as the warning symbol, a message may

appear on the information display in appropri-

ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions,

the warning triangle illuminates and SRS

Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag

Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo

recommends that you contact an authorised

Volvo workshop immediately.

Overview, airbag system

G 01

86 65

SRS system, left-hand drive.

G 01

86 66

SRS system, right-hand drive.

The SRS system consists of airbags and sen-

sors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the

sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS — Airbag)01

gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates

when compressed. When this occurs, smoke

escapes into the car. This is completely nor-

mal. The entire process, including inflation and

deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of

a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- ger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.

The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is subjected.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.

Airbag on the driver’s side

G 02

10 11

The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System) to supplement the protec-

tion afforded by the seatbelt on the driver’s

side. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the

steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked

SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS — Airbag) 01

Passenger airbag

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-

tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-

ger side. This airbag is folded up into a com-

partment above the glovebox. Its cover panel

is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated1.

Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front pas- senger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of the child.

Label Airbag

G 03

22 44

Label for airbag located on door pillar.

1 For information on how to activate/deactivate the airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag*01

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Key switch off — PACOS

General information The airbag for the front passenger seat can be

deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,

PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For

information on how to activate/deactivate, see

under the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)

is located on the passenger end of the instru-

ment panel and is accessible when the pas-

senger door is open, (see under the following

heading, «Switch PACOS»). Check that the

switch is in the required position. Volvo rec-

ommends that the remote control key’s key

blade be used to change position.

For information on the key blade, see

page 47.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of passengers in the car.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but has no switch (PACOS, Passen- ger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag is always activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag

is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof panel (see page 23) indicates that the airbag is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Activating/deactivating

G 03

20 72

Switch location.

The airbag is activated. With the switch in

this position, persons taller than 140 cm

can sit in the front passenger seat, but

never children in a child seat or on a

booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch

in this position, children in a child seat or

on a booster cushion can sit in the front

passenger seat, but never persons taller

than 140 cm.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger life.

Messages

G 01

77 24

Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas- senger airbag is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof panel

indicate that the airbag for the front passenger

seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

G 01

78 00

Indicator in the roof console showing that the pas- senger airbag is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates

that the airbag for the front passenger seat is

activated (see preceding illustration).

NOTE

When the remote control key is turned to ignition position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 19).

Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information on the remote control key’s different ignition positions, see page 73.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

Side airbag

G 03

29 49

In a side impact collision a large proportion of

the collision force is transferred by the SIPS

(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-

lars, the floor, the roof and other structural

parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-

er’s and front passenger seats protect the

chest area and the hip and are an important

part of the SIPS.

The SIPS bag system consists of two main

components, side airbag and sensors. The

side airbags are located in the front seat backr-

ests.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

The side airbag is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placed

on the front passenger seat provided that the

car does not have an activated1 passenger air-

bag.

Location

G 02

43 77

Driver’s seat, left-hand drive.

G 02

43 78

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags

and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.

The airbag inflates between the occupant and

the door panel and thereby cushions the initial

impact. The airbag deflates when compressed

by the collision. The side airbag is normally only

deployed on the side of the collision.

Label, side airbag

G 03

22 54

Label for side airbag located on door pillar.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

Properties

The inflatable curtain (IC) is a supplement to the

SIPS and SRS airbags. It is fitted in the head-

lining along both sides of the roof and protects

the car occupants sitting in the outer seats. A

sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors

and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflat-

able curtain helps to prevent the driver and

passengers from striking their heads on the

inside of the car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car’s headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the door windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the head- lining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-

sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-

cially designed head restraints in the front

seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end

collision, where the angle and speed of the col-

lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all

have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front

seat backrests are lowered backward to alter

the seating position of the driver and front seat

passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash

injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/booster

cushions The protection provided by the car to children

seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion

is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and

front seat passenger should sit in the centre of

the seat with as little space as possible

between the head and the head restraint.

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver’s seat or the passenger seat.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

01 Safety

WHIPS01

Do not leave any objects on the rear seat.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system’s protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.

01 Safety

Roll-Over Protection System — ROPS 01

Function

Volvo’s Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)

has been designed to reduce the risk of the car

overturning and to provide the best possible

protection in the event of such an accident.

The system consists of a stabiliser system,

Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the

risk of overturning, for example, during sudden

evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids.

The RSC system uses a sensor which registers

changes in the car’s lateral inclination angle.

This information is used to calculate the risk of

the car overturning. If a risk exists, the DSTC

system engages, engine torque is lowered and

one or more wheels are braked until the car has

regained its stability.

Read more about the DSTC system on page

152.

WARNING

Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car’s road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the usual precautions for safe driving.

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

When the systems deploy

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner,

front seat

In the event of a

frontal collision,

and/or side-impact

collision, and/or

rear-end collision

and/or overturning

Seatbelt tensioner,

rear seat

In the event of a

frontal collision and/

or overturning

Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact

accident

Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a

side-impact colli-

sion and/or over-

turning

Whiplash protection

WHIPS

In a rear-end colli-

sion

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col- lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is

recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car’s safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion.

WARNING

The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

01 Safety

Safety mode 01

Reduced functionality

G 02

10 62

If the car is involved in a collision, the text

Safety mode See manual may appear on the

information display. This means that the car

has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a

protective state that is enforced when the col-

lision may have damaged any of the car’s vital

functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for

one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the car First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.

There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have

checked for indications of fuel leakage, you

may attempt to start the car.

Firstly, remove the remote control key and then

reinsert it. The car’s electronics will then try to

reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to

start the car. If the message Safety mode See

manual is still shown on the display then the

car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle

recovery service used instead. Even if the car

appears to be driveable, hidden damage may

make the car impossible to control once mov-

ing.

Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode

See manual has been reset, the car can be

moved carefully out of a dangerous position.

Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor- ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

Child safety01

Children should sit comfortably and safely

The position of a child in the car and the choice

of equipment are dictated by the child’s weight

and size, for more information, see page 33.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit

correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child

to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo’s own child safety equipment is

designed for your car. Volvo recommends that

you use Volvo genuine equipment to best

ensure that the mounting points and attach-

ments are correctly positioned and are suffi-

ciently strong.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child seats

G 02

07 39

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

Volvo has child safety products that are

designed for and tested by Volvo.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat to

the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or

beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-

age the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child

seat for the correct fitting.

Location of child seats

You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the pas- senger seat, provided the passenger air-

bag is not activated1.

a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat.

Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas-

senger airbag is activated. A child sitting on the

front passenger seat could suffer serious injury

if the airbag deploys.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of the child.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle’s opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label located on instrument panel end face on the passenger side.

Recommended child seats2

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

(0 9 months)

and

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car’s seatbelt

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car’s seatbelt,

straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo infant seat — rear-facing child

seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture

system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Volvo infant seat — rear-facing child

seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture

system.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Volvo infant seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car’s seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Volvo infant seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car’s seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Volvo infant seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car’s seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 03301146

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer’s enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

01 Safety

Child safety01

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

(9-36 months)

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car’s seatbelt

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo Child seat rear-facing child

seat, secured with the car’s seatbelt,

straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing

child seat, secured with the car’s seat-

belt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing

child seat, secured with the car’s seat-

belt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,

secured with the ISOFIX fixture system

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat,

secured with the ISOFIX fixture system

and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Group 2, 15-25 kg, 3-6

Volvo turnable child seat — front-facing

child seat, secured with the car’s seat-

belt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Volvo turnable child seat — front-facing

child seat, secured with the car’s seat-

belt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Volvo turnable child seat — front-facing

child seat, secured with the car’s seat-

belt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing

child seat, secured with the car’s seat-

belt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo turnable child seat rear-facing

child seat, secured with the car’s seat-

belt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

01 Safety

Child safety 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 35

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

(3-12 yr)

Volvo Booster cushion with or with-

out backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Booster cushion with or with-

out backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo Booster cushion with or with-

out backrest.

Type approval: E5 03139

Volvo booster cushion with backrest.

Type approval: E1 04301198

Volvo booster cushion with backrest.

Type approval: E1 04301198

Volvo booster cushion with backrest.

Type approval: E1 04301198

Volvo 2-stage Integrated booster

cushion available as a factory fitted

option.

Type approval: E5 04189

Integrated two-stage booster cushions*

G 01

78 75

Correct position, the seatbelt is positioned above the shoulder.

G 01

77 19

Incorrect position, the head must not be posi- tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder.

The booster cushions are specially designed to

provide optimum safety. In combination with

the seatbelt they are approved for children who

weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are 95

to 140 cm in height.

Check before driving that:

the 2-stage integrated booster cushion is correctly set (see table below) and in locked position

the seatbelt is in contact with the child’s body and is not slack or twisted

01 Safety

Child safety01

the seatbelt does not lie across the child’s throat or below the shoulder (see preced- ing illustrations)

the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro- tection.

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg

Length 115-140 cm 95-120 cm

For instructions on adjusting the booster cush-

ion’s two levels, see pages 3537.

Raising the two-stage booster cushion

Stage 1

Pull the handle forward and up in order to

release the booster cushion.

G 01

76 97

Press the booster cushion backwards to

lock.

Stage 2

Start from the lower stage. Press the but-

ton.

G 01

77 84

Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge

and press it back against the backrest to lock.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repair or replace- ment is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi- cations or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in con- junction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protec- tion. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the booster cush- ion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low- ering the two-stage booster cushion.

Lowering the two-stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper

and lower stage to fully lowered position in the

cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust

the booster cushion from the upper stage to

the lower stage.

Pull the handle forwards to release the

cushion.

Press down with your hand in the centre of

the cushion in order to lock it.

WARNING

If the instructions regarding the two-stage booster cushion are not followed then this could cause serious injury to a child in the event of an accident.

IMPORTANT

Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering.

NOTE

The booster cushion must be lowered first when lowering the backrest.

Child safety locks, rear doors

The controls for operating the rear door power

windows and the rear door opening handles

can be blocked from opening from the inside.

For more information, see page 58.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats

G 02

10 64

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system

are concealed behind the lower section of the

rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated

by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-

ceding illustration).

Press the seat cushion down to access the

mounting points.

01 Safety

Child safety01

NOTE

The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat.

Always follow the manufacturer’s installation

instructions when connecting a child seat to

the ISOFIX mounting points.

Size classes Child seats are in different sizes cars are in

different sizes. This means that not all child

seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Consequently, a size classification has been

introduced for child seats using the ISOFIX fix-

ture system in order to assist users in choosing

the correct child seat (see the following table).

Size class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child

seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-

facing child seat

Size class

Description

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-

facing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing child

seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing

child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left-

hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-

hand

WARNING

Never place a child in the passenger seat if the car is equipped with an activated airbag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation then the car model must be included on the child seat’s vehicle list.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda- tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Types of ISOFIX child seat

Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg (0-9 months) F — —

G — —

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg (0-9 months) E OK OK

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg (0 12 months) E OK OK

D OK OK

C OK OK

Child seat, rear-facing 9 18 kg (9 36 months) D OK OK

C OK OK

Front-facing child seat 9 18 kg (9 36 months) B OKA OKA

B1 OKA OKA

A OKA OKA

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

01 Safety

Child safety01

Upper mounting points for child seats

G 01

76 76

The car is equipped with upper mounting

points for certain front-facing child seats.

These mounting points are located on the rear

of the seat.

The upper mounting points are primarily

intended for use with front-facing child seats.

Volvo recommends that small children should

sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age

as possible.

NOTE

For cars with folding head restraints on the outside seats the head restraints should be folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat.

NOTE

For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area, this must be removed before a child seat can be fitted in the mounting points.

For detailed information on how the child seat

should be tensioned in the upper mounting

points, see the seat manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

WARNING

The child seat’s straps must always be routed under the rear head restraints before being tensioned at the mounting point.

42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key/key blade………………………………………………………. 44

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*……………………………….. 49

Keyless drive*……………………………………………………………………………… 51

Locking/unlocking……………………………………………………………………….. 53

Child safety locks………………………………………………………………………… 58

Alarm*………………………………………………………………………………………… 59

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

The car is supplied with two remote control

keys or two PCCs (Personal Car

Communicator). They are used to start the car

and for locking and unlocking.

More remote control keys can be ordered up

to six can be programmed and used for the

same car.

The PCC has increased functionality com-

pared with the remote control key. The contin-

uation of this chapter describes the functions

available in both the PCC and the remote con-

trol key.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Always remember to switch off the power supply to power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Detachable key blade A remote control key includes a detachable

metal key blade for mechanical locking/

unlocking of the driver’s door and glovebox.

The key blade is also used to deactivate/acti-

vate PACOS*, see page 22.

For key blade functions, see page 47.

The key blade’s unique code is provided by

authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-

ommended when ordering new key blades.

Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then new ones

can be ordered at a workshop — an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain-

ing remote control keys must then be taken to

the workshop. The code of the missing remote

control key must be erased from the system as

a theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to the

car can be checked under Car settings Car

Key memory Number of keys. For a

description of the menu system, see

page 120.

Key memory door mirrors and driver’s

seat The settings are automatically connected to

each respective remote control key, see pages

76 and 94.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Car Key memory

Seat & mirror positions. For a description of

the menu system, see page 120.

For cars with Keyless drive function, see

page 51.

Indicator for locking/unlocking When the car is locked or unlocked using the

remote control key, the direction indicators

confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly

performed:

Locking — one flash

Unlocking — two flashes.

After locking the indication is only given if all

locks are activated once the doors have been

closed.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Light settings Lock

confirmation light and Car settings Light

settings Unlock confirmation light.

For a description of the menu system, see

page 120.

Immobiliser Each remote control key has a unique code.

The car can only be started with the correct

remote control key with the correct code.

The following error messages in the combined

instrument panel’s information display are rela-

ted to the electronic immobiliser:

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 45

Message Specification

Key error Try again Error reading remote

control key during

start. Try to start the

car again.

Car key not found Applies only to the

PCC’s Keyless drive

function. Errors

reading the PCC

during starting. Try

to start the car

again.

Immobiliser Try

start again

Remote control key

function error during

start. If the fault per-

sists the recommen-

dation is to contact

an authorised Volvo

workshop.

For starting the car, see page 100.

Functions

G 02

10 78

Remote control key.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Tailgate

Panic function

G 02

10 79

PCC* (Personal Car Communicator).

Information

Function buttons

Locking Locks the doors and tailgate

and then activates the alarm.

Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to close all

the windows and sunroof* simultaneously.

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.

Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail-

gate while the alarm is deactivated.

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The function can be changed from unlocking

all doors simultaneously, to opening the driv-

er’s door after one press of the button and,

after a further press of the button — within

10 seconds — opening the remaining doors.

The function is changed under Car settings

Lock settings Doors unlock. For a

description of the menu system, see

page 120.

Approach lighting Used to switch on the

car’s lighting at a distance. For more informa-

tion, see page 85.

Tailgate — Unlocks and disarms the alarm

for the tailgate only. On cars with power tail-

gate* the tailgate is opened after the button is

kept depressed. For more information, see

page 55.

Panic function Used to attract attention

in an emergency.

Press and hold the red button for at least 3 sec-

onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti-

vate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the same

button once it has been active for at least

5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off

automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.

Range The remote control key has a range of up to

20 m from the car.

NOTE

The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked using the key blade, see page 48.

Unique functions PCC*

G 02

10 80

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access to

certain information from the car via the indica-

tor lamps.

Using the information button

Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approxi-

mately 7 seconds and the light travels

around on the PCC. This indicates that

information from the car has been read.

If any of the other buttons are pressed

during this time then the reading is inter-

rupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop — an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Indicator lamps display information in accord-

ance with the following illustration:

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47

G 03

02 62

Green continuous light the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light the car is

unlocked.

Red light flashing alternately in the two

indicator lamps indicates, using the HBS

(Heart Beat Sensor) that someone may be

in the car. This indication is only displayed

if the alarm was triggered.

Red continuous light the alarm has been

triggered.

Range The PCC lock functions have a range of up to

20 m from the car.

The approach lighting, panic function and the

functions controlled by the information button

have a range of up to a maximum of 100 m from

the car.

NOTE

The information button functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc.

Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the

information to be read then the status the car

was last left in is shown, without the light trav-

elling around on the PCC.

If several PCCs are used for the car then it is

only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking

that shows correct status.

NOTE

If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used then this can be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by sur- rounding radio waves, buildings, topo- graphical conditions etc.

Heart Beat Sensor

The function operates using an HBS (Heart

Beat Sensor). HBS is a supplement to the car’s

alarm system and can indicate at a distance

whether anybody is in the car. This indication

is only displayed if the alarm was triggered.

The HBS detects an individual’s heartbeat that

is transmitted to the car’s bodywork. For this

reason the function of the HBS can be distur-

bed in an environment subject to noise and

vibration.

Detachable key blade

Using the remote control key’s detachable key

blade:

the driver’s door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key

access to the glovebox is blocked

PACOS* activated/deactivated, see page 22.

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Removing the key blade

G 02

10 82

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight

out backwards.

Inserting the key blade Carefully refit the key blade in place in the

remote control key, to avoid damaging it.

1. Hold the remote control key with the slot

pointed up and lower the key blade into its

slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You should

hear a «click» when the key blade is locked

in.

Unlocking doors with the key blade

If central locking cannot be activated with the

remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-

charged, then the driver’s door can be opened

as follows:

NOTE

When the driver’s door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.

1. Unlock the driver’s door using the key

blade in the door handle’s keyhole.

2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the

remote control key in the ignition switch.

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49

Replacing the battery

The batteries should be replaced if:

the information symbol is illuminated and the display shows Replace car key battery

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

Opening

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the

side.

At the same time pull the key blade

straight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the

hole behind the spring-loaded catch and

gently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers, as this could damage their functionality.

Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are

secured on the inside of the cover, with

regard to their (+) and () sides.

Remove control key (1 battery) 1. Carefully prize out the battery.

2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

PCC* (2 batteries) 1. Carefully prize out the batteries.

2. First install one new one with the (+) side up.

3. Position the white plastic tab in between and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.

Battery type Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V

— one in the remote control key and two in the

PCC.

Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot

pointed up and lower the key blade into its

slot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You should

hear a «click» when the key blade is locked

in.

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51

Keyless drive (only PCC)

Keyless lock and ignition system

The keyless drive function in the PCC allows

the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with-

out the need for a key. You simply have to have

the PCC with you. The system makes it easier

and more convenient to open the car, e.g.

when your hands are full.

The car’s two PCCs incorporate the Keyless

function. Additional PCCs can be ordered.

PCC range In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC

must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from

the car door handle or tailgate. This means that

the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door

must have the PCC with him or her. It is not

possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is

on the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the preceding illustration indi-

cate the range covered by the system’s anten-

nas.

If all PCCs are removed from the car when the

engine is running or key position II is active

(see page 73) and if all doors are closed, then

a warning message is shown in the information

display and an audio reminder signal sounds at

the same time.

The warning message clears and the audio

reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought

back to the car after:

a door has been opened and closed

the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch

the READ button has been pressed.

Handling the PCC safely If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the

car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car

is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.

However, if someone breaks into the car,

opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be

reactivated. It is therefore important to handle

all PCCs with great care.

IMPORTANT

Never leave a PCC behind in the car.

Interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-

fere with the keyless drive system. For this rea-

son, do not place the PCC near mobile phones

or metallic objects.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use

the PCC and key blade in the normal way, see

page 45.

Unlocking Open the doors with the door handles or open

the tailgate with the tailgate’s handle.

Unlocking with the key blade If the keyless drive function in the PCC is not

operating, then the driver’s door can be

unlocked with the key blade. In this case cen-

tral locking is not activated.

NOTE

Unlocking with the key blade triggers the alarm. For deactivation, see page 60.

Key memory driver’s seat and door

mirrors

PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the

car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are

implemented for the person who opens the

driver’s door.

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

After the driver’s door has been opened by

person A with PCC A, but person B with PCC

B shall drive, the settings can be changed in

three ways:

Standing by the driver’s door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B presses their PCC’s unlock button, see page 45.

Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see page 76.

Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see page 75 and 94.

Locking Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the

lock button on one of the door handles on the

outside.

All doors and the tailgate must be closed

before the car can be locked. Otherwise the car

will not be locked.

NOTE

On cars with automatic transmission, the gear selector must be set in the P position otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed.

Lock settings The keyless function can be adapted to specify

which of the car doors are to be unlocked,

under Car settings Lock settings

Keyless entry. For a description of the menu

system, see page 120.

Antenna location

G 02

11 79

The keyless system has a number of integrated

antennae located around the car:

Tailgate, by wiper motor

Door handle, left rear

Roof, above centre rear seat

Cargo area, central and furthest in under

the floor

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system’s antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53

From the outside

The remote control key can lock/unlock all

doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different

sequences can be selected for locking/unlock-

ing; see page 120.

The lock buttons and door handles are disen-

gaged during locking which also prevents

opening from the inside, so-called deadlocks

function*, see page 56.

If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the

remote control key, the battery may be dis-

charged — lock or unlock the door with the

detachable key blade; see page 48.

WARNING

Be aware that there is a risk that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the out- side.

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened

within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked

again automatically. This function reduces the

risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.

(For cars with alarm, see page 59.)

From the inside

All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked

or unlocked simultaneously using the central

locking button on either front door. Press one

side of the button to lock — the other side

to unlock.

Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two

different ways:

Press the central locking button .

Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also

open all the side windows* simultaneously.

Pull the door handle once and release — the door is unlocked. Pull the door handle again to open the door.

Locking

Press the central locking button after the

front doors have been closed. Press and hold

(at least 4 seconds) to also close all the side

windows and the sunroof* simultaneously.

All the doors can be locked manually with their

respective lock buttons after the door has been

closed.

Global opening

Press and hold the central locking button

(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win-

dows simultaneously — for example, to quickly

ventilate the passenger compartment during

hot weather.

Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati-

cally when the car starts to move.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Lock settings

Doors automatic lock. (For a description of

the menu system, see page 120.)

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Glovebox

The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked

using the remote control key’s detachable key

blade. (For information on the key blade, see

page 48).

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

The keyhole is horizontal in the locked

position.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

Tailgate

Unlocking with the remote control key The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*,

and the tailgate unlocked and opened on its

own* by using the remote control key.

NOTE

On cars with the power operated tailgate option, the tailgate is opened otherwise it is only unlocked.

If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm

indicator on the instrument panel stops to

show that alarm for the whole of the car is not

armed. The alarm’s level and movement sen-

sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate

are automatically disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

NOTE

When the tailgate is closed it remains unlocked until the car is relocked with the remote control key’s lock button.

Unlocking the car from inside

To unlock and open* the tailgate.

Press the lighting panel button (1).

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button for lock-

ing, see page 45.

If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm

indicator on the instrument panel starts to

flash, which means that the alarm is armed.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55

Power operated tailgate*

G 03

19 65

IMPORTANT

Pay attention to the height of the roof when using power operation. Do not use power tailgate operation with low roof heights, see under the heading «Interrupt opening/clos- ing the tailgate».

NOTE

If the system has been operating con- tinuously for more than 60 seconds then it is switched off to avoid overloading. It can be used again after about 10 minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then the cover must be opened and closed manually once in order to reset the system.

Snow and wind If the tailgate is forced down by something just

when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or

strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to

lower, then it is closed automatically.

Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents

the tailgate from opening/closing then the

pinch protection is activated.

During opening — power tailgate operation is deactivated and the tailgate is disen- gaged.

During closing — the tailgate returns to the fully open position.

WARNING

Pay attention to the risk of crushing when opening/closing. Before starting to open/ close; make sure that there is nobody close to the tailgate as a crushing injury could have serious consequences.

Always operate the tailgate with caution.

Manual tailgate operation The system is disengaged if the rubberised

pressure plate beneath the outside handle is

actuated a second time. The tailgate can then

be operated manually.

Opening the tailgate The tailgate can be opened three

ways (two of which involve this but-

ton):

Long press on the tailgate button in the lighting panel — hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

Long press on the remote control button for the tailgate — hold the button depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

Lightly press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle and raise the tailgate.

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Closing the tailgate Close using this button on the tailgate

or manually.

Press the tailgate’s button the tailgate closes automatically.

Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate This can be done four ways (of which

three involve this button):

Press the tailgate button in the lighting panel

Press the tailgate button on the remote control

Press the tailgate button on the tailgate

Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle.

Tailgate movement is stopped following the

same pattern as when pinch protection is trig-

gered. Refer to this chapter’s section with the

heading «Pinch protection».

Deadlocks*

When deadlocked, the doors cannot be

opened from the inside if they are locked.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote

control key and are set after a 10 second delay

after the doors are locked.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock

state with the remote control key. The driver’s

door can also be unlocked with the detachable

key blade.

Temporary deactivation

G 03

13 84

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Navigation

ENTER

MENU

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but the

doors must be locked from the outside, then

the deadlocks function can be temporarily

switched off. This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings (for a detailed description of the

menu system, see page 120).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once.

> The instrument panel display shows the

message Reduced guard See

manual and the deadlocks function is

switched off when the car is locked.

Select Ask on exit.

> Each time the engine is switched off the

audio system’s display shows the mes-

sage ENTER reduces protection until

the engine is started again. Press

EXIT to cancel — then select one of the

alternatives.

If the deadlocks function shall be switched

off

Press ENTER and lock the car. (If the car

is equipped with an alarm with movement

and tilt detectors* then these are switched

off at the same time, see page 60.)

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

> The next time the engine is started, the

system is reset to zero and the instru-

ment panel display shows the message

Full guard at which the deadlocks func-

tion and the alarm’s movement and tilt

detectors are re-engaged.

If the locking system shall not be changed

Select no options at all and lock the car.

Press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an alarm:

Remember that the car’s alarm is armed when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

02 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Manual blocking of the rear doors

G 02

10 77

The child safety locks are located on the trailing

edge of the rear doors and are only accessible

when the doors are open.

Use the key blade to turn the lock and thus

activate or deactivate the child safety lock.

The door cannot be opened from inside.

The doors can be opened from inside.

NOTE

Cars with electric child safety locks do not have manual child locks.

Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows*

G 01

93 00

When the electric child safety lock is active:

the rear windows can only be opened with the driver’s door control panel

the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside.

1. Child safety locks are activated/deacti-

vated in ignition position I or II see

page 73.

2. Press the button in the driver’s door control

panel.

> The information display shows a mes-

sage.

The lamp on the switch illuminates when

the locks are activated.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59

General

The alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened

a non-approved remote control key is used or if an attempt is made to force the ignition switch

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)

the battery’s cable is disconnected

anyone tries to disconnect the siren.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor-

mation display shows a message. In which

case, contact a workshop — an authorised

Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

The movement detectors trigger the alarm in the event of movements in the passenger compartment. For this reason the alarm could be triggered if the car is left with a window open or if an electric passenger compartment heater is used.

To avoid this: Close the windows when leav- ing the car and aim the air from the passen- ger compartment heater so that it is not directed up into the passenger compart- ment.

NOTE

One of the detectors for the alarm is located under the cup holder in the centre console. This detector is sensitive for metals.

Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects in the centre console’s cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.

Alarm indicator

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates

the alarm system’s status:

LED not lit Alarm not armed

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig- gered.

Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button.

Disarming the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-

ton.

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button

or insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch.

Other alarm functions

Automatic re-arming of the alarm This function prevents the car being left with

alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control

key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the

doors or the tailgate is opened within

2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-

armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Alarm signals When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-

pens:

A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds. The siren has its own battery which works independently of the car battery.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm has been deactivated.

Remote control key not working If the remote control key is not working, the

alarm can still be switched off and the car

started as follows:

1. Open the driver’s door with the key blade.

> The alarm is triggered and the siren

sounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

> The alarm is deactivated. The alarm

indicator flashes quickly until the remote

control key is inserted.

Reduced alarm level

G 03

13 84

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Navigation

ENTER

MENU

EXIT

To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm —

for example when leaving a dog in the car or

during a ferry crossing — the movement and tilt

detectors can be temporarily switched off. This

is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings (for a detailed description of the

menu system, see page 120).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once:

> The instrument panel display shows the

message Reduced guard See

manual and the movement and tilt

detectors are switched off when the car

is locked.

Select Ask on exit.

> Each time the engine is switched off the

audio system’s display shows the mes-

sage ENTER to reduce guard until

the car has been started. Press EXIT

to cancel. — then select one of the alter-

natives.

If the movement and tilt detectors shall be

switched off:

Press ENTER and lock the car. (If the car

is equipped with the deadlocks function*

then it is switched off at the same time, see

page 56.)

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

> The next time the engine is started, the

system is reset to zero and the instru-

ment panel display shows the message

Full guard at which the movement and

tilt detectors and the deadlocks function

are re-engaged.

If the detectors shall not be switched off:

Select no options at all and lock the car.

Press EXIT and lock the car.

G 02

09 12

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Instruments and controls……………………………………………………………… 64

Key positions……………………………………………………………………………… 73

Seats…………………………………………………………………………………………. 75

Steering wheel……………………………………………………………………………. 79

Lighting……………………………………………………………………………………… 80

Wipers and washing…………………………………………………………………….. 89

Windows, rearview and door mirrors……………………………………………… 92

Compass*…………………………………………………………………………………… 97

Power panorama roof* ………………………………………………………………… 98

Starting the engine…………………………………………………………………….. 100

Starting the engine external battery…………………………………………… 102

Gearboxes………………………………………………………………………………… 103

All-wheel drive AWD*………………………………………………………………. 107

Foot brake………………………………………………………………………………… 108

Hill Descent Control (HDC)…………………………………………………………. 110

Parking brake……………………………………………………………………………. 112

HomeLink *……………………………………………………………………………… 115

03 YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

Left-hand drive.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65

Function Page

Menus and messages,

direction indicators,

main/dipped beam, trip

computer

80,

83, 123,

150

Cruise control 155, 156

Horn, airbags 20, 79

Combined instrument

panel

67, 71

Menu, audio and phone

control

120,

137, 194

Start/stop button 100

Ignition switch 73

Information display for

menu navigation

120

Door handle —

Control panel 53, 58,

92, 94

Hazard warning flashers 83

Menu control and audio

system

120, 138

Function Page

Climate control, ECC 128

Gear selector 103

Controls for active chas-

sis (Four-C)*

154

Wipers and washing 89, 90

Steering wheel adjust-

ment

Bonnet opener 228

Parking brake* 112

Seat adjustment* 75

Headlamp control,

opener for fuel filler flap

and tailgate

54, 80,

208

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Right-hand drive.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Function Page

Information display for

menu navigation

120

Ignition switch 73

Start/stop button 100

Cruise control 155, 156

Combined instrument

panel

67, 71

Horn, airbags 20, 79

Menu, audio and phone

control

120,

137, 194

Wipers and washing 89, 90

Headlamp control,

opener for fuel filler flap

and tailgate

54, 80,

208

Door handle —

Control panel 53, 58,

92, 94

Seat adjustment* 75

Parking brake 112

Function Page

Bonnet opener 228

Steering wheel adjust-

ment

Menus and messages,

direction indicators,

main/dipped beam, trip

computer

80,

83, 123,

150

Controls for active chas-

sis (Four-C)*

154

Gear selector 103

Climate control, ECC 128

Menu control and audio

system

120, 138

Hazard warning flashers 83

Information displays

Information displays.

The information displays show information on

some of the car’s functions, e.g. cruise control,

trip computer and messages. The information

is shown with text and symbols.

There are further descriptions under the func-

tions that use the information displays.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Meters

Meters in the combined instrument panel.

Speedometer

Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page

150, and Refuelling, page 208.

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine

speed in thousands of revolutions per

minute (rpm).

Indicator, information and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols.

Main beam and direction indicator symbol

Indicator and information symbols

Indicator and warning symbols1

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in

key position II or when the engine is started.

When the engine has started, all the symbols

should go out except the parking brake sym-

bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis-

engaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionality

check is carried out in key position II then all

symbols go out after 5 seconds except the

symbol for faults in the car’s emissions system

and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Indicator and information symbols

Symbol Specification

ABL fault

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

Main beam On

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 229.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69

Symbol Specification

Left-hand direction indicators

Right-hand direction indicators

ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in

the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to

a fault in the car’s emissions system. Drive to

a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends

that you seek assistance from an authorised

Volvo workshop.

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not

working. The car’s regular brake system con-

tinues to work, but without the ABS function.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to

a workshop to have the ABS system

checked. Volvo recommends that you

seek assistance from an authorised Volvo

workshop.

Rear fog lamp This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp

is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located

on the driver’s side.

Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability

system is operating. If the symbol illuminates

with constant glow then there is a fault in the

system.

Engine preheater (diesel)* This symbol illuminates during engine preheat-

ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature

is below 2 C. The car can be started once the

symbol goes out.

Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the

fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

Information, read display text When one of the car’s systems does not

behave as intended, this information symbol

illuminates and a text appears on the informa-

tion display. The message text is cleared with

the READ button, see page 123, or it disap-

pears automatically after a time (time depend-

ing on which function is indicated). The infor-

mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunc-

tion with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or clear automatically after a while.

Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on

and with main beam flash

Left/right-hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when

the hazard warning flashers are used.

Indicator and warning symbols

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressureA

Parking brake applied

Airbags SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Specification

Fault in brake system

Warning

A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages 229 and 230.

Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then

the engine’s oil pressure is too low. Stop the

engine immediately and check the engine oil

level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-

nates and the oil level is normal, contact a

workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek

assistance from an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow

when the parking brake is applied. With the

electric parking brake, this symbol flashes

while it is being applied and then illuminates

with a constant glow.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen.

Read the message on the information display.

NOTE

This symbol also illuminates when the mechanical parking brake is only lightly applied.

Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates

while driving, it means a fault has been

detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or

IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop

to have the system checked. Volvo recom-

mends that you seek assistance from an

authorised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone in a front

seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone

in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault

has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a

workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek

assistance from an authorised Volvo work-

shop.

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level

may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place

and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir,

see page 232.

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the

same time, there may be a fault in the brake

force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.

If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 232. If the brake fluid level is nor- mal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71

WARNING

If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- nated at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a

fault has been indicated which could affect the

safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan-

atory text is shown on the information display

at the same time. The symbol remains visible

until the fault has been rectified but the text

message can be cleared with the READ but-

ton, see page 123. The warning symbol can

also illuminate in conjunction with other sym-

bols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car

further.

2. Read the information on the information

display. Implement the action in accord-

ance with the message in the display. Clear

the message using the READ button.

Reminder doors not closed

If one of the doors, the bonnet2 or tailgate is not

closed properly then the information or warn-

ing symbol illuminates together with an explan-

atory text message in the combined instrument

panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as

possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid,

whichever is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than

approx. 7 km/h then the information

symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher

than approx. 7 km/h then the warning

symbol illuminates.

Trip meter

Trip meter and controls.

Display for trip meter

Controls for switching between trip meters

T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip

meters.

The meters are used to measure short dis-

tances.

One short press on the control switches

between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long

press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active

trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the

display.

2 Only cars with alarm*.

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Clock

Clock and setting knob.

Controls for setting the clock.

Information display for showing the time.

Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set

the time. The set time is shown in the informa-

tion display.

The clock can be temporarily replaced by a

symbol in conjunction with a message, see

page 123.

03 Your driving environment

Key positions

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

Insert and remove the remote control key

Ignition switch with inserted remote control key.

NOTE

For cars with keyless function*, see page 51.

Insert the key The remote control key, with its symbols cor-

rectly turned, is fitted in the ignition switch.

After a gentle press on the key it is drawn into

the lock.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch may jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press the remote control key incor- rectly turned — Hold the end with the detach- able key blade, see page 48.

Withdraw the key The remote control key is ejected after a gentle

press on it. (Automatic gearbox* must be in

position P.)

Functions

The remote control key’s 3 different key posi-

tions can be reached without the need to start

the engine. The table shows the functions

available in each key position.

NOTE

To reach key position I or II without starting the engine — do not depress the brake/ clutch pedal when the following operations are carried out.

Key position 0 Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch and gently press it — The key is drawn

into the lock.

Key position I With the remote control key inserted into the

ignition switch — Briefly press on START/STOP

ENGINE.

Key position II With the remote control key inserted into the

ignition switch — Press on START/STOP

ENGINE for about 2 seconds.

Back to key position 0 To return to key position 0 from position I or II

— Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.

03 Your driving environment

Key positions

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Posi- tion

Function

0 Odometer, clock and tempera-

ture gauge are illuminated. The

steering lock is deactivated. The

audio system can be used.

I Panorama roof*, power windows,

12 V socket in the passenger

compartment, RTI*, phone*, ven-

tilation fan, ECC and windscreen

wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on. Warn-

ing/indicator lamps illuminate for

5 seconds. All equipment oper-

ates apart from heated seats and

rear window defroster, which only

work when the engine is running.

For information on the audio system’s func-

tions with remote control key removed, see

page 137.

Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting/switching off the

engine, see page 100.

Towing For important information about the remote

control key during towing, see page 224.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

Front seats

Lumbar support adjustment, turn the

wheel1.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust

the distance to the steering wheel and ped-

als. Check that the seat is locked after

changing position.

Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,

pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver’s seat before setting off, never while driving. Check that the seat is locked in position.

Lowering the front seat backrest*

The passenger seat backrest can be folded

forward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possi-

ble.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest

and fold it forward.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING

Check that the front seat backrest is prop- erly engaged after it is raised.

Power seat*

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/backward and up/down

Backrest rake

The power front seats have overload protection

which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an

object. If this happens, go to key position I or

0 and wait a short time before adjusting the

seat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)

can be made at a time.

1 Also applies to power seat.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time

after unlocking the door with the remote con-

trol key without the key in the ignition switch.

Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi-

tion I and can always be made when the engine

is running.

Seat with memory function*

Store setting Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Hold the button depressed to store set-

tings while depressing one of the memory

buttons.

Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed

until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you

release the button then the movement of the

seat will stop.

Key memory* in remote control key2

The positions of the driver’s seat and the door

mirrors are stored in the key memory when the

car is locked with the remote control key.

When the car is unlocked with the same remote

control key and the driver’s door is opened the

driver’s seat and also the door mirrors auto-

matically adopt the positions stored in the key

memory.

NOTE

The seat and the door mirrors do not move if they are already set the relevant position.

It is also possible to use the key memory by

pressing the unlock button on the remote con-

trol key when the driver’s door is open.

The key memory can be activated/deactivated

under Car Key memory Seat & mirror

positions. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 120.

NOTE

The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat’s three memories are completely independent of each other.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

one of the buttons to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in

the key memory is performed by pressing the

unlock button on the remote control key. The

driver’s door must then be open.

2 For key memory for keyless drive, see page 51.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the backseat passengers will be trapped.

Heated seats For heated seats, see page 129.

Rear seats

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

Adjust the head restraint according to passen-

ger height so that the whole of the back of the

head is covered if possible. Slide it up as

required.

To lower the head restraint again, the button

(located in the centre between the backrest

and head restraint, see illustration) must be

pressed in while the head restraint is pressed

down.

Manual lowering of the outer head

restraints, rear seat

Pull the locking handle closest to the head

restraint to fold the head restraint forward.

The head restraint is moved back manually

until a «click» can be heard.

Lowering the rear seat backrest The triple-section rear seat backrest can be

folded in different ways in order to facilitate

loading long objects.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully.

The left-hand backrest can be folded sep- arately.

The centre backrest can be folded sepa- rately.

The right-hand backrest can be folded together with the centre backrest.

All backrests can be folded together.

03 Your driving environment

Seats

If the centre backrest is being lowered —

fold and adjust the centre backrest’s head

restraint downwards, see page 77.

The outer head restraints are lowered auto-

matically when the outer backrests are

lowered. Pull up the backrest’s locking

handle while folding the backrest for-

ward at the same time. A red indicator on

the lock catch shows that the backrest

is no longer locked in place.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising.

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Adjusting

G 02

11 38

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever — releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both

height and depth:

1. Pull the lever towards you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering

wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the

steering wheel lightly at the same time as

you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving.

With speed related power steering* the level of

steering force can be adjusted, see

page 154.

Keypads*

Keypads in the steering wheel.

Cruise control, see page 155

Adaptive cruise control, see page 156

Audio and phone control, see page 137

Horn

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Light switches

G 03

14 07

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and

instrument lighting

Rear fog lamp

Front fog lamps*

Light switches

Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling

Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is

switched on depending on key position, see

page 73.

The display lighting is automatically subdued

in darkness — the sensitivity is set with the

thumbwheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is

adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align-

ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-

zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting

the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the

car is heavily laden.

1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote

control key in position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/

lower beam alignment.

Cars with Dual Xenon headlamps* have auto-

matic headlamp levelling and therefore do not

have the thumbwheel.

Main/dipped beam

Headlamp control and stalk switch.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Posi- tion

Specification

Automatic*/deactivated dipped

beam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Main

beam and main beam flash

work in this position.

1 Not available for cars equipped with Dual Xenon headlamps*.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

NOTE

Main beam can only be activated in position

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer-

ing wheel to the position for main beam flash.

Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is

released.

Dipped beam When the engine is started, dipped beam is

activated automatically* if the headlamp con-

trol is in position 2. If necessary, auto-

matic dipped beam for this position can be

deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop.

In position dipped beam is always acti-

vated automatically when the engine is running

or when the remote control key is in position

II.

Main beam Main beam can only be activated when the

headlamp control is in position . Acti-

vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk

switch towards the steering wheel to the end

position and release.

When main beam has been activated the sym-

bol illuminates in the combined instru-

ment panel.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active headlamps

Active Bending Lights the light from the head-

lamps follows the steering wheel movement in

order to provide maximum lighting in bends

and junctions and so provide increased safety.

The function is activated automatically when

the car is started. In the event of a fault in the

function the symbol illuminates in the

combined instrument panel at the same time

as the information display shows an explana-

tory text and a further illuminated symbol.

Symbol Display Specifica- tion

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The system

is disen-

gaged. Visit

a workshop

if the mes-

sage

remains.

Volvo rec-

ommends

that you

contact an

authorised

Volvo work-

shop.

The function is only active in twilight or dark-

ness and only when the car is moving.

2 For certain markets dipped beam is deactivated in this position.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The function3 can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Light settings

Active bending lights. For a description of the

menu system, see page 120.

For headlamp pattern adjustment, see

page 86.

Position/parking lamps

G 03

14 08

Headlamp control in position for position/parking lamps.

Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi-

tion (number plate lighting comes on at the

same time).

Rear position lamps also come on when the

tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody

behind.

Brake lights

The brake light automatically comes on during

braking.

Emergency brake lights and automatic

hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights (Adaptive Brake

Lights) are activated in the event of heavy brak-

ing or if the ABS brakes are activated. This

function means that the brake light flashes to

immediately alert cars travelling behind.

The system is activated if ABS is used for more

than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy brak-

ing, however, only when braking from speeds

above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is

lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor-

mally again and the hazard warning flashers

are switched on automatically. The hazard

warning flashers remain on until the car accel-

erates again but can be deactivated with the

button for hazard warning flashers.

Front fog lamps*

G 03

14 09

Button for front fog lamps.

The front fog lamps can be switched on along

with main/dipped beam or

position/parking lamps.

Press the button for on/off. The light in the but-

ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on.

NOTE

Regulations for using front fog lamps vary between different countries.

3 Activated on delivery from the factory.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Rear fog lamp

G 03

14 10

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and

can only be switched on in combination with

main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps.

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp

indicator symbol on the combined

instrument panel and the light in the button illu-

minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamps are switched off automati-

cally when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries.

Hazard warning flashers

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning

flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in

the combined instrument panel flash when the

hazard warning flashers are in use.

The hazard warning flashers are activated

automatically when the car brakes so suddenly

that the emergency brake lights are activated

and speed is below 30 km/h. They remain on

when the car has stopped and are deactivated

automatically when the car is driven off again

or the button is depressed.

Direction indicators/flashers

Direction indicators/flashers.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the

first position and release. The direction

indicators flash three times. The function

can be activated/deactivated under Car

settings Light settings Turn

indicators, 3-flash.

For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 120.

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the

outer position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is

moved back manually, or automatically by the

steering wheel movement.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see page 68.

Interior lighting

G 02

11 49

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Interior lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment can

be switched on and off manually within

30 minutes from when:

the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off

by pressing the relevant button in the roof con-

sole.

Rear roof lighting

G 02

11 50

Rear roof lighting in cars without panorama roof.

Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof.

The lamps are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-

ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-

tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off

respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror The lighting for the vanity mirror, see

page 193, is switched on and off respectively

when the cover is opened or closed.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85

Lighting, cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on

and off respectively when the tailgate is

opened or closed.

Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light-

ing has three positions for the lighting in the

passenger compartment:

Off right-hand side depressed, automatic lighting deactivated.

Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated.

On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.

Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the pas-

senger compartment lighting is switched on

and off automatically in accordance with the

following.

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see pages 45 or 48

the engine is switched off and the remote control key is in position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched

off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting comes

on and remains on for two minutes if one of the

doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the

car is locked then it will be switched off auto-

matically after two minutes.

Home safe light duration

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept

switched on to work as home safe lighting after

the car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from the

ignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the

steering wheel to the end position and

release it. The function can be activated in

the same way as with main beam flash, see

page 80.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam,

parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number

plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy

lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the home safe

lighting should be kept on can be set under Car

settings Light settings Home safe light

duration. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 120.

Approach light duration*

Approach lighting is switched on with the

remote control key, see page 45, and is used

to switch on the car’s lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remote

control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps,

number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and

courtesy lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the approach light-

ing should be kept on can be set under Car

settings Light settings Approach light

duration. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 120.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adjusting headlamp pattern

G 02

11 51

Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.

G 02

11 52

Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to

avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be

set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat-

tern will also better illuminate the verge.

Active Dual Xenon headlamps* The car must be stationary with the engine run-

ning when the headlamp pattern is shifted

between right and left-hand traffic.

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings Light settings.

2. Select between Temporary RH lights and

Temporary LH lights.

For a description of the menu system, see

page 120.

Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps

is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.

The headlamp pattern may not be as good.

Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand

drive cars or the C and D templates for

right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1,

see page 88:

A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)

B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)

C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)

D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive

waterproof material and cut it out.

3. Position the self-adhesive templates at the

right distance from the edge of the head-

lamp lens using the illustration, see

page 87, and the dimensions in the fol-

lowing list:

Templates A and D: horizontal line approx. 104 mm, vertical line approx. 20 mm

Templates B and C: horizontal line approx. 167 mm, vertical line approx. 14 mm

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Aligning the templates

Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Templates for halogen headlamps

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

Windscreen wipers1

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, on/off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to

switch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to

make one sweep.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time

unit with the thumbwheel when inter-

mittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter — ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen (and rear window) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-

screen wipers based on how much water it

detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of

the rain sensor can be adjusted using the

thumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a light in the

button the rain sensor symbol is shown

in the right-hand display in the combined

instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must

be running or the remote control key in position

I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch

must be in position 0 or in the position for a

single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button

. The windscreen wipers make one

sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make

an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi-

tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An

extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is

turned upward.)

Deactivating Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

ton or move the stalk switch down to

another wiper program.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the key is removed from the ignition

switch or five minutes after the ignition has

been switched off.

1 Replacing the wiper blades (see page241) and filling the washer fluid (see page242).

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering

wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp

washers.

The windscreen wipers will make several more

sweeps once the stalk switch has been

released. The headlamps are washed alter-

nately to prevent light intensity being reduced.

NOTE

One headlamp is washed at a time.

Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically

in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid

freezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the

headlamps are washed automatically at every

fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Wiper and washer, rear window

Rear window wiper intermittent wiping

Rear window wiper continuous speed

Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow

in the illustration above) to initiate rear window

washing and wiping.

Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen

wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window

wiping2. The function stops when reverse gear

is disengaged.

If the rear window wiper is already on at con-

tinuous speed, no change is made.

2 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

NOTE

On cars with rain sensor, the rear window wiper is activated with reversing, if the sen- sor is activated and it is raining.

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

Laminated glass The windscreen and panorama roof

have laminated glass. It is reinforced

which provides better protection

against break-ins and improved

sound insulation in the passenger compart-

ment. Other glass surfaces*.

Water and dirt-repellent coating* Windows are treated with a coating

that improves the view in difficult

weather conditions. Maintenance, see

page 266.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors.

Heat-reflecting windscreen*

Areas where IR film is not applied.

The windscreen is equipped with a heat-

reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat

radiation into the passenger compartment.

The positioning of electronic equipment, such

as a transponder, behind a glass surface with

heat-reflecting film may affect its function and

performance.

For the optimal function of electronic equip-

ment, it should be positioned on the part of the

windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the

highlighted area in the previous illustration).

Power windows

Driver’s door control panel.

Switch for electric child safety locks* and

disengaging rear power window buttons,

see page 58.

Rear window controls

Front window controls

WARNING

Check that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows from the driver’s door.

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

WARNING

Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows, in par- ticular when the remote control key is used.

WARNING

If there are children in the car, remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Operating

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver’s door. Each control

panel in the other doors can only control its

own respective power window. The power win-

dows can only be controlled with one control

panel at a time.

In order that the power windows can be used

the remote control key must be in position I or

II. After the car has been running the power

windows can be operated for several minutes

even when the remote control key has been

removed, but not however after the door has

been opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and the

window is opened if anything prevents its

movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro-

tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g.

with ice, by continuously holding the button up

until the window is closed. The pinch protec-

tion is reactivated after a brief pause.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The

power windows move up/down as long as the

control is held in position.

Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end

position and release it. The window runs auto-

matically to its end position.

Remote control and central locking

buttons All side windows can be opened/closed auto-

matically with the remote control key or the

central locking buttons:

Press and hold the lock button until the

windows start to open/close. To interrupt

opening/closing, press the lock button

again.

Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function

for automatic opening must be reset so that it

can work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button

to raise the window to its end position and

hold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

WARNING

Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works.

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Door mirrors

G 01

85 18

Door mirror controls.

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-hand

door mirror. The light in the button illumi-

nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be illuminated.

WARNING

The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- ther away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving

in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release them after

approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto-

matically stop in the fully retracted posi-

tion.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L

and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors

automatically stop in the fully extended posi-

tion.

Storing the position* The mirror positions are stored in the key mem-

ory when the car has been locked with the

remote control key. When the car is unlocked

with the same remote control key the mirrors

and the driver’s seat adopt the stored positions

when the driver’s door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car Key memory Seat & mirror

positions. For a description of the menu sys-

tem, see page 120.

Angling the door mirror when parking1

The door mirror can be angled down for the

driver to view the side of the road when parking

for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R

button.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror

automatically returns to its original position

after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing

the button labelled L or R respectively

Automatic retraction when locking When the car is locked/unlocked with the

remote control key the door mirrors are auto-

matically retracted/extended.

1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 75.

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Side mirror settings

Fold mirr. when locking. For a description

of the menu system, see page 120.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position

by an external force must be reset electrically

to the neutral position for electric retracting/

extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-

tons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-

tons.

3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors illuminates when

approach lighting or home safe lighting is

selected, see page 85.

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Use the defroster to quickly remove misting

and ice from the rear window and the door mir-

rors.

Press the button once to start simultaneous

rear window and door mirror defrosting. The

light in the button indicates that the function is

active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically

and its duration is controlled by the outside

temperature.

The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto-

matically if the car is started in an outside tem-

perature lower than +9 C.

Automatic defrosting can be selected under

Climate settings Auto. rear defroster.

Select between On or Off. For a description of

the menu system, see page 120.

Interior rearview mirror

Control for dimming

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in

the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

dimming with the dimming control when lights

from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in

towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving the

control towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically

dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is

not available in mirrors with automatic dim-

ming.

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The compass* can only be specified for rear-

view mirrors with automatic dimming, see

page 97.

03 Your driving environment

Compass*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview

mirror has an integrated display that shows the

compass direction in which the front of the car

is pointing. Eight different directions are shown

with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north

east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW

(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically when

the car is started or in ignition position IIsee

page 73. To deactivate/activate the compass —

press in the button on the underside of the mir-

ror using a paper clip for example.

Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The compass is set for the geographic area to

which the car was delivered. The compass

should be calibrated if the car is moved across

several magnetic zones.

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from

steel structures and high-voltage power

lines.

2. Start the car.

NOTE

For optimum calibration — switch off all elec- trical equipment (climate control system, wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are closed.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the

rearview mirror depressed

approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for

example) until the character C is shown.

G 03

02 95

Magnetic zones.

4. Hold the button on the underside of the

rearview mirror depressed

approx. 3 seconds. The number of the cur-

rent magnetic zone is shown.

5. Press the button repeatedly until the

required magnetic zone (115) is shown.

See the map of magnetic zones for the

compass.

6. Wait until the display resumes showing the

character C.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-

tion is shown in the display, indicating that

calibration is complete. Then drive a further

2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

03 Your driving environment

Power panorama roof*

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

The panorama roof is divided into two sections.

Only the front section can be opened — hori-

zontally or vertically at the rear edge (ventilation

position).

The panorama roof has a sun blind made of

perforated fabric and located under the glass

roof to provide extra protection from factors

such as strong sunlight.

The panorama roof and curtain are operated

with a control located in the roof. The control

is activated when the key is in position I or II,

see page 73.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects can be trapped by the panorama roof’s moving parts.

Always operate the panorama roof with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

If leaving the car, always take the remote control key/PCC with you*, and so prevent the panorama roof from being operated.

Operating

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

The panorama roof and curtain can be oper-

ated in key position I or II.

Automatic operation 1. To open the curtain all the way — press the

control rearward to the automatic opening

position and release.

2. To then open the panorama roof all the way

— press the control rearward again to the

automatic opening position and release.

Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced-

ing procedure in reverse order — press the con-

trol forward to the automatic closing position

instead.

Rapid opening/closing The panorama roof and curtain can be opened/

closed simultaneously:

To open — press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

To close — press the control forward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

03 Your driving environment

Power panorama roof*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

Manual operation 1. To open the curtain — press the control

rearward to the point of resistance for man-

ual opening. The curtain moves towards

maximum opening as long as the button is

depressed.

2. To angle the panorama roof — press the

control rearward again to the point of resis-

tance for manual opening

3. To open the panorama roof — press the

control rearward to the point of resistance

for manual opening a third time. The pan-

orama roof moves towards maximum

opening as long as the button is kept

depressed.

Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced-

ing procedure in reverse order — press the con-

trol forward to the manual closing position

instead.

NOTE

For manual opening, the curtain must be fully open before the panorama roof can be opened. For the reverse procedure, the panorama roof must be fully closed before the curtain can be closed.

Ventilation position

Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-

trol upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-

trol down.

When the ventilation position is selected the

front section is raised at its rear edge. If the

curtain is fully closed when ventilation position

is selected — then it opens automatically

approx. 50 mm.

Closing using the remote control key or

central locking button

One long press on the lock button, see pages

45 (remote control key) and 53 (central locking

button), closes the panorama roof and all the

windows. The door mirrors are retracted* and

the doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt

closing, press the lock button again.

WARNING

If closing the panorama roof with the remote control key, make sure nothing could become trapped.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

100

Petrol and diesel engines

Ignition switch with inserted remote control key and START/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned — Hold the end with the detach- able key blade, see page 48.

1. Fit the remote control key in the ignition

switch — Gently press the key until it is

drawn into the lock.

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For

cars with automatic gearbox — Depress the

brake pedal.)

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button

and then release it.

The starter motor works until the engine has

started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die-

sel up to 60 seconds).

If the engine has not started after 10 seconds

— try again by holding in the START/STOP

ENGINE button until the engine starts.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car — especially if there are children in the car.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could be activated which would mean that the car cannot be steered.

Never remove the remote control key with the Keyless drive* function from the car while driving or during towing.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is so that the emissions system can reach normal operating tem- perature as quickly as possible, which min- imises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Keyless drive Follow steps 2-3 to start a petrol engine. For

more information on Keyless drive, see

page 51.

NOTE

One precondition for starting the car is that one of the car’s remote control keys with the keyless drive* function is located inside the passenger compartment or the cargo area.

Stop the engine To switch off the engine — Press START/STOP

ENGINE.

If the car has an automatic gearbox and the

gear selector is not in a position P or if the car

is moving — Press twice or hold the button

depressed until the engine stops.

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

101

Steering lock2

The steering lock is deactivated when the

remote control key is inserted into the ignition

switch and is activated when the key is

removed from the lock.

Activate the steering lock when leaving the car

to reduce the risk of car theft.

Key positions For information on the remote control key’s dif-

ferent key positions, see page 73.

2 For cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock is deactivated when the START/STOP ENGINE button is pressed in for the first time. The steering lock is activated when the engine is switched off and the driver’s door is opened.

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine external battery

102

Jump starting

If the battery is flat then the car can be started

with current from another battery.

The following points are recommended when

using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk

of an explosion:

1. Insert the remote control key in key posi-

tion 0, see page 73.

2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.

3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch

off the donor car’s engine in the other car

and ensure that the cars do not touch one

another.

4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive

terminal on the donor battery .

5. Open the clips on the front cover of the

battery in your car and remove the cover,

see page 244.

6. Connect the red jump lead to the battery’s

positive terminal .

7. Connect one clamp from the black jump

lead to the donor battery’s negative termi-

nal .

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing

point, (right-hand engine mounting at the

top, the outer screw head) . Check that

the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so

that there are no sparks during the starting

procedure.

9. Start the engine of the «donor car». Let the

engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly

higher than idle (1500 rpm).

10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat-

tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur-

ing the start procedure. There is a risk of

sparks forming.

11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and

then the red.

Make sure that none of the clamps on the

black jump lead comes into contact with

the battery’s positive terminal or the clamp

connected to the red jump lead.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect a jump lead incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

103

Manual — six-speed

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use the

highest gear possible as often as possible.

Reverse gear inhibitor — six-speed

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-

ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse

gear during normal forward travel.

Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta-

tionary.

Automatic gearbox, Geartronic

The information display shows the position of

the gear selector using the following indica-

tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see

page 67.

Gear positions

Parking position (P) Select P when starting the engine or when the

car is parked. The brake pedal must be

depressed to disengage the gear selector from

the P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the

P position is engaged. Activate the electric

parking brake by pressing the button, see

page 112.

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

104

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

Reverse (R) The car must be stationary when position R is

selected.

Neutral position (N) No gear is engaged and the engine can be

started. Apply the parking brake if the car is

stationary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive (D) D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and

down takes place automatically based on the

level of acceleration and speed. The car must

be stationary when the gear selector is moved

to position D from position R.

Geartronic manual gear positions (M) The driver can also change gear manually

using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The

car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal

is released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving

the lever from position D to the right-hand end

position at M. The information display shifts the

indication from D to one of the figures «1—6«,

depending on which gear is engaged just then,

see page 67.

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to

change up a gear and release the lever, which

returns to its rest position at M.

Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change

down a gear and release the lever.

The manual gearshift mode M can be selected

at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the

driver allows the speed to decrease lower than

a level suitable for the selected gear, in order

to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode: move the

lever to the left-hand end position at D.

NOTE

If the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back- wards in its M position. The information dis- play then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 16 is engaged.

Geartronic — Sport mode (S)1

The Sport programme provides sportier cha-

racteristics and allows higher engine speed for

the gears. At the same time it responds more

quickly to acceleration. During active driving,

the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to

a delayed upshift.

Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever

from D position to the end position at M. The

information display shifts the indication from

D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time while

driving.

Geartronic — Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads

if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from the D position to the end position at M — the instrument panel display shifts the indication from D to the figure 1.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards + (plus) twice — the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.

The gearbox «winter mode» means that the car

moves off with a lower engine speed and

reduced engine power on the drive wheels.

1 Only on the T6 model.

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

105

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the

way to the floor (beyond the position normally

regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is

immediately engaged. This is known as kick-

down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-

down position, the gearbox automatically

changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-

tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox

control program has a protective downshift

inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-

tion.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-

down which would result in an engine speed

high enough to damage the engine. Nothing

happens if the driver still tries to shift down in

this way at high engine speed the original

gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can

change one or more gears at a time depending

on engine speed. The car changes up when the

engine reaches its maximum speed in order to

prevent damage to the engine.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 02

13 51

The gear selector can be moved forward and

back freely between N and D. Other positions

are locked with a latch that is released with the

inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever

can be moved forwards or backwards between

P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-

tems:

Keylock To remove the remote control key from the

ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the

P position. The remote control key is locked in

all other positions.

Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov-

ing the gear selector to another position.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking

position (P) To be able to move the gear selector from P to

other gear positions, the brake pedal must be

depressed and the remote control key in posi-

tion II activated, see page 73.

Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the

car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds

(irrespective of whether the engine is running)

then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N to

other gear positions, the brake pedal must be

depressed and the remote control key must be

in position II, see page 73.

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

106

Deactivating the automatic gear selector

inhibitor

G 03

13 90

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat

battery, the gear selector must be moved from

the P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift the rubber mat in the compartment

behind the centre console and open the

hatch.

Fully insert the key blade. Press the key

blade down and hold (For information on

the key blade, see page 48.)

Move the gear selector from the P position.

03 Your driving environment

All-wheel drive AWD*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

All Wheel Drive is always engaged

All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all

four wheels at the same time.

The power is automatically distributed

between the front and rear wheels. An elec-

tronically controlled clutch system distributes

the power to the wheels that have the best grip

on the current road surface. This provides the

best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under

normal driving conditions, the majority of

power is transmitted to the front wheels.

All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,

snow and icy conditions.

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

108

General

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If

one brake circuit is damaged then this will

mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level

and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to

produce the normal braking effect.

The driver’s brake pedal pressure is assisted

by a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

If the brake is used when the engine is switched

off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force

must be used to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy

load the brakes can be relieved by using engine

braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used

if the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loads

on the car, see page 278.

Anti-lock braking system The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock

Braking System) which prevents the wheels

from locking during braking. This means the

ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to

swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration

may be felt in the brake pedal when this is

engaged and this is normal.

A short test of the ABS system is made auto-

matically after the engine has been started

when the driver releases the brake pedal. A

further automatic test of the ABS system may

be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The

test may be experienced as pulses in the brake

pedal.

Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. This delay

is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.

Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur-

faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the

car has been washed. Carry this out by braking

gently during a short period while en route.

Emergency Brake Assistance Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency

Brake Assistance) helps to increase brake

force and so reduce braking distance. The EBA

system detects the driver’s braking style and

increases brake force as necessary. The brake

force can be reinforced up to the level when the

ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is

interrupted when the pressure on the brake

pedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Symbols in the combined instrument

panel

Symbol Specification

Constant glow Check the

brake fluid level. If the level is

low, fill with brake fluid and

check for the cause of the brake

fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds

when the engine is started

There was a fault in the brake

system’s ABS function when

the engine was last running.

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

109

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake sys- tem.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near- est workshop and have the brake system checked — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

110

General

HDC can be compared to an automatic engine

brake. When you release the accelerator on

downhill gradients the car is normally braked

by means of the engine striving for low engine

idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But

the steeper the road and the more load there is

in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine

braking. In order to then reduce speed the

driver has to assist using the footbrake.

The function makes it possible to increase/

reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with

a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without

using the footbrake. The sensitivity of the

accelerator pedal decreases and becomes

more precise by means of the full actuation of

the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine

speed within a limited range. The brake system

brakes itself and provides the car with a low

and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully

focus on steering.

HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients

with an uneven road surface and slippery sec-

tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer

from a ramp.

WARNING

HDC does not work in all situations, but is instead only intended to be supplementary assistance.

The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely.

Function

HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch

on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the

button illuminates when the function is

switched on. When HDC is operating the

symbol illuminates and the display

shows Hill descent control ON.

The function only operates in first gear position

and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,

gear position 1 must be selected, which is

shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer

display, see page 104.

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated in an automatic gearbox with the gear selector in position D.

Operation

HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of

10 km/h forwards with engine braking and

7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within

the gear’s speed register can be selected using

the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator

pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to

10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the

hill’s gradient and without the need for the foot-

brake.

The brake lights come on automatically when

the function is operating. The driver can brake

or stop the car at any time by using the foot-

brake.

HDC is deactivated:

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

111

with the on/off button on the centre con- sole

if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a manual gearbox

if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector is moved to position D.

The function can be disengaged at any time. If

it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then

the braking effect will not release directly, but

slowly instead.

NOTE

With HDC activated you may experience a delay between acceleration pedal activation and engine response.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

112

Parking brake, electric

An electric parking brake has the same appli-

cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. when

starting uphill.

Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when

the parking brake is being applied. The noise

can also be heard during the automatic func-

tion checking of the parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brake

is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.

If it is applied when the car is moving then the

normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts

on all four wheels. Brake function changes over

to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta-

tionary.

Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking

brake can neither be released nor applied.

Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage

is too low, see page 102.

How to apply the parking brake

G 02

13 54

Parking brake control.

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Press the control.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make

sure that the car is at a standstill position.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).

The symbol in the combined instrument

panel flashes until the parking brake is fully

applied. When the symbol illuminates the park-

ing brake is applied.

In an emergency the parking brake can be

applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-

ing the control. When the control is released or

the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking

is interrupted.

NOTE

In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the braking procedure.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels

away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the

wheels towards the kerb.

How to release the parking brake

G 02

13 59

Parking brake control.

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

113

Cars with manual gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

3. Pull the control.

NOTE

The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- mends the use of the brake pedal.

Releasing automatically 1. Start the engine.

2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel-

erator.

IMPORTANT

It is possible to release the parking brake automatically, even when the gear lever is in neutral position, if the engine is running.

Cars with automatic gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch.

3. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

4. Pull the control.

Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Start the engine.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and depress the accelerator.

NOTE

For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is run- ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.

Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

car to roll backward when the parking brake is

released automatically on a steep incline.

Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-

ing off. Release the control when the engine

achieves traction.

Cars with Keyless drive function Release manually by pressing the

START/STOP ENGINE button, then depress

the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control.

Symbols

Symbol Specification

Read the message on the infor-

mation display

A flashing symbol indicates that

the parking brake is applied. If

the symbol flashes in any other

situation then this means that a

fault has arisen. Read the mes-

sage on the information display.

Messages

G 01

61 66

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

114

Park brake not fully released — A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being released.

Visit a workshop — an authorised Volvo work-

shop is recommended. A warning signal

sounds if you pull away with this error mes-

sage.

Parking brake not applied — A fault is pre-

venting the parking brake from being applied.

Try to apply and release. Visit a workshop if the

message remains — a Volvo workshop is rec-

ommended.

The message is also illuminated on cars with

manual gearbox when the car is driven at low

speed with the door open in order to alert the

driver that the parking brake may have been

unintentionally disengaged.

Parking brake Service required — A fault has

arisen. Visit a workshop if the fault persists — a

Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the car has to be parked before the fault has

been rectified then the wheels must be turned

as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged

(manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be

in position P (automatic gearbox).

Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a

workshop due to the design of the electric

parking brake — an authorised Volvo workshop

is recommended.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink *

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

General

HomeLink is a programmable remote control

which can control up to three different devices

(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-

ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so

replace their remote controls. HomeLink is

supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.

The HomeLink panel consists of three pro-

grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.

NOTE

HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if the car is locked from the outside.

Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car).

Erase the programming for the buttons when selling the car.

Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars equipped with HomeLink. This could have a negative effect on the HomeLink function.

Operation

When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be

used in place of the separate original remote

controls.

Depress the programmed button to activate

the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi-

cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but-

ton is kept depressed.

NOTE

In the event that the ignition is not activated, HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the driver’s door has been opened.

The original remote controls can of course be

used in parallel with HomeLink .

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.

Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information — contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

Programming for the first time The first step erases the memory in

HomeLink and must not be carried out when

only one individual button is being reprogram-

med.

1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not

release until the indicator lamp starts to

flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-

ing indicates that HomeLink is set in

«learn mode» and is ready to be pro-

grammed.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink *

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Position the original remote control

5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-

cator lamp.

The particular distance that is required

between the original remote control and

HomeLink depends on the programming

of the device in question. Perhaps several

attempts will be required at different dis-

tances. Maintain each position for approx.

15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button for the original remote

control and the button to be programmed

on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not

release the buttons until the indicator lamp

has changed over from slow to rapid flash-

ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful

programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the

programmed button on HomeLink and

watching the indicator lamp:

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed

HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a «roll- ing code». The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro-

grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the «programming button1» on the

receiver for the garage door for example,

normally located close to the antenna’s

bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-

culty in finding the button — consult the

supplier’s manual, or contact the supplier

via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the «programming

button». The button flashes for

approx. 30 seconds and the next step must

be carried out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on

HomeLink , while the «programming but-

ton» is still flashing, keep it depressed for

approx. 3 seconds and then release.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence

up to 3 times to conclude the program-

ming.

Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual button, proceed in

accordance with the following:

1. Depress the required button on

HomeLink and do not release until step 3

has been completed.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink

starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,

position the original remote control

5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-

cator lamp.

The particular distance that is required

between the original remote control and

HomeLink depends on the programming of

the device in question. Perhaps several

attempts will be required at different dis-

tances. Maintain each position for approx.

15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button on the original remote

control. The indicator lamp will start to

flash. When the flashing has changed over

from a slow to a rapid flashing — release

both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates

successful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the

programmed button on HomeLink and

watching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink *

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

HomeLink button is depressed.

grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the «programming button2» on the

receiver for the garage door for example,

normally located close to the antenna’s

bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-

culty in finding the button — consult the

supplier’s manual, or contact the supplier

via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the «programming

button». The button flashes for approx. 30

seconds and the next step must be carried

out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on

HomeLink , while the «programming but-

ton» is still flashing, keep it depressed for

approx. 3 seconds and then release.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence

up to 3 times to conclude the program-

ming.

Erasing programming It is only possible to erase the programming for

all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual

buttons.

Depress the two outer buttons and do not

release until the indicator lamp starts to

flash after approx. 20 seconds.

> HomeLink is now set in so-called

«learn mode» and is ready to be pro-

grammed once more, see page 115.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

G 02

09 08

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Menus and messages………………………………………………………………… 120

Climate control………………………………………………………………………….. 126

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*…………………………………………… 133

Fuel-driven additional heater*……………………………………………………… 136

Audio system……………………………………………………………………………. 137

Trip computer……………………………………………………………………………. 150

DSTC Stability and traction control system………………………………… 152

Adapting driving characteristics………………………………………………….. 154

Cruise control*………………………………………………………………………….. 155

Adaptive cruise control*……………………………………………………………… 156

Distance Alert……………………………………………………………………………. 162

City Safety…………………………………………………………………………….. 165

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*……………………………………………… 170

Driver Alert System DAC*…………………………………………………………. 175

Driver Alert System — LDW*…………………………………………………………. 178

Park assist syst*………………………………………………………………………… 181

Park assist camera*…………………………………………………………………… 184

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System………………………………………… 187

Comfort inside the passenger compartment…………………………………. 191

Bluetooth handsfree*…………………………………………………………………. 194

Built-in phone*………………………………………………………………………….. 199

04 COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Centre console

Some functions are controlled from the centre

console via the menu system or via the keypad

in the steering wheel. Each function is descri-

bed under its respective section.

The current menu level is shown at the top right

of the centre console’s display.

Centre console controls

Centre console with controls for menu navigation.

Navigation button scrolls and selects

among menu options

MENU leads to the menu system

EXIT leads back one step in the menu

structure. A long press leads out from the

menu system.

ENTER selects menu options

Numerical keypad 19

Steering wheel keypad*

ENTER

EXIT

Navigation buttons up/down.

If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and

EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation

buttons, have the same functions as the con-

trols in the centre console.

Search paths Access to some functions is provided directly

via the function buttons and some are reached

via the menu system.

The search paths to the menu system’s func-

tions are stated in the form: Car settings

Lock settings, which presupposes that fol-

lowing is carried out before:

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to the required menu, e.g. Car

settings, using the navigation buttons and

press ENTER.

3. Scroll to the required submenu, e.g. Lock

settings, and press ENTER.

The navigation buttons can be used instead of

ENTER and EXIT when navigating in the menu

hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to

ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.

The menu options are numbered and can also

be selected directly with the numerical keypad

(only 19).

Menu overview The phone and audio sources each have sep-

arate main menus. An audio source main menu

(e.g. CD) can only be accessed when that par-

ticular audio source is active, see page 138.

The following menu options are included in

Main menu:

Car Key memory

Seat & mirror positions*

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

Car settings

Information

Light settings

Lock settings

Reduced guard1

Tyre pressure*

Side mirror settings*

Collision warning settings*

Parking camera settings*

Lane departure warning*

Steering force level*

Unit settings

Driver Alert on

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust

Recirculation timer

Auto. rear defroster

Reset climate settings

Main menu AM

Audio settings

Sound stage

Equalizer front

Equalizer rear

Auto. volume control

Reset all audio settings

Main menu FM

FM settings

News

TP (Traffic information)

Radio text

PTY (Program type)

Advanced radio settings

Audio settings2

Main menu DAB*3

Main menu CD

Random

Off

Folder4

Disc4

Single disc5

All discs5

CD settings

Track information*

News

TP (Traffic information)

Audio settings2

Main menu AUX

AUX input volume

Audio settings2

Main menu USB

USB settings

News

TP (Traffic information)

Audio settings2

Track information

1 Available in certain models. 2 For submenus, see «Main menu AM/Audio settings». 3 See page 147. 4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files. 5 Only in systems with CD changer.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Main menu iPod

iPod settings

News

TP (Traffic information)

Audio settings2

Track information

Main menu, Bluetooth

Last 10 missed calls

Last 10 received calls

Last 10 dialled calls

Phone book

Copy fr. mobile phone

Bluetooth*

Connect phone

Change phone

Remove phone

Car Bluetooth info

Phone settings

Call options

Sounds and volume

Synchronise phone book

Main menu, built-in phone

Call register

Last 10 missed calls

Last 10 received calls

Last 10 dialled calls

Erase list

Call duration

Phone book

New contact

Copy all

Erase SIM

Erase phone

Memory status

Speed-dial

Messages

Read

Write new

Message settings

Erase message

Call options

Send my number

Call waiting

Automatic answer

Auto redial

Voice mail number

Diversions

Phone settings

Network selection

SIM security

Edit PIN code

Sounds and volume

IDIS

Reset Phone settings

2 For submenus, see «Main menu AM/Audio settings».

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

123

Combined instrument panel

G 02

13 64

Information display and controls for menus.

READ access to message list and mes-

sage confirmation.

Thumbwheel browse between menu

options.

RESET reset the active function. Used in

certain cases to select/activate a function,

see the explanation under each respective

function.

The menus shown on the information displays

in the combined instrument panel are con-

trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The

menus shown depend on key position, see

page 73. If a message appears then this must

be acknowledged with READ for the menus to

be shown.

Menu overview6

To empty fuel tank

Average

Instantaneous

Average speed

Lane departure warning

Tyre pressure Calibration

City Safety

Current speed

Park heat timer 1/2

Park vent timer 1/2

Park timer mode

Direct start Park heat

Direct start Park el.heat

Direct start Park vent

Additional heat auto

Rest heat start

DSTC

Message

Text message in the information display.

When a warning, information or indicator sym-

bol illuminates, a corresponding message

appears on the information display. An error

message is stored in a memory list until the

fault is rectified.

Press READ to acknowledge and browse

between the messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

124

Message Specification

Stop safely Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact

an authorised Volvo

workshop.

Stop engine Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact

an authorised Volvo

workshop.

Service urgent Volvo recommends that

you engage an author-

ised Volvo workshop to

check the car immedi-

ately.

Service

required

Volvo recommends that

you engage an author-

ised Volvo workshop to

check the car as soon

as possible.

See manual Read the owner’s man-

ual.

Message Specification

Book time for

maintenance

Time to book regular

service. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact

an authorised Volvo

workshop.

Time for regular

maintenance

Time for regular service.

Volvo recommends that

you contact an author-

ised Volvo workshop.

The timing is deter-

mined by the number of

kilometres driven, num-

ber of months since the

last service, engine run-

ning time and oil grade.

Maintenance

overdue

If the service intervals

are not followed then

the warranty does not

cover any damaged

parts. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact

an authorised Volvo

workshop for service.

Message Specification

Transmission

oil Change nee-

ded

Volvo recommends that

you engage an author-

ised Volvo workshop to

check the car as soon

as possible.

Transmission

performance

low

Transmission cannot

handle full capacity.

Drive with care until the

message clears.

If shown repeatedly:

Volvo recommends that

you contact an author-

ised Volvo workshop.

Transmission

hot Reduce

speed

Drive more smoothly or

stop the car in a safe

manner. Disengage the

gear and run the engine

at idling speed until the

message clears.

Transmission

hot Stop safely

Critical fault. Stop the

car immediately in a

safe manner. Volvo rec-

ommends that you con-

tact an authorised

Volvo workshop.

6 Certain menu options.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

125

Message Specification

Temporarily

OFF

A function has been

temporarily switched

off and is reset auto-

matically while driving

or after starting again.

Power save

mode

The audio system is

switched off to save

energy. Charge the bat-

tery.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

Air conditioning The car is equipped with Electronic Climate

Control (ECC). The climate control system

cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in

the passenger compartment.

NOTE

The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.

Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the

physical experience with reference to factors

such as air speed, humidity and solar radia-

tion* in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor* which

detects on which side the sun is shining into

the passenger compartment. This means that

the temperature can differ between the right

and left-hand air vents despite the controls

being set for the same temperature on both

sides.

Sensor location

The sun sensor* is located on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.

The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Side windows and panorama roof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti-

mally the side windows, and panorama roof if

appropriate, should be closed.

Misting windows Remove misting on the insides of the windows

by primarily using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win-

dows clean and use window cleaner.

Temporary shut-off of the air

conditioning When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full

acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the

air conditioning can be temporarily switched

off. There may then be a temporary increase in

temperature in the passenger compartment.

Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air

conditioning may drip under the car. This is

normal.

Ice and snow Remove ice and snow from the climate control

system air intake (the grille between the bonnet

and the windscreen).

Fault tracing and repair Engage a workshop that has authorisation for

the fault tracing and repair of the climate con-

trol system. Volvo recommends that you con-

tact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Refrigerant The climate control system contains R134a

refrigerant, see page 280. This refrigerant con-

tains no chlorine, which means that it is harm-

less to the ozone layer. Engage a workshop

that has authorisation for filling/changing

refrigerant to carry out the work. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop.

Total airing function The function opens/closes all side windows

simultaneously and can be used for example to

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

quickly air the car during hot weather, see

page 53.

Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car’s passenger compart-

ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be

replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo

Service Programme for the recommended

replacement intervals. If the car is used in a

severely contaminated environment, it may be

necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* This option keeps the passenger compartment

clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub-

stances. For more information on CZIP, see the

brochure included with the purchase of the car.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is dis- engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs

is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.

The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto- matic system that cleans the air in the pas- senger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.

NOTE

In cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first. How- ever, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed at the normal service.

Use of tested materials in the interior

equipment. The materials have been developed in order to

minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger

compartment and they contribute to making

the passenger compartment easier to keep

clean. The carpets in both the passenger com-

partment and the cargo area are removable

and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning

agents and car care products recommended

by Volvo, see page 266.

Menu settings It is possible to change the default settings for

three of the climate control system’s functions

via the centre console, see page 120:

Fan speed in automatic mode*, see page 129.

Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air, see page 130.

Automatic rear window defrosting, see page 95.

All climate control system functions are set to

original position with RESET via the display.

Air distribution

G 03

20 70

The incoming air is divided between

20 different vents in the passenger compart-

ment.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO

mode*.

If necessary it can be controlled manually, see

page 132.

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents at the side windows to

remove misting.

A certain air flow always comes from the vents

in order to maintain a good climate in the pas-

senger compartment.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-

ing.

Aim the vents into the passenger compartment

to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear

seat.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sen- sitive to air flows and draughts.

Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC

Fan

Air distribution

Heated front seats, left-hand side

AUTO

Heated front seats, right-hand side

Temperature control, right-hand side

AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off

Rear window and door mirror defrosters,

see page 95

Max. defroster

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Recirculation/Air quality system

Temperature control, left-hand side

Operation

Fan Turn the knob to increase or

decrease fan speed. If AUTO

is selected then fan speed is

regulated automatically. The

previously set fan speed is

disengaged.

NOTE

If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi- tioning is not engaged which may result in a risk of misting windows.

Heated seats*

Front seats Press the button once for the

highest heat level three

lamps illuminate.

Press the button twice for a

lower heat level two lamps

illuminate.

Press the button three times for the lowest heat

level one lamp illuminates.

Press the button four times to switch off the

heat no lamps illuminate.

WARNING

The heated seat should not be used by peo- ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera- ture increase because of sensory loss or for any reason have difficulty in managing to use the control of the heated seat. Other- wise, burn injuries may arise.

Rear seats1

G 02

13 76

Heat control takes place in the same way as for

the front seat.

Air distribution The figure consists of three

buttons. When the buttons

are pressed a lamp in front of

the respective part of the fig-

ure illuminates and shows

which air distribution is

selected, see page 132.

Auto The Auto function automati-

cally regulates temperature,

air conditioning, fan speed,

recirculation, and air distribu-

tion.

If you select one or more manual functions, the

other functions continue to be controlled auto-

matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and

all manual settings are switched off when

AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO

CLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set up

under the menu: Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust. Choose between

Low, Normal or High:

1 Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

130

Low — Automatic fan control. Low airflow is prioritised.

Normal — Automatic fan control.

High — Automatic fan control. A more intense airflow is prioritised.

For a description of the menu system, see

page 120.

Temperature control The temperatures on the

driver and passenger sides

can be set independently.

When the car is started, the

most recent setting is

resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required.

AC Air conditioning on/off ON: The air conditioning is

controlled by the system’s

Auto function. This way,

incoming air is cooled and

dehumidified.

OFF: When the defroster function is activated

the air conditioning is switched on automati-

cally (can be switched off using the AC button).

Defroster Used to quickly remove mist-

ing and ice from the wind-

screen and side windows. Air

flowing to the windows. The

light in the defroster button

illuminates when the function

is active.

The following also takes place in order to pro-

vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-

ger compartment:

the air conditioning is automatically engaged

recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.

The air conditioning can be disengaged man-

ually using the AC button. When the defroster

function is switched off the climate control sys-

tem returns to the previous settings.

Recirculation/Air quality system

Recirculation When recirculation is

engaged the right-hand

orange light in the button illu-

minates. The function is

selected to shut out bad air,

exhaust gases etc. from the

passenger compartment. The

air in the passenger compartment is recircula-

ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when

this function is activated.

NOTE

If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

Timer With the timer function activated the system

will exit manually activated recirculation mode

according to a time that depends on the out-

side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,

misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the

function under Climate settings

Recirculation timer. For a description of the

menu system, see page 120.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

Air quality system* The air quality system sepa-

rates gases and particles to

reduce the levels of odours

and pollution in the passenger

compartment. If the outside

air is contaminated then the

air intake is closed and the air

is recirculated. When the AUTO button is

depressed the air quality sensor is always

engaged.

Activating recirculation/air quality

sensor Switch between the three

functions by pressing the but-

ton repeatedly.

The left-hand orange lamp illuminates the air quality sensor is disengaged. There is no recirculation, only fresh air.

The centre green lamp illuminates recir- culation not engaged, providing it is not required for cooling in hot weather.

The right-hand orange lamp illuminates recirculation is engaged.

NOTE

The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

If the insides of the windows start misting up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the defroster functions for the windscreen, the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows.

Activating recirculation Switch between recirculation

On/Off by pressing the button

repeatedly. The lamp illumi-

nates when recirculation is

engaged.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

132

Air distribution table

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air

flows from the air vents.

The air is not recirculated.

Air conditioning is always

engaged.

to remove ice and misting

quickly.

Air to the floor and win-

dows. Some air flows

from the dashboard air

vents.

to ensure comfortable

conditions and good

demisting in cold or

humid weather.

Air to windscreen and

side windows. Some air

flows from the air vents.

to prevent misting and

icing in a cold and humid

climate, (not at too low fan

speed to enable this).

Air to floor and from dash-

board air vents.

in sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

Airflow to windows and

from dashboard air vents.

to ensure good comfort in

warm, dry weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows

to the dashboard air vents

and windows.

to direct heat or cold to

the floor.

Airflow to the head and

chest from the dashboard

air vents.

to ensure efficient cooling

in warm weather.

Airflow to windows, from

dashboard air vents and

to the floor.

to provide cooler air along

the floor or warmer air

higher up in cold weather

or hot, dry weather.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

Fuel-driven heater

General information about the parking

heater The parking heater heats the engine and pas-

senger compartment and can be started

directly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using the

timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car

is heated and ready. The car’s electronic sys-

tem calculates when heating should be started

based on the outside temperature.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-

ture exceeds 15 C. At 10 C or lower the

maximum running time of the parking heater is

50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- ing, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Check the information display to see that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows Park heat ON.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of

the car should point downhill to ensure that

there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel

level is too low, the parking heater will be

switched off automatically and a message

appears on the information display. Acknowl-

edge the message by pressing the indicator

stalk READ button once, see page 134.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car’s battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

G 02

13 64

READ button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

For more information on the information dis-

play and READ, see page 123.

Symbols and display messages

When one of the timer’s settings or

Direct start is activated, the infor-

mation symbol in the combined instrument

panel illuminates while the information display

shows an explanatory text and a further illumi-

nated symbol. The table shows symbols and

display texts that appear.

Sym- bol

Display Specification

G 02

51 02

Fuel

heater

The heater is

switched on and

running.

G 02

51 02

Timer is

set for

Fuel

heater

The heater will

start at the set time

after the car has

been left, when the

remote control key

is removed from

the ignition switch.

G 02

51 02

Heater

stopped

Low bat-

tery

The heater has

been stopped by

the car’s electron-

ics in order to facil-

itate starting the

engine.

Sym- bol

Display Specification

G 02

51 02

Heater

unavail.

Low fuel

level

Setting the heater

is not possible due

to fuel level being

too low

(approx. 7 litres).

G 02

51 02

Park

heater

Service

required

Heater not work-

ing. Contact a

workshop for

repair. Volvo rec-

ommends that you

contact an author-

ised Volvo work-

shop.

A display text clears automatically after a time

or after one press on the indicator stalk

READ button.

Direct start and immediate stop

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start

Park heat.

2. Press RESET to select between ON and

OFF.

ON: Parking heater switched on manually or

with programmed timer.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135

OFF: Parking heater switched off.

Following the direct start of the heater it will be

activated for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will

begin as soon as the engine coolant has

reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.

Setting the timer

The time when the car shall be used and heated

is specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

NOTE

The timer can only be programmed when the remote control key is in key position I, see page 73.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat

timer 1.

2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-

ing hours setting.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb-

wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-

ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using the

thumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start

time can be programmed with Park heat timer

2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way as

Park heat timer 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heater A timer-started heater can be switched off

manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-

ceed as follows:

1. Press READ.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text

Park heat timer 1 or 2.

> The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.

> The text OFF is shown with a constant

glow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off in

accordance with the instructions in the section

«Direct start and immediate stop», see

page 134.

Clock/timer The heater’s time is connected to the car’s

clock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car’s clock is reset.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven additional heater*

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Additional heater (diesel)

G 02

13 64

READ button

Thumbwheel

RESET button

In diesel-engined cars the additional heater

may be required for achieving the correct tem-

perature in the engine and passenger com-

partment during cold weather.

The heater starts automatically when extra

heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when

the correct temperature is reached or when the

engine is switched off.

NOTE

When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater can be switched off for

short distances if required.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional

heat auto.

2. Press RESET to select between ON and

OFF.

Passenger compartment heater* If the additional heater is supplemented with

timer function then it will be a fuel-driven pas-

senger compartment heater, see page 133.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

General

The audio system can be equipped with differ-

ent options and is one of the following three

basic versions:

Performance

High Performance

Premium Sound

The system version is shown in the display

when the audio system is started.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby

symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby

Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured

under license from Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Remote control key and key positions The audio system can be used without the

remote control key in the ignition switch for

15 minutes at a time.

NOTE

Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the audio system is used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessar- ily.

If the audio system is active when the engine is

switched off then it is activated automatically

next time the engine is started.

Overview

Input for external audio source; AUX and

USB (e.g. iPod )1

Steering wheel keypad

Information display

Centre console control panel

Control panel with headphones socket*

Steering wheel keypad*

Confirm selection in menu system, accept

phone call.

Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current

function, end/refuse phone calls, clear

entered characters.

Volume

A short press scrolls between CD tracks or

preset radio stations. A long press fast-

winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa-

ble radio station.

1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rear control panel with headphones socket

Headphones with an impedance of

16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher

are recommended for best sound reproduc-

tion.

VOLUME Volume, left and right.

Scroll/search forward and backward.

MODE — Select between AM, FM, CD,

AUX, USB*(e.g. iPod ), DAB1/DAB2* and

On/Off. For connection via AUX or USB,

see page 140.

Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).

Activating/deactivating The control panel is activated with MODE.

Deactivation is possible via a long press on

MODE or when the engine is switched off.

Scroll/search forward and backward Short presses on (2) are used to scroll between

CD tracks or preset radio stations. A long press

fast-winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa-

ble radio station.

Limitations

The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played back in the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel.

Audio functions

Centre console, controls for audio functions.

AM, FM and CD — Internal audio sources.

MODE — Scroll between external audio

sources (AUX, USB* and DAB1/DAB2*).

For connection via AUX or USB, see

page 140.

SOUND Push button and knob controls

for adjusting the sound pattern.

Navigation button

VOLUME — Volume and On/Off.

Audio volume and automatic volume

control The audio system compensates for disrupting

noises in the passenger compartment by

increasing the volume with the speed of the

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139

car. The level of compensation can be set at

low, medium or high. Select the level under

Audio settings Auto. volume control.

External audio source audio volume The AUX input can be used for connecting an

MP3 player which has no USB connection for

example, see page 140.

NOTE

The audio quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket.

1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using

the MODE button, press MENU and navi-

gate with (4) to AUX input volume, see

page 137.

2. Turn the SOUND control or press /

the navigation button, see page 137.

Audio controls Press the control SOUND repeatedly to

browse among the following listed options.

Adjustment is made by turning the control.

NOTE

Press MENU to access the audio settings. For more information, see page 120.

Bass — Bass level.

Treble — Treble level.

Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers.

Balance Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.

Subwoofer* — Bass speaker level. Turning

the control anticlockwise to MIN deac-

tivates the Subwoofer. The Subwoofer is located as illustrated below.

Subwoofer location.

Surround* Surround settings.

Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby

Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by

selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena-

bles the following options:

Centre level* Level for centre speaker.

Surround levelSurround level* Level for surround.

Equalizer

The equalizer2 can be used to adjust different

frequency bands separately.

1. Go to Audio settings and select

Equalizer front or Equalizer rear.

The sound level for the wavelength is

adjusted with / on the navigation

button. Press / to select another

wavelength.

2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.

Sound stage The sound experience can be optimised for the

driver’s seat*, both front seats or the rear seat.

Select one of the options under

Audio settings Sound stage.

2 Certain audio levels.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimum

sound reproduction by means of digital signal

processing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak-

ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment

acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-

bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes

into account the position of the volume control,

radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operating

instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and

Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be

able to adapt the sound reproduction accord-

ing to personal taste.

AUX, USB and iPod

General

An iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the car’s infotainment system via the USB connec- tion* or AUX input in the centre console.

The AUX input enables the connection of an

external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3

player. Read more on page 139.

If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 player

or a USB memory stick to the USB connec-

tion* then you can control the audio source

using the car’s audio controls.

Select the connection using the MODE button:

1. If USB is selected then Connect device is

shown in the display.

2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USB

memory stick to the USB connection* in

the centre console’s storage compartment

(see preceding illustration).

The text Loading is shown in the display when

the system is loading the storage media’s file

structure. This may take some time.

Once loading is complete, track information is

shown on the display and the desired track can

be selected.

A track can be selected in three ways:

With the TUNING control, , see page 137.

the navigation control’s (4) right or left- hand button or, , see page 137.

the steering wheel keypad (see page 137).

In USB or iPod mode the audio system oper-

ates in an equivalent way to the CD player play-

ing back music files. For more information, see

page 142.

NOTE

The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- mats that are not supported by the system. The system also supports the majority of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

Audio sources

USB memory To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,

only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer

for the system to load storage media that con-

tains anything other than compatible music

files.

NOTE

The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi- mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The memory must have a capacity of at least 256 Mb.

NOTE

When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of the enclosed USB adapter cable is recommended. This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick.

MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file systems

that are not supported by the audio system. For

use in the system, an MP3 player must be set

in USB Removable device/Mass Storage

Device mode.

iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power

by the USB connection, via the player’s con-

nection cable. However, if the player’s battery

is fully discharged then it must be charged

before being connected.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as audio source, the car’s infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player’s own menu structure.

For information on USB and iPod in combi-

nation with Performance audio, see the acces-

sory manual for USB andiPod Music

Interface.

CD functions

G 03

14 43

Centre console, controls for CD functions.

CD eject

CD insert and eject slot

Fast-wind and change CD track

Navigation button for changing CD tracks

Scan CD

CD changer position selection (only

applies to the High Performance and Pre-

mium Sound audio systems)*

Start playback (CD player) If a music CD is in the player when CD is

pressed then playback is started automatically.

Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

142

Start playback (CD changer) Start CD playback by pressing the CD button.

If a music CD is in the player when this takes

place then playback is started automatically.

Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.

Insert a CD (CD changer) 1. Select an empty position with the number

buttons 16 or / on the navigation

button (4).

An empty position is marked on the dis-

play. The text Insert disc shows that a new

disc can be inserted. The CD changer can

hold up to six CDs.

2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.

Disc eject A CD will stay in the ejected position for

approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-

inserted in the player and playback continues.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-

ton.

Eject all discs with a long press on the eject

button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by

disc.

Pause If the volume is turned down completely, the

CD player is stopped. The player is restarted

when volume is increased.

Audio files The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA

format audio files.

NOTE

Some copy protected audio files may not be read by the player.

When a CD with audio files is inserted into the

player the disc’s file structure is loaded.

Depending on the quality of the disc and the

quantity of information there may be a delay

before playback starts.

Navigation and playback If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD

player then ENTER leads to the disc’s direc-

tory structure. The directory structure is navi-

gated in the same way as the audio system’s

menu structure. Audio files have the symbol

and directories have the symbol .

Start audio file playback with ENTER.

When the playback of a file is finished the play-

back of the other files in the same directory

continues. Directory change takes place auto-

matically when all files in the current directory

have been played back.

Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio

files

Short presses / on the navigation button

are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio

files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD

tracks/audio files. The steering wheel keypad

can also be used for this purpose. Track

change can also be made by turning

TUNING.

Scan CD This function plays the first ten seconds of

each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti-

vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue

playback of the current CD track/audio file.

Random This function plays the tracks in random order.

The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-

led through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc.

Different messages appear depending on

which random function has been selected:

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

143

RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played

RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.

RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio files in a directory on the current CD are played.

CD player If a normal music CD is being played, activate/

deactivate under Random.

If a disc with audio files is being played, acti-

vate/deactivate under Random Folder.

CD changer If a normal music CD is being played under

Random Single disc or Random All

discs. The option All discs only applies to the

music CDs in the changer.

If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/

deactivate instead under Random Folder.

If you select another CD the function is deac-

tivated.

Track information If track information is stored on a music CD

then it can be shown on the display. This also

applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium

Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac-

tivate in CD mode under CD settings Track

information.

Radio functions

G 03

14 41

Centre console, controls for radio functions.

Navigation button for tuning, automatic

Cancel function in progress

Tuning, manual

Scan wavelength

Preset storage, automatic

Preset buttons and preset storage, manual

Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and

FM2)

Tuning, automatic 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Press / on the navigation button.

Tuning, manual 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Turn TUNING.

Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave-

length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1

and FM2. The stored presets are selected

using the preset buttons.

Preset storage can be carried out manually or

automatically.

Preset storage, manual 1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold in a station preset button until the

message Channel stored appears on the

display.

Preset storage, automatic The function is especially useful in areas where

the radio stations and their frequencies are

unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are

stored automatically in a separate memory.

1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.

2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring appears

on the display.

Once Autostoring disappears from the dis-

play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-

ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the

display. The automatically stored presets can

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

144

now be selected using the preset buttons.

Automatic preset storage can be cancelled

using EXIT.

Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam-

ple AUTO or FM.

Returning to Auto mode provides access to the

autostored presets:

1. Press AUTO.

> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button.

Scan wavelength The function automatically searches the cur-

rent wavelength for strong stations. When a

station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec-

onds before scanning is resumed.

1. Select wavelength using AM or FM.

2. Press SCAN.

SCAN appears on the display. Close using

SCAN or EXIT.

RDS functions RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters

into a network. An FM transmitter in such a

network sends information that gives an RDS

radio the following functions:

Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.

Searches for programme type, such as traffic information or news.

Receives text information on current radio programme.

NOTE

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality.

If a required programme type is located the

radio can switch stations interrupting the audio

source currently in use. For example, if the CD

player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting

transmission is played at a preset volume, see

page 146. The radio returns to the previous

audio source and volume when the set pro-

gramme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),

traffic information (TP (Traffic information)),

news (News), and programme types (PTY

(Program type)) interrupt one another in order

of priority, where alarm has the highest priority

and programme types has the lowest. For fur-

ther programme interruption settings (EON

and Regional), see page 145. Press EXIT to

return to the interrupted audio source.

Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci-

dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be

temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The

message ALARM! appears on the display

when an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information TP This function allows traffic information sent

within a set station’s RDS network to break

through. The TP (Traffic information) symbol

indicates that the function is activated. If the

set station can send traffic information then

appears on the display.

Activate/deactivate under FM settings

TP (Traffic information).

TP from current station/all stations The radio can interrupt with traffic information

from only the set (current) station or from all

stations.

Go to FM settings Advanced radio

settings TP Station… to change.

News This function allows news broadcasts sent

within a set station’s RDS network to break

through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the

function is active.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

145

Activate/deactivate under FM settings

News.

News from current/all stations The radio can interrupt with news from only the

set (current) station or from all stations.

Go to FM settings Advanced radio

settings News station… to change.

Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to select differ-

ent programme types, such as pop music and

serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that

the function is active. This function allows pro-

gramme types broadcast within a set station’s

RDS network to break through.

1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro-

gramme type under FM settings PTY

Select PTY.

2. Deactivate by clearing the PTY under FM

settings Clear all PTY.

PTY search This function searches the entire wavelength

for the selected programme type.

1. Select a PTY under FM settings PTY

Select PTY.

2. Go to FM settings

PTY (Program type) Search PTY.

If the radio finds any of the selected pro-

gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis-

play.

To continue searching for another broad-

cast of the selected programme types,

press on the navigation button.

Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can

be shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM

settings PTY Show PTY

NOTE

Not all radio stations support display of pro- gramme type.

Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on

programme content, artists, etc. This informa-

tion can be shown on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under

Radio text.

Automatic frequency update AF This function selects one of the strongest

transmitters for a set station. The function may

need to search through the entire FM wave-

length to find a strong transmitter. If this

occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek Press

Exit to cancel appears on the display.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM

settings Advanced radio settings

AF.

Regional radio programmes REG This function causes the radio to continue with

a regional transmitter even if its signal strength

is low. The symbol REG shows that the func-

tion is active.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM

settings Advanced radio settings

Regional.

Enhanced Other Networks EON This function is useful in urban areas with many

regional radio stations. It allows the distance

between the car and the radio station trans-

mitter to determine when programme functions

should interrupt the current audio source.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select-

ing one of the options under FM settings

Advanced radio settings EON:

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

146

Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.

Distant3 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.

Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.

Resetting RDS functions All radio settings can be reset to the original

factory settings.

The reset is carried out in FM mode under

FM settings Advanced radio settings

Reset all.

Volume control, programme types The interrupting programme types, e.g.

NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected

for each respective programme type. If the vol-

ume level is adjusted during the programme

interruption, the new level is saved until the

next programme interruption.

Menu structure FM

Main menu FM FM settings

1.1 News

1.2 TP (Traffic information)

1.3 Radio text

1.4 PTY (Program type)

1.4.1 Select PTY

Clear all PTY

Current affairs

Information

Sport

Education

Drama

Culture

Science

Varied speech

Pop music

Rock music

Easy listening

Light classic

Classical

Other music

Weather & metro

Finance

Children’s programs

Social affairs

Religion

Phone in

Travel & touring

Leisure & hobby

Jazz music

Country music

National music

Oldies music

Folk music

Documentary

1.4.2 Search PTY

1.4.3 Show PTY text

1.5. Advanced radio settings

1.5.1 TP station

1.5.2 News station

3 Factory settings.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

1.5.3 AF

1.5.4 EON

Off

Local

Distant

1.5.5 Regional

1.5.6 Reset FM sett.

Radio system — DAB*

General DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital

broadcasting system for radio.

NOTE

This system does not support DAB+.

Service and Ensemble

Service — Channel, radio channel (only audio services are supported by the sys- tem).

Ensemble — A collection of radio channels on the same frequency.

Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) When the vehicle is moved to a new broad-

casting area, programming of existing channel

groups in the area can take place.

Programming of channel groups creates an

updated list of all available channel groups.

The list is not updated automatically. Program-

ming takes place via the Ensemble learn menu or directly by means of a long press on

AUTO. If can take up to a minute to program a

channel group if both Band III and LBand are

selected.

Wavelength

DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths4; Band

III and LBand.

Band III over the whole country5

LBand — mainly in large cities

By selecting for example Band III on its own,

channel programming takes place more

quickly than if both Band III and LBand are

selected. It is not certain that all channel

groups will be found. Wavelength selection

does not affect the stored memories.

Navigation via lists There are three types of basic list which can be

used for navigation:

Ensemble — Shows channel groups that the receiver has obtained via channel group programming.

Service — Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo- cated. The list can also be filtered using DAB PTY (see below).

Subchannel — Subchannels to a selected channel.

The lists can be accessed via the menu. The

channel groups can also be accessed by

pressing ENTER.

Scanning Scanning means that all channels in the list are

played for 10 seconds each.

Press SCAN to activate

Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY

mode. In which case only channels of the pre-

selected programme type are played.

Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or

by pressing EXIT.

Subchannel Secondary components are usually named

subchannels. These are temporary and can

contain e.g. translations of the main pro-

gramme into other languages.

4 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths. 5 During a build-up phase DAB will not cover the whole country but will only work in larger urban areas.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

148

If one or more subchannels are broadcast then

the > symbol is shown to the right of the chan-

nel name in the display. A subchannel is indi-

cated by the > symbol appearing to the left of

the channel name in the display.

To access a subchannel:

Press

To navigate between subchannels:

Press or

Subchannels can only be accessed on the

selected main channel and not on any other

one without selecting it.

DAB PTY (program type) DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro-

gramme. There are 29 different programme

types which also include different programme

categories. After selecting a programme type,

navigation only takes place within the channels

broadcasting that type.

Exit this mode as follows:

Press EXIT

It is also possible to select a preset channel or

exit DAB PTY via the menu. In certain cases

DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to

DAB linking (see below) is implemented.

DAB to DAB link It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no

reception to the same channel in another chan-

nel group with better reception. There may be

a certain delay when changing channel group.

There may be a period of silence between the

current channel no longer being available to the

new channel becoming available.

DAB display settings 1. Basic — Only the channel name is shown if

a primary component is being played. A

subchannel name is shown if it is a sub-

channel being played

2. Ensemble — Adds the channel group name

to the channel name

3. Ensemble +PTY — Adds the programme

type name under the channel name

Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave-

length. DAB has 2 memories for presets:

DAB1 and DAB2. The stored presets are

selected using the preset buttons.

A preset contains one channel but no sub-

channels. If a subchannel is being played and

a preset is saved then only the channel ID is

registered. This is because subchannels are

temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the

preset, the channel which contained the sub-

channel will be played. The preset is not

dependent on the channel list.

A saved channel does not have to be in the

channel list for it to be playable. If the channel

is loaded when it is not available then a preset

number is shown and there is silence until an

available preset is selected for loading. Alter-

natively another channel.

NOTE

The audio system’s DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB standard.

Menu structure DAB

Main menu DAB

1. Select ensemble

2. Select service

3. Select subchannel

4. DAB PTY

4.1. DAB PTY off

4.2. News

4.3. Current affairs

4.4. Information

4.5. Sport

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

149

4.6. Education

4.7. Drama

4.8. Culture

4.9. Science

4.10. Varied speech

4.11. Pop music

4.12 Rock music

4.13. Calm music

4.14. Light classic

4.15. Serious classic

4.16. Other music

4.17. Weather & metro

4.18. Finance

4.19 Children

4.20. Factual

4.21. Religion

4.22. Phone in

4.23. Travel & touring

4.24. Leisure & hobby

4.25. Jazz and blues

4.26. Country music

4.27. National music

4.28. Oldies music

4.29. Folk music

4.30. Documentary

5. Ensemble learn

6. DAB settings

6.1. DAB display settings

6.1.1. Ensemble name

6.1.2. Ensemble name and

PTY

6.1.3. Basic

6.2. DAB to DAB link

6.3. FM traffic

6.4. Select DAB band

6.4.1. Band III

6.4.2. LBand

6.4.3. LBand & Band III

6.5. Reset DAB

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 02

13 64

Information display and controls.

READ — confirms

Thumbwheel browse between menus

and options in the trip computer list

RESET resets

To scroll through trip computer information,

turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps. Con-

tinue turning to return to the starting point.

Functions

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to revert to the trip computer function. Acknowledge by pressing READ.

To change unit indication for distance and

speed, contact a workshop. Volvo recom-

mends that you seek assistance from an

authorised Volvo workshop.

Average speed The car calculates the average speed from the

last resetting. Reset using RESET.

Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every

second. The information on the display is

updated every couple of seconds. When the

car is stationary, «—-» appears on the display.

Average The average fuel consumption since the last

reset. Reset using RESET.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven additional1 and/or parking heater* has been used.

Km to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel

consumption over the last 30 km and the

remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display

shows the approximate distance that can be

driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the

tank.

An economic driving style generally results in a

longer driving distance. For more information

on how you can influence fuel consumption,

see page 11

No guaranteed range remains when the display

shows «— km to empty tank«. Refuel as soon

as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed.

Resetting 1. Select Average speed or Average.

1 Diesel cars only.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

2. Press and hold RESET for

approx. 1 second to reset the selected

function. If RESET is kept depressed for at

least 3 three seconds then Average speed

and Average are reset simultaneously.

Current speed* The instrument panel display shows current

speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated

in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in

mph then the current speed is shown in km/h.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

DSTC Stability and traction control system

152

General information on DSTC

The stability and traction control system, DSTC

(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), helps

the driver to avoid skidding and improves the

car’s traction.

The activation of the system during braking

may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car

may accelerate slower than expected when the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force

of the wheels individually in order to stabilise

the car.

Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from

spinning against the road surface during accel-

eration.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans-

fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-

ning to the one that is not.

Operation

Reduced operation System operation during skidding and accel-

eration can be reduced. Operation during skid-

ding is delayed and so allows more skidding

which provides greater freedom for dynamic

driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is

improved as traction is no longer limited.

G 02

14 09

1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC

menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the

system function is unchanged.

DSTC spin control OFF means that sys-

tem operation is reduced.

2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTC

menu is changed.

The system remains reduced until the engine is

next started.

WARNING

The car’s driving characteristics may dete- riorate if the function is reduced.

Messages in the information display

DSTC Temporarily OFF System temporarily reduced due to excessive

brake disc temperature. The function is reacti-

vated automatically when the brakes have

cooled.

DSTC Service required System disabled due to a fault.

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the

engine. If the message remains when the

engine is restarted, drive to a workshop — an

authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols in the combined instrument

panel

If the symbols and are displayed

at the same time, read the message on the

information display.

If the symbol appears alone then it may

appear as follows:

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

DSTC Stability and traction control system

153

Flashing light means that the system is now being activated.

Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- tem check when the engine is started.

Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means system fault.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adapting driving characteristics

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active chassis (Four C)*

Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled

Chassis Concept), regulates the characteris-

tics of the shock absorbers so that the car’s

driving characteristics can be adjusted. There

are three settings: Comfort, Sport and

Advanced.

Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as

being more comfortable and is recommended

for longer journeys. Shock absorption is soft

and the movement of the body is smooth and

gentle.

Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as

being more sporty and is recommended for

more active driving. Steering response is faster

than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is

harder and the body follows the road in order

to reduce rolling during fast cornering.

Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even

and smooth road surfaces.

The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi-

mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further

minimised.

Operation

Chassis settings.

Use the buttons in the centre console to

change setting. The setting in use when the

engine is switched off is activated next time the

engine is started.

Speed related power steering*

Steering force increases with the speed of the

car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The

steering is firmer and more immediate on

motorways. Steering is light and requires no

extra effort when parking and at low speed.

Steering force can be set in three levels so that

you can select the level that suits you in terms

of road responsiveness or steering sensitivity.

Go to Car settings Steering force level in

the menu system.

For a description of the menu system, see

page 120. This menu cannot be accessed

while the car is in motion.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

Operation

G 02

14 11

Display and controls.

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)

Activating and setting the speed In order to enable the activation of cruise con-

trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode

with the CRUISE button . The symbol

illuminates in the display and the text (—) km/

h shows that cruise control is in standby

mode.

Cruise control is then activated with or

after which the current speed is stored and is

used as the set speed. The display text

(—) km/h changes to show the set speed, e.g.

100 km/h.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.

Adjusting the set speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long

or short presses on or .

A temporary increase in speed using the accel-

erator, such as while overtaking, does not

affect the cruise control setting. When the

accelerator is released the car will return to the

set speed.

NOTE

If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. one minute then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to then reset cruise control.

Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE or

by switching off the engine. The set speed is

cleared.

Temporary deactivation

Press On to disengage cruise control tem-

porarily. The saved speed is shown in brackets

in the display, e.g. (100) km/h.

Automatic temporary deactivation Cruise control is deactivated spontaneously

when the driving wheels spin heavily or if the

car’s speed falls below approx. 30 km/h.

Cruise control is also deactivated when the

brakes are used, when the gear selector is

moved to neutral position or if the driver main-

tains a speed faster than the set speed for

longer than 1 minute.

After deactivation cruise control changes over

to standby mode and the set speed is saved.

Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated tempo-

rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The

speed is then set to the previously set speed.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may arise

after the speed has been resumed with .

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to

assist the driver with support on long straight

roads in steady traffic, for example on motor-

ways and main roads.

WARNING

You must always pay attention to the traffic conditions and intervene when adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.

Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions.

The Function section and after informs about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the adaptive cruise control.

When driving you are responsible for main- taining the correct distance and speed, even when adaptive cruise control is used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Function

Functions overview.

Warning lamp, braking by driver required

Controls

Radar sensor

Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise

control system and a coordinated spacing sys-

tem.

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

Adaptive cruise control does not brake for people or animals. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

The distance to the vehicle ahead is measured

by a radar sensor. The speed is regulated by

acceleration and braking. It is normal for the

brakes to emit a low sound when they are being

used by cruise control.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped.

The cruise control objective is to follow the

vehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a set

time interval. If the radar sensor has not

detected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157

tive is the set speed. This is also the case if the

speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the cruise

control set speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the

speed in a smooth way. In situations that

demand sudden braking you must brake your-

self. This applies with large differences in

speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.

Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking

may come unexpectedly or not at all, see

page 159.

Adaptive cruise control can only be activated

above 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h or

if engine speed becomes too slow, then the

adaptive cruise control disengages and stops

braking. In which case the driver must imme-

diately take over and maintain the distance to

vehicles in front. The highest speed setting is

200 km/h.

Warning lamp, braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity

that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the

car’s braking capacity.

If the car needs to brake more heavily than

cruise control capacity and the driver does not

brake, then the cruise control uses the collision

warning system’s warning lamp and warning

sound to alert the driver that immediate inter-

vention is required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn.

WARNING

Cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. Consequently there may be no warning or it may be sub- ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but brake when it is necessary.

Operation

Display and controls.

Activate and resume settings, increase

speed

Standby mode, on/off

Set time interval

Activating and setting the speed

Set speed (in brackets = standby mode)

Set time interval during adjustment

Set time interval after adjustment

Activating and setting the speed In order to enable the activation of cruise con-

trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode

with the button . The symbol illuminates

in the display and the characters (—) show

that cruise control is in standby mode.

Cruise control is then activated with or ,

after which the current speed is stored and is

used as the set speed. The display characters

(—) change to show the set speed, e.g. 100.

The car symbol is illuminated

on the left-hand side of the

display when the radar sensor

has detected another vehicle.

The distance to vehicles in

front is only regulated when

the symbol is illuminated.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adjusting the set speed In active mode the speed is adjusted with long

or short presses on , or . In active

mode the button has the same function as

but results in a lower increase in speed.

NOTE

If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. one minute then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to then reset cruise control.

In some situations cruise control cannot be activated. In which case Cruise control Unavailable is shown in the display, see page 160.

Set time interval The set time interval to vehicles in front is

increased with and decreased with .

Five different time intervals

can be chosen from and

shown in the display as 15

horizontal lines the more

lines there are the longer the

time interval, see page 162

for table.

At low speed, when the distances are short, the

adaptive cruise control increases the time

interval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time

interval to vary noticeably in certain situations

in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in

front smoothly and comfortably.

Note that a short time interval only allows the

driver a short reaction time if any unforeseen

traffic problem should arise.

The number of lines for the

selected time interval is

shown during the setting itself

and for several seconds after-

wards. Then a smaller scale

version of the symbol is

shown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown when

Distance Alert is activated, see page 162.

NOTE

Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations.

If cruise control does not seem to react to activation the reason may be that the time interval to the closest vehicle prevents an increase in speed.

The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a specific time interval.

Deactivating and resuming settings Cruise control is deactivated, either with a

short press on , or by means of driver inter-

vention, e.g. braking. The set speed is then

shown in brackets, e.g. (100). Speed and time

interval are resumed with one press on .

For each additional press on , when cruise

control is activated, the set speed increases in

stages of 1 km/h.

NOTE

A significant increase in speed may arise

after the speed has been resumed with .

A short press on in standby mode or a long

press in active mode deactivates cruise con-

trol. The set speed is cleared and cannot be

resumed.

Deactivation due to driver intervention Cruise control is deactivated when the brakes

are used, the gear selector is moved to neutral

position, or if the accelerator pedal is

depressed for a longer period. Cruise control

then changes over to standby mode and the

driver must regulate vehicle speed manually.

If the accelerator pedal is kept depressed for a

shorter period, for example during overtaking,

cruise control is temporarily disengaged and

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal is

released.

Automatic deactivation Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other

systems e.g. stability and traction control sys-

tem (DSTC). If any of these systems stop work-

ing then cruise control is automatically deacti-

vated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal

will sound and the message Cruise control

Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver

must then intervene and adapt the speed to

vehicles in front.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

speed falls below 30 km/h

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

engine speed is too low

the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

The radar sensor and its limitations

Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the

radar sensor is also used by the Collision

Warning with Auto Brake function (see

page 170) and the Distance Alert function (see

page 162). It is designed to detect cars or

larger vehicles driving in the same direction.

Modification of the radar sensor could result in

it being illegal to use.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be installed in front of the grille.

The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi-

cles in front is reduced significantly:

if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have col- lected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean.

if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed.

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In

some situations it may detect another vehicle

later than expected or not detect any vehicle at

all.

G 02

14 14

Radar sensor field of vision (grey).

Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect

vehicles at close quarters, for example a

vehicle that drives in between your car and

vehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane

can remain undetected.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

In bends the radar sensor may detect the

wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle

from view.

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Radar

blocked See manual this means that the

radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked

and that vehicles in front of the car could not

be detected.

In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise

Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning

with Auto Brake functions are not operating

either.

The table presents possible causes for a mes-

sage being shown along with the appropriate

action.

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or

snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig-

nals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy

road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no

longer blocked.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.

Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.

Set time interval, during adjustment.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

Symbol Message Specification

Set time interval, after adjustment.

Turn on DSTC

to enable Cruise

Cruise control cannot be activated until the traction control and stability function (DSTC) has been

activated.

Cruise control

Cancelled

The cruise control has been shut down.

The driver must regulate the speed.

Cruise control

Unavailable

Cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked

See manual

Cruise control temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 159.

Cruise control

Service required

Cruise control not working.

Contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

162

General

Distance Alert is a function that indicates the

time interval to vehicles in front.

The distance information is only provided for

vehicles driving in front of the car and in the

same direction. No distance information is pro-

vided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-

cles.

A small section of the red warning lamp in the

windscreen illuminates with a constant glow

when driving closer than the set time interval to

vehicles in front.

NOTE

Distance Alert is deactivated during the time that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above

30 km/h.

WARNING

Distance Alert only shows the distance to vehicles in front the speed of the car is not affected.

Operation

Press the button in the centre console to switch

the function on or off. The function is switched

on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Set time interval The buttons for setting the time interval to vehi-

cles in front are located to the left in the steer-

ing wheel. Time intervals are increased using

and decreased using .

Five different time intervals

can be chosen from and

shown in the display as 15

horizontal lines the more

lines there are the longer the

time interval.

Number of lines Time interval (seconds)

1 1.0

2 1.4

3 1.8

4 2.2

5 2.6

The number of lines for the

selected time interval is

shown during the setting itself

and for several seconds after-

wards. Then a smaller scale

version of the symbol is

shown to the right of the dis-

play. The same symbol is also shown when

adaptive cruise control is activated.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

163

NOTE

The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a specific time interval.

The set time interval is also used by the adaptive cruise control function, see page 157.

Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations.

Limitations

The function uses the same radar sensor as

adaptive cruise control and the collision warn-

ing system. For more information on the radar

sensor and its limitations, see page 159.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the

radar sensor’s capacity to detect vehicles in

front. The size of other vehicles could also

affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles.

This could mean that the warning lamp illumi-

nates at a shorter distance than the setting or

that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can also cause the

lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than

that set due to limitations in sensor range.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Set time interval, during adjustment.

Set time interval, after adjustment.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

164

Symbol Message Specification

Radar blocked.

See manual

Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 159

Collision warn. Service

required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

General

City Safety is a function for helping the driver

to avoid a collision when driving in queues,

amongst other things, when changes in the

traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in atten-

tion, could lead to an incident.

The function is active at speeds of up to

30 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically

braking the car in the event of imminent risk of

collision with vehicles in front, should the driver

not react in time by braking and/or steering

away.

City Safety is activated in situations where

the driver should have started braking earlier,

which is why is cannot help the driver in every

situation.

City Safety is designed to be activated as

late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary

intervention.

City Safety must not be used as an excuse

for the driver to change his/her driving style. If

the driver solely relies on City Safety to do

the braking, there will be a collision sooner or

later.

The driver or passengers normally only notice

City Safety if a situation arises where the car

is extremely close to being in a collision.

If the car is also equipped with a Collision

Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two

systems complement each other. For more

information on Collision Warning function with

Auto Brake, see page 170.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per- formed by a workshop — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING

City Safety does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road condi- tions.

City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles or to humans and animals.

City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h — at a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for main- taining the proper distance and speed.

Function

Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window.

City Safety detects the traffic in front of the

car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of

the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of

collision, City Safety will automatically brake

the car with approx. 50% of maximum brake

force.

If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation

to the vehicle in front then City Safety can

completely prevent a collision.

City Safety activates a short, sharp braking

and stops the car in normal circumstances, just

behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this

is well outside normal driving style and may be

experienced as being uncomfortable.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety

166

If the difference in speed between the vehicles

is 15-30 km/h, City Safety may not prevent

the collision on its own. To obtain full brake

force, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

This could make it possible to prevent a colli-

sion even at speed differences above

15 km/h.

When the function is activated and brakes, the

instrument panel display shows a message to

the effect that the function is/has been active.

NOTE

The brake lights come on when City Safety brakes the car.

Operation

NOTE

The City Safety function is always ena- bled after the engine has been started via key position I and II (see page 73 on key positions).

On and Off In certain situations, it may advisable to disable

City Safety, e.g. for driving off-road where

leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet/

windscreen or similar.

G 02

14 09

Display and direction indicator stalk.

Thumbwheel

RESET button

With the engine running City Safety can be

disabled as follows:

1. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to City Safety on the display.

2. Hold the RESET button depressed for 1 second to switch to Off.

However, the function will be enabled the next

time the engine is started, regardless of

whether the system was enabled or disabled

when the engine was switched off.

WARNING

The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City Safety is disabled manually.

To enable City Safety again:

Follow the same procedure as for disa- bling, but select the On option with the RESET button.

Switch off the engine and take out the remote control key to position 0, then re- insert it to position II and start the engine — by which means City Safety is re-ena- bled (see page 73 on key positions).

Limitations

The sensor in City Safety is designed to

detect cars and other large vehicles in front of

the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.

However, the sensor has limitations and has

poorer functionality in e.g. heavy snowfall or

rain, dense fog, dust storms or snow flurries.

Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may

disrupt the function.

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for

projecting load, or accessories such as auxili-

ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the

bonnet limit the function.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety

167

The infrared light from the sensor in City

Safety measures how the light is reflected.

The sensor cannot detect objects with low

reflection capacity. The rear sections of the

vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently

thanks to the number plate and rear light reflec-

tors.

On slippery road surfaces the braking distance

is extended, which may reduce the capacity of

City Safety to avoid a collision. In such sit-

uations the ABS and DSTC systems will pro-

vide best possible braking force with main-

tained stability.

When the car is reversing City Safety cannot

be activated.

City Safety is not activated at low speeds —

under 4 km/h, which is why the system does

not intervene in situations where a vehicle in

front is being approached very slowly, e.g.

when parking.

Driver commands are always prioritised, which

is why City Safety does not intervene in sit-

uations where the driver is steering, braking or

accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli-

sion is unavoidable.

When City Safety has prevented a collision

with a stationary object the car remains sta-

tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car

is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving,

then speed is reduced to the same speed as

that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops

when City Safety has stopped the car, unless

the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal

beforehand.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice, snow and dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca- tion, page 165).

Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor

Remove ice and snow from the bonnet — snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.

Fault tracing and action If the message Windscreen Sensors

blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis-

play, it indicates that the laser sensor is

blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of

the car. This means that City Safety is not

operational.

The Windscreen Sensors blocked message

is not shown for all situations in which the laser

sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be

diligent about keeping the windscreen and

area in front of the laser sensor clean.

The following table presents possible causes

for the message being shown, along with sug-

gestions for appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-

face in front of the

laser sensor is dirty

or covered with ice

or snow.

Clean the wind-

screen surface in

front of the sensor

from dirt, ice and

snow.

The laser sensor

field of vision is

blocked.

Remove the block-

ing object.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety

168

IMPORTANT

If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor’s «windows» and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for repair or replacement of the windscreen (see the illustration for sensor location, page 165) — an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended. Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.

To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety performance the following also applies:

The same type or a Volvo-approved windscreen must be fitted during replacement

The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

Laser sensor

The City Safety function includes a sensor

which transmits laser light. It is absolutely

essential to follow the prescribed instructions

when handling the laser sensor.

WARNING

Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magni- fying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instru- ments — this would involve a risk of eye injury (the illustration on page 165 shows sensor location).

For more information on the laser sensor, see

page 8.

Symbols and messages in the display

In conjunction with automatic braking by the

City Safety system, one or more symbols

may illuminate on the instrument panel and a

message may appear on its display.

A text message can be acknowledged by

briefly pressing the READ button on the direc-

tion indicator stalk.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety

169

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.

Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.

Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 166.

City Safety Service

required

City Safety is not operational.

Visit a workshop if the message remains — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

City Safety ON/OFF City Safety can be manually disabled/enabled, whereby OFF or ON is selected, see section «On/

Off».

City Safety Unavailable If the text Unavailable is shown instead of Off or On, City Safety is switched off due to a technical

fault.

City Safety Service required is shown in the instrument panel display prior to this.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed

to assist the driver when there is a risk of col-

liding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or

driving in the same direction.

The collision warning system has the following

three functions.

Collision warning warns the driver of a potentially imminent collision.

Brake support assists the driver to brake effectively in a critical situation.

Auto Brake brakes the car automatically when a collision is unavoidable. The Auto Brake function cannot prevent a collision but instead aims to reduce collision speed.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of collision warning system components must only be performed at a workshop — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING

The collision warning system does not work in all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to people and animals.

Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. The Function section and the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using Collision Warning with Auto Brake.

The Auto Brake function can only reduce the collision speed. The driver must depress the brake pedal to achieve full brake function.

Never wait for a collision warning. When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is used.

Function

Functions overview.

Visual warning signal in the event of a col-

lision risk

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

Collision warning Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen-

sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi-

cles driving in the same direction in front of the

car. In the event of there being a risk of collision

with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with

a red flashing warning lamp and a warning

sound.

The collision warning system is active from and

including 7 km/h.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

Brake support If the risk of collision still increases after the

collision warning then the brake support is acti-

vated. The brake support prepares the brake

system for rapid braking and the brakes are

applied gently, which may be noticed as a

slight jerk.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently

quickly then full brake function is implemented,

even with light pedal force.

Auto Brake If the driver has not yet started an evasive

manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a

collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func-

tion comes into effect, without the driver need-

ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then

takes place with limited brake force in order to

reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake

in order to achieve full brake force.

Operation

Settings are made from the centre console dis-

play via a menu system. For information on

how the menu system is used, see page 120.

NOTE

The Auto Brake function is always switched on and cannot be switched off.

On and Off To select whether the collision warning system

should be switched on or off: Under the Car

settings Collision warning settings menu,

select between the options for On or Off. The

setting selected when the engine was switched

off is automatically obtained when the engine

is started.

Activating/deactivating warning signals The warning sound and warning lamp are acti-

vated automatically when the engine is started

if the system is switched on.

The warning sound can be activated/deacti-

vated separately using the options for On or

Off under Car settings Collision warning

settings Warning sound.

Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at

which the visual and acoustic warnings are

deployed. Select one of the options from

Long, Normal or Short under Car settings

Collision warning settings Warning

distance.

The warning distance determines the system’s

sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an

earlier warning. First test with Long and if this

setting produces too many warnings, which

could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-

uations, then change to warning distance

Normal.

Only use warning distance Short in excep-

tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli- sion warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.

In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4 5. see page 162.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set to Long then in certain situations warnings could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the event of large differences in speed or if vehi- cles in front brake heavily.

Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the

centre console display. Access via the menu

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

for Car settings Collision warning

settings, see page 120.

Limitations

The visual warning signal may be difficult to

notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec-

tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn-

ing sound should therefore always be acti-

vated.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.

Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.

WARNING

Warnings and braking action could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a vehicle in front correctly.

The sensor system has a limited range for stationary or slow vehicles so the system provides less effective warnings or no warn- ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above 70 km/h) for such vehicles.

Warnings for stationary or slow vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness.

The collision warning system uses the same

radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For

more information on the radar sensor and its

limitations, see page 159.

An absent or late warning could mean that

there is no brake support or it comes late.

If warnings are perceived as being too frequent

or disturbing then the warning distance can be

reduced. This would lead to the system warn-

ing at a later stage, which reduces the total

number of warnings.

Camera sensor limitations The car’s camera sensor is used by the three

functions — Collision Warning with Auto Brake,

Driver Alert Control, see page 175 and Lane

Departure Warning, see page 178.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor, as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera-dependent systems.

The camera sensors have limitations similar to

the human eye, i.e. they «see» worse in dark-

ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for

example. Under such conditions the functions

of camera-dependent systems could be sig-

nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car-

riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty

road surfaces or unclear lane markings could

also significantly reduce a camera sensor func-

tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage-

way and detecting other vehicles for example.

During very high temperatures the camera is

temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes

after the engine is started in order to protect

camera functionality.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen

Sensors blocked then this means that the

camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect

vehicles or road markings in front of the car.

In turn this means that the Collision Warning

with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and

Driver Alert Control functions are not operating

with full functionality.

The table presents possible causes for a mes-

sage being shown along with the appropriate

action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-

face in front of the

camera is dirty or

covered with ice or

snow.

Clean the wind-

screen surface in

front of the camera

from dirt, ice and

snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain

or snow means that

the camera does not

work sufficiently

well.

No action. At times

the camera does not

work during heavy

rain or snowfall.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur-

face in front of the

camera has been

cleaned but the

message remains.

Wait. It may take

several minutes for

the camera to meas-

ure the visibility.

Dirt has appeared

between the inside

of the windscreen

and the camera.

Visit a workshop to

have the windscreen

inside the camera

cover cleaned — an

authorised Volvo

workshop is recom-

mended.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Collis’n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Message Specification

Auto braking was acti-

vated

Auto Brake has been active.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.

Radar blocked. See man-

ual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush

has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 159.

Collision warn. Service

required

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System DAC*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

Introduction

The Driver Alert System is intended to assist

drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or

who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are

driving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-

ent functions, which can either be switched on

at the same time or individually:

Driver Alert Control (DAC)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see page 178.

A switched-on function is set in standby mode

and is not activated automatically until speed

exceeds 65 km/h.

The function is deactivated again when speed

decreases to below 60 km/h.

Both functions use a camera which is depend-

ent on the lane having side markings painted

on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance.

The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely.

General information on Driver Alert Control — DAC

G 01

73 32

The function is intended to attract the driver’s

attention when he/she starts to drive less con-

sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or

starts to fall asleep.

A camera detects the side markings painted on

the carriageway and compares the section of

the road with the driver’s steering wheel move-

ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does

not follow the carriageway evenly.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations, see page 172.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete-

riorating driving ability and it is primarily

intended for major roads. The function is not

intended for city traffic.

In some cases driving ability is not affected

despite driver fatigue. In which case there may

not be any warning issued for the driver. For

this reason it is always important to stop and

take a break in the event of any signs of driver

fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC

issues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend a driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular intervals and ensure that you are fully rested.

Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning

despite driving ability not deteriorating, for

example:

if the driver tests the LDW function.

in strong side winds.

on rutted road surfaces.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System DAC*

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

Some settings are made from the centre con-

sole display and its menu system. For informa-

tion on how the menu system is used, see

page 120.

The current status can be checked on the trip

computer display with the left-hand stalk

switch.

Thumbwheel. Turn the rotary control until

the display shows Driver

Alert. The second row displays the Off, U

navailable or Level mark options.

READ button. Confirms or clears a warning

in the memory.

Activating Driver Alert Control Using the centre console display with its menu

system, locate Car settings Driver Alert.

Select the On option.

The function is activated when speed

exceeds 65 km/h and it remains

active as long as the speed exceeds

60 km/h. The display shows a level

mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of bars

indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high

number of bars indicates stable driving.

If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the

driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as

the text message Driver Alert Time for a

break. The warning is repeated after a time if

driving ability does not improve.

WARNING

An alarm should be taken most seriously as a sleepy driver is not usually aware of his/ her condition.

In the event of an alarm or signs of driver fatigue; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive when tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.

Driver Alert Unavailable Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor

is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System DAC*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

Symbol Message Specification

Driver Alert The function analyses the driver’s driving style.

The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent

driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently; the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System — LDW*

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on Lane Departure Warning — LDW

The function is intended to reduce the risk for

single-vehicle accidents accidents where, in

certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car-

riageway and is in danger of driving either into

a ditch or into oncoming traffic.

LDW consists of a camera that detects the side

markings painted on the carriageway. The

driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the

vehicle crosses a side marking.

Operation and function

The function is switched on or off by means of

a switch on the centre console. An indicator

lamp in the button illuminates when the func-

tion is switched on.

The trip computer display shows Lane Depart

Warn Unavailable when the function is in

standby mode.

The LDW function is activated automatically

from standby mode after the camera has scan-

ned in the carriageway’s side markings and

speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer

display then shows Lane Depart Warn

Available.

If the camera can no longer detect the carria-

geway’s side markings or if speed decreases

to below 60 km/h then the function resumes

standby mode and the display shows Lane

Depart Warn Unavailable.

If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side

marking of the carriageway without due cause

then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.

No warning is given in the following situations:

Direction indicators activated

The driver has his/her foot on the brake

pedal1

In the event of the accelerator pedal being

depressed rapidly1

In the event of rapid steering wheel move-

ments1

In the event of a sudden turn so that the car rolls.

The camera sensor also has certain limitations.

For more information, see page 172.

NOTE

The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car’s wheels.

1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 180.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System — LDW*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol Message Specification

Lane departure warning

On/Off

The function is switched on/off.

Shown at switch-on/off.

The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Availa-

ble

The function scans the carriageway’s side markings.

Lane Depart Warn Unavail-

able

Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor

is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 172.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System — LDW*

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Personal preferences

See the centre console display with its menu

system and there search for Car settings

Lane departure warning, see page 120.

Select the option required:

On at start up: This option sets the function in

standby mode each time the car is started.

Otherwise the same value as when the engine

was switched off is obtained.

Increased sensitivity: This option increases

sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and

fewer limitations apply.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

General

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.

An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the

audio system display indicate the distance to

the detected obstacle.

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only

Both front and rear.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver’s own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren and animals near the car.

Function

The system is automatically activated when the

car is started and the switch’s On/Off lamp is

illuminated. If parking assistance is switched

off with the button, the lamp goes out.

The centre console display shows an overview

of the relationship between the car and

detected obstacle.

Marked fields show which of the four sensors

detected an obstacle. The more marked fields

in the same bar, the shorter the distance

between the car and detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases the

shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of

or behind the car. Other sound from the audio

system is muted automatically.

Active

Display screens in different situations.

Display in car with only rear sensors.

Obstacle detected by both right-hand sen-

sors.

Display in car with both front and rear sen-

sors. The front right-hand sensor is 30 cm

or closer to a detected obstacle.

Display in car with both front and rear sen-

sors. Reverse gear engaged, no front or

rear obstacle detected.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is

constant and the marked sensors’ bar is fully

filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle

is within the distance for the constant tone both

behind and in front of the car, then the tone

sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rear parking assistance

The distance covered to the rear of the car is

about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for

obstacles behind comes from the rear loud-

speakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated when

reverse gear is engaged.

The system must be deactivated when revers-

ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar

or similar -otherwise they would trigger the

sensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used.

Front parking assistance

The distance covered to the front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for

obstacles in front comes from the front loud-

speaker.

Front parking assistance is active at speeds up

to 15 km/h, and also during reversing. The sys-

tem is deactivated at a higher speed. However,

the lamp in the button remains illuminated in

order to indicate that the system is activated

for the next time the driver shall park. When the

speed is below 10 km/h the system is reacti-

vated.

NOTE

Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied.

IMPORTANT

When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that they must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles.

Fault indicator

If the information symbol illuminates

with constant glow and the informa-

tion display shows Park assist syst Service

required then parking assistance is disen-

gaged.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183

Cleaning the sensors

G 03

14 02

Sensor location, front.

Sensor location, rear.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to

ensure that they work properly. Clean them

with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist camera*

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on PAC

The PAC (Park Assist Camera) displays what is

behind the car during reversing by means of a

display screen.

Using references lines in the display screen,

the system also indicates where the car will end

up based on steering wheel movement. This

makes it easier to parallel park, reverse into

tight spaces or connect a trailer.

PAC can also be installed on cars equipped

with Volvo genuine GPS navigator RTI* — Road

and Traffic Information System.

WARNING

The parking camera serves as an aid. It does not relieve the driver of responsi- bility when reversing.

The camera has blind spots, where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car.

Function

The driver has the facility to see what is behind

the car and if something appears from the

sides.

The parking camera is mounted at the opening

handle of the tailgate.

The camera’s strong wide-angle lens shows a

wide area behind the car as well as its bumper

and towbar.

The system’s electronic image processing cor-

rects the «fisheye» effect of the camera image

to display a natural image. As a result, objects

on the screen may appear to be tilted. This is

perfectly normal.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

Light conditions The camera automatically detects light condi-

tions and continually adjusts sensitivity.

Because of this, the image may vary slightly in

brightness and quality. In poor light conditions

or darkness, the camera compensates by

increasing light sensitivity, which could reduce

image quality.

If the display screen seems too dark, bright-

ness can be increased with the thumbwheel for

instrument lighting, see page 80.

NOTE

In poor light conditions, it is extremely important that the camera lens is free of dirt, snow and ice.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist camera*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

Operation

Activation The parking camera is activated when reverse

gear is engaged, if the function is preselected

in the menu system, see page 120.

If RTI is active, the PAC system automatically

takes over and the camera image appears on

the display screen instead of navigation sys-

tem information.

Deactivation The camera works with a delay. This means

that the image behind the car may be shown

even if reverse gear has been disengaged in

order to drive the car forward a little.

After reversing is complete, the camera image

remains for approx. 5 seconds or until speed

exceeds 10 km/h.

The system then resumes whatever mode was

active prior to reverse gear engagement — e.g.

the RTI system is reactivated.

Guide lines

The lines on the screen are projected as if they

were at ground level behind the car and are

directly related to steering wheel movement,

which shows the driver the path the car will

take, even when turning.

NOTE

When reversing with a trailer, the lines on the screen show the path of the car — not the trailer.

The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected to the car’s electrical sys- tem.

IMPORTANT

Bear in mind that the screen only shows the area behind the car — pay attention to the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring during reversing.

Boundary lines

PAC system lines.

Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards

from the car

Boundary line, free reversing zone

«Wheel tracks»

The unbroken line (1) frames in a zone that is

within about 30 cm from the bumper.

The dashed line (2) frames in an obstacle-free

zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist camera*

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

It is also the limit of the car’s most protruding

parts, such as door mirrors and corners — also

during turning.

The wide «wheel tracks» (3) between the side

lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can

extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no

obstacle is in the way.

Cars equipped with Park Assist

If the car is also equipped with Park Assist* rear

(see page 181) the distance indication will be

more precise and the coloured areas show

which of the four sensors is/are registering an

obstacle.

The colour changes with decreasing distance

to the obstacle — from yellow to orange to red.

YELLOW: 1.5> m

ORANGE: 0.3-1.5 m

RED: <0.3 m.

Settings To set system activation, press MENU and go

to Main menu Car settings . Select from

the following options:

Parking camera settings

Select Park Assist lines to show side lines when reversing.

Select Distance Bars to show distance

lines when reversing1.

System activation

Select Automatic for PAC to be active during reversing.

Select Off for PAC to be permanently off.

Limitations

NOTE

A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera’s view.

Even if it only looks like a relatively small part

of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively

large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta-

cles could thereby go undetected until they are

very close to the car.

To bear in mind

Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.

Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo — take care not to scratch the lens.

1 Only if Park Assist is installed.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

General information on BLIS

G 03

14 04

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

BLIS is an information system based on cam-

era technology that under certain conditions

can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in

the same direction as the host vehicle in the so-

called «blind spot».

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by a workshop — an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver’s attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

The system is designed to work most effec-

tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane

highways.

When a camera has detected a vehicle

inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp

illuminates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault

arises in the system. If for example the sys-

tem’s cameras are obscured then the BLIS

indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown

on the information display. In such cases,

check and clean the lenses.

If necessary, the system can be switched off

temporarily by pressing the BLIS button once,

see page 187.

Blind spots

G 01

78 34

A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m

Activating/deactivating

Button for activating/deactivating.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

BLIS is activated when the engine is started.

The indicator lamps in the door panels flash

three times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activated

when the engine is started by pressing the

BLIS button.

When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button

goes out and a text message is shown on the

dashboard display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the button

illuminates, a new text message is shown on

the display and the indicator lamps in the door

panels flash three times. Press the READ but-

ton to clear the text message. For more infor-

mation on messages, see page 123.

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven at

a speed above 10 km/h.

Overtaking The system is designed to react if:

you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle

you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of

the surrounding vehicles. The system is

designed to detect motor vehicles such as

cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head-

lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched

on then the system does not detect the vehi-

cles. This means for example that the system

does not react to a trailer without headlamps

which is towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds.

The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by intensive light or when driving in the dark when there are no light sources (e.g. street lighting or other vehicles). The system may then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- eras have been blocked.

In both cases a message is shown in the information display.

When driving in such conditions system performance may be temporarily deterio- rate and a text message is shown, see page 188. If the message disappears auto- matically then BLIS has returned to normal functionality.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they «see» worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.

Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-

era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be

cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.

Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not

scratched.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.

Messages on the display

Message Specification

Blind-spot info

system ON

BLIS system on

Blind spot syst.

Service required

BLIS not function-

ing.

Contact a workshop

— an authorised

Volvo workshop is

recommended.

Blind spot syst.

Camera blocked

The BLIS camera is

blocked by dirt,

snow or ice. Clean

the lenses.

Message Specification

Blind spot syst.

Reduced function

The BLIS camera is

disrupted by fog or

strong sunlight shin-

ing directly into the

camera.

The camera resets

itself when the envi-

ronment has

returned to normal.

Blind-spot info

system OFF

BLIS system off

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may

illuminate despite there being no other vehicle

within the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text Blind spot syst. Service required.

Here are several examples of situations where

the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if

there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

191

Storage spaces

G 03

14 33

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Storage compartment in door panel

Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat

cushions

Ticket clip

Glovebox

Storage compartment, cup holder

Jacket holder

Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

Jacket holder The jacket holder is only designed for light

clothing.

Tunnel console

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and

USB*/AUX input under the armrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and passen-

ger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are

specified then there is a cigarette lighter in

the 12 V socket for the front seat, see

page 193, and a detachable ashtray in the

cup holder.)

Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal

objects in the cup holder as such objects could

accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 59.

Cigarette lighter and ashtray* The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached

by lifting the tray straight up.

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.

The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull

out the lighter and light a cigarette on the

heated coils.

Glovebox

The owner’s manual and maps can be kept

here for example. There are also holders for

pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can

be locked with the key blade, see page 47.

Floor mats*

Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor

mats.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193

WARNING

The floor mat at the driver’s seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.

Vanity mirror

G 02

14 38

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver’s

side* and passenger side respectively, is

switched on automatically when the cover is

raised.

12 V socket

G 03

14 35

12 V socket, front seat.

G 02

14 40

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

The electrical socket can be used for 12 V

accessories, such as mobile phone chargers

and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For

the socket to supply current, the remote con-

trol key must be in at least key position I, see

page 73.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

Electrical socket in cargo area*

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket. It works even when the remote control

key is not in the ignition switch.

NOTE

Remember not to use the electrical socket with the engine switched off because of the risk of discharging the car’s battery.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

System overview.

Mobile phone

Microphone

Steering wheel keypad

Centre console

BluetoothTM

A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM

can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-

tem. The audio system then works handsfree,

with the option to control a range of the mobile

phone’s functions remotely. The mobile phone

can be operated by its own keys irrespective of

whether or not it is connected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.

Phone functions, controls overview

Centre console control panel.

VOLUME Same functionality available in

steering wheel keypad.

Number and letter buttons

PHONE — On/off and standby mode

Navigation button

EXIT — End/refuse phone calls, clear

entered characters, interrupt current func-

tion. Same functionality available in steer-

ing wheel keypad.

ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but-

ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same

functionality available in steering wheel

keypad.

Remember

The menus are controlled from the centre con-

sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-

eral information on menus, see page 120.

Activating/deactivating A short press on PHONE activates the hands-

free function. The text PHONE at the top of the

display shows that it is in phone mode. The

symbol shows that the handsfree func-

tion is active.

One long press on PHONE deactivates the

handsfree function and disconnects a con-

nected phone.

Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways

depending on whether or not it has been con-

nected previously. To connect a mobile phone

for the first time, follow the instructions below:

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

Alternative 1 — via the car’s menu system

1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible

via BluetoothTM, see mobile phone manual

or www.volvocars.com.

2. Activate the handsfree function with

PHONE.

> Menu option Add phone appears on

the display. If one or more mobile

phones have already been registered

then these are also shown.

3. Select Add phone.

> The audio system searches for mobile

phones in the vicinity. The search takes

approximately 30 seconds. The mobile

phones detected are specified with their

respective BluetoothTM name in the dis-

play. The handsfree function’s

BluetoothTM name is shown in the

mobile phone such as My Car.

4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the

audio system display.

5. Enter the number series shown in the audio

system display via the mobile phone key-

pad.

Alternative 2 — via the phone’s menu system

1. Activate the handsfree function with

PHONE. If there is a phone connected,

disconnect the connected phone.

2. Search with the phone’s BluetoothTM, see

the mobile phone manual.

3. Select My Car in the list of units detected

in your mobile phone.

4. Enter the PIN code ‘1234’ into the mobile

phone when prompted for the PIN code.

5. Select to connect to My Car from the

mobile phone.

The mobile phone is registered and connected

automatically to the audio system while the text

Synchronising is shown in the display. For

more information on how mobile phones are

registered, see page 197.

When the connection is established the symbol

is shown and the mobile phone

BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now

the mobile phone can be controlled from the

audio system.

To call 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown

at the top of the display and that the

symbol is visible.

2. Dial the number or use the phone book,

see page 197.

3. Press ENTER.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the

mobile phone moves out of the audio system’s

range. For more information on connection,

see page 197.

Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-

vating the handsfree function with one long

press on PHONE. The handsfree function is

also deactivated when the engine is switched

off or when a door is opened1.

When the mobile phone has been discon-

nected an ongoing call can be continued with

the mobile phone’s built-in microphone and

speaker.

1 Only Keyless Drive.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone’s keypad.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming call Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the

audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.

Refuse or end with EXIT.

Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that

calls are accepted automatically.

Activate/deactivate under Phone settings

Call options Automatic answer.

In call menu Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call

to access the following functions:

Mute microphone — audio system micro- phone is muted.

Transfer call to mobile — the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.

NOTE

With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.

Phone book searching in the phone book.

NOTE

A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.

Audio settings

Phone call volume The call volume can be regulated when the

handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the

steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.

Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place,

the audio system volume is controlled as usual

with VOLUME. In order to control audio system

volume during an ongoing call you have to

switch to one of the audio sources.

The audio source can be automatically muted

for incoming calls under Phone settings

Sounds and volume Mute radio.

Ring volume

Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume

Ring volume and adjust with / on the

navigation button.

Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-

nals that can be selected under Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

signals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc.

NOTE

The connected mobile phone’s ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system’s integrated signals is used.

In order to select the connected phone’s ring

signal2, go to Phone settings Sounds and

volume Ring signals Use mobile

phone signal.

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197

More on registering and connecting

A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg-

istered. Registration is performed once per

phone. After registration the phone no longer

needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of

one mobile phone can be connected at a time.

Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth

Remove phone.

Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the

last mobile phone connected is in range it is

connected automatically. When the audio sys-

tem searches for the last phone connected its

name is shown in the display. To change over

to manual connection of another phone, press

EXIT.

Manual connection If you want to connect a mobile phone other

than the last connected or change the con-

nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:

1. Set the audio system in phone mode.

2. Press PHONE and select one of the

phones in the list.

The connection can also be made via the menu

system under Bluetooth Connect phone

or Change phone.

Phone book

All use of the phone book presupposes that the

text PHONE is shown at the top of the display

and that the symbol is visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phone

book from each registered mobile phone. The

phone book is copied automatically to the

audio system during each connection.

Deactivate the function under Phone

settings Synchronise phone book.

Searching for contacts is only performed in

the connected mobile phone’s phone

book.

NOTE

If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller’s

contact information then this is shown in the

display.

Searching for contacts The easiest way to search in the phone book is

with long presses on the keys 29. This starts

a search in the phone book based on the key’s

first letter.

The phone book can also be reached with /

on the navigation button or with / on

the steering wheel keypad. The search can also

be performed from the phone book’s Search

menu under Phone book Search:

1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and

press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to

call.

Voice recognition The mobile phone’s voice recognition function

for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.

Voice mail number Voice mail number can be changed under

Phone settings Call options Voice mail

number. If there is no number stored then this

menu can be reached with one long press on

1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored

number.

Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-

tion at each new connection and are then

updated during the connection. Press ENTER

to show the last dialled. Other call lists are

available under Call register.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree*

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled calls in reverse order.

Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre con-

sole. Press once for the key’s first character,

twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for

more characters, see the following table.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-

acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input

characters. / on the navigation button

scrolls between the characters.

Key Function

Space . 1 — ? ! , : » ‘ ( )

A B C 2

D E F 3

G H I 4

J K L 5

M N O 6

Key Function

P Q R S 7

T U V 8

W X Y Z 9

Pressed briefly if two characters

shall be entered after each other

with the same key.

+ 0 @ * # & $ / %

Shift between upper and lower

case letter

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

General

System overview.

Microphone

SIM card reader

Keypad, see page 137.

Control panel

Privacy handset

Safety Engage a workshop to perform the service via

the phone. Volvo recommends that you seek

assistance from an authorised Volvo work-

shop. The built-in phone must be switched off

during refuelling or in the vicinity of blasting

work. IDIS limits the menu system depending

on the speed of the car, see page 201.

Remember

SIM card The phone can only be used with a valid SIM

card Subscriber Identity Module. For installa-

tion, see page 202. Emergency calls to emer-

gency numbers can be made without a SIM

card.

NOTE

The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact the network operator if the SIM card needs to be changed.

Menus and controls The menus are navigated using the control

panel and the steering wheel keypad.

For general information on menus, see

page 120. For information on the phone’s con-

trols, see page 194.

On/Off Switch on the phone with a short press on

PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The

symbol shows that the phone is switched

on. When this symbol is shown calls can be

received even if the CD menu for example is

shown in the display. Briefly press PHONE to

use the phone menus and to dial out. The text

PHONE shows that the phone menu is active.

Switch off the phone with one long press on

PHONE.

Making and receiving calls

Making calls 1. Switch on the phone.

2. If PHONE is not shown in the display,

briefly press PHONE.

3. Dial the number or use the phone book,

see page 200.

4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up

the privacy handset. Release the handset

by pulling it down.

Ending a call End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up

the privacy handset.

Incoming call Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the

privacy handset. If the privacy handset is off

the hook when the phone rings then calls must

be received using ENTER.

End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up

the privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT.

Automatic answer See page 196.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Call waiting The function enables a new call to be answered

during an ongoing call. The new call is

answered as usual and the previous call is put

on hold.

Activate/deactivate under Phone settings

Call options Call waiting.

Automatic diversions Incoming calls can be diverted automatically

depending on the type of call and situation.

Activate/deactivate under Call options

Diversions.

During a call

Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access

the In-call menu.

To call 1. Put the call on hold under Hold.

2. Dial the number of the third party or use the

Phone book menu option.

Switch between calls using the Swap menu

option.

Conference call A conference call consists of several parties. It

can be initiated when a call is underway and

another is on hold. The Join menu option starts

the conference call.

All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con-

ference call is terminated.

Switching between the privacy handset

and handsfree Switch from handsfree to the privacy handset

by picking up the privacy handset or selecting

in the menu.

Switch from the privacy handset to handsfree

using the Handsfree menu option.

Mute mode Mute mode involves deactivating the micro-

phone, see page 199.

Activate/deactivate the microphone using

the Microphone On/Off menu option.

Audio settings

Phone call volume The phone uses the front door speakers. Call

volume can be controlled when the text

PHONE is shown at the top of the display.

Use the steering wheel keypad or

VOLUME.

Audio system volume See page 138.

Signals and volume Change the ring signal under Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring signals.

Activate/deactivate the message beep under

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Message beep.

Control the ring volume under Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring volume.

Adjust using / on the navigation button.

Phone book

Contact information can be stored on the SIM

card or in the phone.

Storing contacts in the phone book 1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book

New contact.

2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor-

mation on text input, see below.

3. Enter a number and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and

press ENTER.

Inputting text See page 198.

Searching for contacts See page 197.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

Erasing contacts Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting

it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to Erase and press ENTER.

Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase

SIM or Erase phone.

Copying entries between the SIM card

and the phone book

Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to

phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.

Voice mail number See page 197.

Other functions and settings

IDIS IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System)

can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse

ring signals from incoming calls. This way less

attention is distracted from driving.

IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings

IDIS.

Reading messages 1. Scroll to Messages Read and press

ENTER.

2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.

3. The message text is shown in the display.

Additional selections can be made by

pressing ENTER.

Writing and sending messages 1. Scroll to Messages Write new and

press ENTER.

2. Enter text and press ENTER. For informa-

tion on text input, see page 198.

3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.

4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.

Message settings Message settings are not normally changed.

The network provider has further information

on these settings. There are three options

under Messages Message settings:

SMSC number — Specifies the message centre which will transfer the messages.

Validity time — Specifies how long the message will be stored in the message centre.

Message type.

Call lists Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are

stored in Call register. Dialled calls are also

shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num-

bers in the lists can be saved in the phone

book.

Call duration

Call duration is stored under Call register

Call duration.

Reset the values under Call register

Call duration Reset timers.

Show/hide number for third party The phone number can be temporarily hidden

under Call options Send my number.

IMEI number In order to block a phone the network provider

must be advised of the phone’s IMEI number.

Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis-

play. Write it down and keep it in a safe

place.

Network selection The network can be selected either automati-

cally or manually under Phone settings

Network selection.

SIM code and security The PIN code can protect the SIM card from

unauthorised use.

The code can be changed under Phone

settings Edit PIN code.

Change the security level under Phone

settings SIM security.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone*

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Select maximum security with the On option.

The code will then need to be entered each

time the phone is switched on.

Select the next highest security level with the

Automatic option. The phone then stores the

code and automatically specifies it when the

phone is switched on. When the SIM card is

used with another phone the code must be

entered manually.

Select minimum security with the Off option.

The SIM card can then be used without the

code at all.

Reset to factory settings The phone settings are fully reset under Phone

settings Reset phone settings.

Installing the SIM card

G 02

14 50

G 02

14 51

Make sure that the phone is deactivated.

Pull out the SIM card holder which is

located in the glovebox.

Place the SIM card with the metal surface

visible and fit the cover on the SIM card

holder . Refit the SIM card holder.

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

203

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Recommendations during driving………………………………………………… 206

Refuelling…………………………………………………………………………………. 208

Fuel…………………………………………………………………………………………. 209

Loading……………………………………………………………………………………. 212

Cargo area……………………………………………………………………………….. 213

Warning triangle*……………………………………………………………………….. 217

Driving with a trailer…………………………………………………………………… 218

Towing and recovery………………………………………………………………….. 224

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

Economical driving Economical driving and reducing environmen-

tal impact result from driving gently with antic-

ipation and adapting your driving style and

speed to the current situation (for further

advice on how you can reduce environmental

impact, see page 10).

Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light loads as soon as it is possible.

A cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the car.

Do not use winter tyres when the roads are dry.

Remove the load carrier when it is not in use.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches its normal operat- ing temperature more quickly.

Driving in water The car can be driven through water at a maxi-

mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of

10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised

when passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed

and do not stop the car. When the water has

been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly

and check that full brake function is achieved.

Water and mud for example can make the

brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake

function.

Clean the electric contacts of the electric

engine block heater and trailer coupling after

driving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills

for any long period of time. This could cause

electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.

In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart — tow the car from the water to a workshop — an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.

Engine and cooling system Under special conditions, for example when

driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with

heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and

cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol-

lows to avoid overheating the engine:

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine’s cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in extreme high temperatures.

Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm (3500 rpm for diesel engines) if driving with a trailer or caravan in hilly ter- rain. The oil temperature could become too high.

Open tailgate Avoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is how-

ever necessary, only drive for a short distance.

Close all windows, set the air distribution to the

windscreen and floor and run the fan at the

highest speed.

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

207

WARNING

Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Do not overload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the bat-

tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition

position II when the engine is switched off. Use

ignition position I instead, as less power is con-

sumed.

Also, be aware of different accessories that

load the electrical system. Do not use functions

which use a lot of power when the engine is

switched off. Examples of functions that use a

lot of power:

ventilation fan

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume)

parking lamps

If the battery voltage is low, a message appears

on the information display. The energy-saving

function shuts down certain functions or

reduces certain functions such as the ventila-

tion fan and audio system. Charge the battery

by starting the engine.

Before a long journey

Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal.

Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).

Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.

Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries.

Winter driving Check the following in particular before the

cold season:

The engine coolant must contain at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine down to approximately 35 C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see page 278.

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather pla- ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.

To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-

ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels

if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in certain countries.

Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under

controlled conditions to learn how the car

reacts.

05 During your journey

Refuelling

208

Refuelling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the

lighting panel. The filler flap is located on the

right-hand rear wing, as indicated by the sym-

bol’s arrow in the information display.

Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a

click confirms that it is closed.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in

the event of high outside temperatures. Open

the cap slowly.

After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one

or more clicking sounds are heard.

Filling up with fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump

nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Opening the fuel filler flap manually

The fuel filler flap can be opened manually

when electric opening from the passenger

compartment is not possible.

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).

2. Locate the green cord with handle.

3. Pull it straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a «click».

05 During your journey

Fuel

209

General information on fuel

Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended

by Volvo must not be used as engine power

and fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel splashing in the eyes.

If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo’s guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car’s performance.

Petrol

Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most

engines can be run with octane ratings of 95

and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in

exceptional cases.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C,

fuel with the highest possible octane rating is

recommended for optimum performance and

fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.

Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.

Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to

purify exhaust gases. They are located close to

the engine so that operating temperature is

reached quickly.

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith

(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel

walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-

dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,

i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-

ical reaction without being used up them-

selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system

intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel

economy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content

of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This

value is fed into an electronic system that con-

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel

to air directed to the engine is continuously

adjusted. These adjustments create optimal

conditions for efficient combustion, and

05 During your journey

Fuel

210

together with the three-way catalytic converter

reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car-

bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

Diesel

Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204

standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con-

taminants, such as excessively high volumes

of sulphur particles for example. Only use die-

sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use

diesel of dubious quality.

At low temperatures (-6 C to -40 C), a paraffin

precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which

may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel

fuel designed for low temperatures around

freezing point is available from the major oil

companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-

peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-

cipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is

reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When

refuelling, check that the area around the fuel

filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the

paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-

gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used:

Special additives

Marine Diesel Fuel

Fuel oil

RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- ble oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Empty tank Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-

vation, the fuel system needs a few moments

to carry out a check. Proceed as follows before

starting the engine:

1. Add at least 5 litres of diesel to the fuel tank.

2. Place the remote key in the ignition switch and push it gently so that it is pulled in (see page 73).

3. Press the START button without depress- ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.

4. Wait approx. 1 minute.

5. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/ or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the

fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-

tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet

or if you suspect that the car has been filled

with contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,

which results in more efficient emission con-

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

05 During your journey

Fuel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211

trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col-

lected in the filter during normal driving. So-

called «regeneration» is started in order to burn

away the particles and empty the filter. This

requires the engine to have reached normal

operating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-

ically at an interval of approximately

300-900 km depending on driving conditions.

Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It

may take a little longer at a low average speed.

Fuel consumption may increase slightly during

regeneration.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in

cold weather then the engine does not reach

normal operating temperature. This means that

regeneration of the diesel particle filter does

not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately

80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the

instrument panel illuminates, and the message

Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the

instrument panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car

until the engine reaches normal operating tem-

perature, preferably on a main road or motor-

way. The car should then be driven for approx-

imately ca 20 minutes more.

When regeneration is complete the warning

text is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that

the engine reaches normal operating tempera-

ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning. Then there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.

Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide

Fuel consumption figures may change if the car

is equipped with extra equipment that affects

the car’s weight. See information on weights

page 274 and table page 282.

The manner in which the car is driven, and

other non-technical factors can also affect fuel

consumption.

Consumption is higher and power output lower

for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car’s performance.

05 During your journey

Loading

212

General

Payload depends on the car’s kerb weight. The

total of the weight of the passengers and all

accessories reduces the car’s payload by a

corresponding weight. For more detailed infor-

mation on weights, see page 274.

WARNING

The car’s driving characteristics change depending on the weight and distribution of the load.

Loading the cargo area The boot lid can be opened via a but-

ton on the lighting panel or the

remote control key, see page 54.

Position the load firmly against the back- rest in front.

Put wide loads in the centre.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

Always secure the load.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads. Never load cargo above the backrest. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car’s occupants.

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car’s occupants.

Protect sharp edges with something soft.

Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load and cause a gear to engage and the car to move off.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear

seats of the car can be folded down, see

page 77.

Securing loads

Each corner of the cargo area has attachment

points intended for the anchorage of loads.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are loose or protrude could cause injury during heavy braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

05 During your journey

Cargo area

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213

Bag holder*

G 01

77 45

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.

The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and

prevents them from overturning and spreading

their contents across the cargo area.

1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor in

the cargo area.

2. Tension and secure the carrier bags using

the strap.

Safety net*

G 03

42 13

The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.

A safety net prevents loads or pets from being

thrown forward in the passenger compartment

in the event of sudden braking. For safety rea-

sons, the safety net must always be correctly

fastened and secured.

The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and

can be secured two different locations in the

car:

Rear fitting — Behind the rear seat backrest

Front fitting — Behind the front seat backr- ests.

WARNING

Loads in the cargo area must be firmly secured, even if the safety net is correctly fitted.

Installation

NOTE

The safety net is most easily fitted via one of the rear doors.

WARNING

Make sure that the upper mountings of the safety net are correctly fitted and that the anchoring straps are securely fastened.

Do not use a damaged net.

1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that

the split upper rod is locked in extended

position.

2. Hook one end of the rod into the front or

rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap

locks turned towards you.

3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof

mounting on the opposite side — the tele-

scopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facil-

itate alignment.

05 During your journey

Cargo area

214

Take care to press forward the rod’s retain-

ing hooks for each respective roof moun-

ting’s front end position.

Rear fitting.

4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear

roof mountings, hook the safety net’s

anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in

the cargo area.

Front fitting.

Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front

roof mountings, hook the safety net’s

anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear

of the seat slide rails — it is easier if the

backrests are straightened and the seats

are moved forward slightly.

Pay attention to make sure that you do not

press the seat/backrest hard against the

net when the seat/backrest is moved back

again — only adjust until the seat/backrest

makes contact with the net.

IMPORTANT

If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back- wards against the safety net then the net and/or its roof mountings could be dam- aged.

5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring

straps.

Removal and storage

The safety net can be easily removed and folded up.

Release the tension in the net by pressing

in the button on the anchoring strap’s lock

and feeding out part of the strap.

Press in the catch and detach both of the

anchoring strap’s hooks.

05 During your journey

Cargo area

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

Break the rod in the centre, fold it together

and roll up the net.

The folded safety net can be stored under the

cargo compartment floor.

Safety grille*

G 03

19 78

A safety grille prevents loads or pets from

being thrown forward in the passenger com-

partment in the event of sudden braking. For

safety reasons, the grille must always be

mounted and secured correctly.

Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and

pull back/up.

IMPORTANT

The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted.

Installation

G 01

83 67

G 01

83 68

G 01

83 69

NOTE

The safety grille is most easily fitted and removed by two people via the rear doors.

When fitting, the handle, see

illustration , must be on the front of the grille.

The backrests must be lowered to allow the

safety grille to be fitted, see page 77.

Position the handle in fitting position, see

illustration. Press gently on the handle to

enable it to be turned into position, see

arrow.

Press the strut in towards the grille and

align the grille in the roof mounting.

Turn the handle 90 . Press gently as in

the illustration (1) if necessary. Secure the

grille by angling the handle 90 .

05 During your journey

Cargo area

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Removal Removal of the grille takes place in reverse

order to the description in the related section

entitled «Installation».

Cargo cover*

G 03

19 77

Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it

into the holes by the rear pillars in the cargo

area.

IMPORTANT

The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted.

Fitting the cargo cover Move one end piece of the cover into the

recess on the side panel.

Move the other end piece into the corres-

ponding recess.

Press both sides in. A «click» should be

audible and the red marking should disap-

pear.

> Check that both end pieces are locked.

Removing the cargo cover 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.

2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the

other end piece loosens automatically.

Lowering the cargo cover’s rear sealing

disc In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover’s rear

sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the

cargo area when it is fitted.

Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from

its support shelves, and lower.

Long load

The passenger seat backrest can also be

folded for an extra long load, see page 75.

Roof load

Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum

possible safety while driving, the load carriers

Carefully follow the installation instructions

supplied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car’s centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads.

For information on maximum permitted roof load, including load carriers and any space box, see page 274.

05 During your journey

Warning triangle*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217

Lift the floor mat and take out the warning

triangle.

Take the warning triangle from the case,

fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle’s support

legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning

triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit-

able place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are

properly secured in the cargo area after use.

First aid*

A case with first aid equipment is located under

the floor in the cargo area.

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

218

General

Payload depends on the car’s kerb weight. The

total of the weight of the passengers and all

accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car’s

payload by a corresponding weight. For more

detailed information on weights, see

page 274.

If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then

the car is delivered with the necessary equip-

ment for driving with a trailer.

The car’s towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure label location, see page 263.

Clean the towing bracket regularly and grease the towball.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

If the car is driven with a heavy load in a hot climate, the engine may overheat. If the temperature in the engine’s cooling system is too high the warning symbol is illumi- nated and the information display shows High engine temp Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down. If High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop engine are shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.

The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro- tection system that engages in the event of overheating. If the temperature in the gear- box is too high the warning symbol is illu- minated and the information display shows Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely. Follow the instructions and reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down. In the event of overheating the car’s air condi- tioning may be temporarily switched off.

In the interests of safety, you should restrict speed to 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries allow for higher speeds.

Move the gear selector to position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car’s towing

bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has

7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved

by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag

on the ground.

Direction indicators and brake lights on

the trailer If any of the trailer’s lamps for direction indica-

tors are broken, then the combined instrument

panel’s symbol for direction indicators flashes

faster than normal and the display shows the

text Bulb fail — Ind. signal trailer.

If any of the trailer’s lamps for the brake light

are broken then the Bulb fail — Stop lamp

trailer text is shown.

Automatic gearbox

Parking on a hill 1. Activate the parking brake.

2. Move the gear selector to position P.

Starting on a hill 1. Move the gear selector to position D.

2. Release the parking brake.

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

219

Steep inclines

Do not use a higher manual gear than the engine can «handle». It is not always eco- nomical to drive in high gears.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

Level control The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant

height irrespective of the car’s load (up to the

maximum permissible weight). When the car is

stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,

which is normal.

Trailer weights National vehicle regulations can limit trailer

weights and speeds. The towbar can be certi-

fied for a higher towing weight than the car can

actually tow. For Volvo’s permitted trailer

weights, see page 276.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

Towing bracket

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,

the towball mounting instructions must be fol-

lowed carefully, see page 220.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.

The towball section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks

The towball section’s towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.

Storing the towball section

G 03

17 13

Towball section storage location.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towball section after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

220

Specifications

G 02

14 85

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 1013

B 69

C 855

D 428

E 109

F 296

G Side member

H Ball centre

Installing the towball

G 01

89 28

Remove the protective cover by first press-

ing in the catch and then pulling the

cover straight back .

G 02

14 87

Ensure that the mechanism is in the

unlocked position by turning the key clock-

wise.

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

221

G 02

14 88

The indicator window must show red.

G 02

14 89

Insert the towball section until you hear a

click.

G 02

14 90

The indicator window must show green.

G 00

00 00

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-

tion. Remove the key from the lock.

G 02

14 94

Check that the towball section is secure by

pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towball section should be clean and dry.

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

222

G 02

14 95

Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer’s safety cable to the correct place.

Removing the towball

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position.

Push in the locking wheel and turn it

anticlockwise until you hear a click.

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it

comes to a stop. Hold it in this position

while pulling the towball rearward and

upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar’s loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 219.

G 01

89 29

Push the protective cover until it snaps

tight.

Trailer Stability Assist — TSA

The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves

to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it

begins to snake.

The TSA function is part of the DSTC system

(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see

page 152.

Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any

car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking

occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is

a risk of it occurring at lower speeds

(70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the

load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be a

triggering factor, e.g.:

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

223

Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.

Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.

Sweeping steering wheel movements.

Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or

even impossible to suppress. This makes the

car/trailer combination difficult to control and

there is a risk that you could, for example, end

up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.

TSA system continually monitors car move-

ments, particularly lateral movements. If snak-

ing is detected, the front wheels are individually

braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer

combination. This is often enough to help the

driver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time the

TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer

combination is braked with all wheels and

engine power is reduced. Once snaking has

been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer

combination is once again stable, the TSA sys-

tem stops regulating and the driver once again

has full control of the car.

Miscellaneous The TSA system can engage within the speed

interval 60 to 160 km/h.

NOTE

If the driver selects to switch off (reduce) the DSTC system, then the TSA system is also switched off, see page 152.

TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe

steering wheel movements to try to rectify the

snaking because in such a situation the TSA

system cannot determine whether it is the

trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.

The DSTC symbol in the combined

instrument panel flashes when the

TSA is working.

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

224

Towing

Find out the highest legal speed for towing

before towing the car.

1. Press the remote control key into the igni-

tion switch to unlock the steering lock so

that the car can be steered, see page 73.

2. The remote control key must remain in the

ignition switch while the car is being towed.

3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently

depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent

jerks.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch to unlock the steering lock (so that the car can be steered) before towing.

WARNING

The steering lock remains in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering lock must be unlocked before tow- ing. The remote control key must be in key position II. Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Move gear lever into neutral and release

the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Move the gear selector to position N and

release the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.

Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start it. Use a donor

battery if the battery is discharged to the extent

that the engine does not start, see page 102.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.

Towing eye

Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed

on the road. The towing eye is attached in the

recess on the right-hand side of the front or

rear bumper.

Fitting the towing eye

Take out the towing eye from its storage

space under the floor hatch in the cargo

area.

> In some cases, the towing eye may be

hidden under the sill.

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

225

Use a slotted screwdriver or a coin to

detach the cover at its bottom edge.

Screw in the towing eye firmly, right in up

to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to

tighten the towing eye.

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store a detachable towbar towball in the car.

Recovery

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.

WARNING

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads — not for recovering the car. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

G 02

09 22

226

Engine compartment………………………………………………………………….. 228

Lamps……………………………………………………………………………………… 234

Wiper blades and washer fluid…………………………………………………….. 241

Battery……………………………………………………………………………………… 243

Fuses……………………………………………………………………………………….. 246

Wheels and tyres………………………………………………………………………. 254

Car care…………………………………………………………………………………… 265

06 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

06 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

228

General

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi-

ble, follow the Volvo service programme as

specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised

Volvo workshop to perform the service and

maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the

personnel, special tools and service literature

to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular

intervals, e.g. when refuelling:

Coolant

Engine oil

Power steering fluid

Washer fluid

WARNING

Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

Raising the car

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack other than one recommended by Volvo is selected, then follow the instructions included with the equipment.

If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-

tion the jack against the front edge on the

engine’s subframe.

Do not damage the splashguard under the

engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi-

tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.

Always use axle stands or similar.

If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop

lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are

fixed under the lifting points on the door sill.

See preceding illustration.

Opening and closing the bonnet

06 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

229

G 03

19 11

Pull the handle by the pedals. An informa-

tion symbol lights when the bonnet is open,

see page 68.

Move the catch to the left and open the

bonnet. (The catch hook is located

between the headlamp and grille, see illus-

tration.)

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Engine compartment, overview

The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick

Radiator

Filler opening for engine oil

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand

drive)

Battery

Relay and fuse box, engine compartment

Filling washer fluid

Air filter

WARNING

High voltage output from the ignition sys- tem. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The remote control key must therefore always be in position 0 dur- ing work in the engine compartment, see page 73.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the remote control key is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot.

Checking the engine oil

G 02

17 33

Label for oil grade.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

When driving under adverse conditions, see

page 280.

06 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

230

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine’s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting cha- racteristics, fuel consumption and environ- mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low

oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants

have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp

for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an

oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed

via the warning symbol in the centre of the

instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer-

tain models have both variants. Contact a

Volvo dealer for more information.

Filling and dipstick

Petrol engine.

Diesel engine.

Change in accordance with the intervals speci-

fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

IMPORTANT

When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled must have the same grade, see page 280.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especially

important before the first scheduled oil change.

The most accurate measurements are made on

a cold engine before starting. The measure-

ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately

after the engine is switched off. The dipstick

will indicate that the level is too low because

the oil has not had time to flow down into the

oil sump.

G 02

17 37

The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.

Park the car on a level surface, switch off the

engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil

06 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

231

time to run back to the sump. For capacities,

see page 280 and onwards.

Checking with a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean.

2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must

be between the MIN and MAX marks.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start

by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up

until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN

on the dipstick.

IMPORTANT

Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

Checking with a warm engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean.

2. Check the oil level using the dipstick.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start

by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up

until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN

on the dipstick.

Coolant

Checking and topping up the coolant

When topping up the coolant, follow the

instructions on the packaging. It is important

that the mixture of coolant concentrate and

water is correct for the prevailing weather con-

ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk

of freezing increases with both too little and too

much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see

page 280.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures can occur, causing a risk of dam- age (cracks) to the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding

water quality, see page 280.

Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system is

06 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

232

not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could

occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

Brake and clutch fluid

Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-

voir. The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir.

Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at

every other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade,

see page 280. The fluid should be changed

annually on cars driven in conditions requiring

hard, frequent braking, such as driving in

mountains or tropical climates with high

humidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec- ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Filling

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver’s side.

The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover

over the cold section in the engine compart-

ment. The round cover must be removed first

before the reservoir cap can be reached.

1. Turn and open the cover located on the

covering.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.

The level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks, which are located on the

inside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Do not forget to refit the cap.

Power steering fluid

IMPORTANT

Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not

require changing. The fluid level must be

06 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

233

between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci-

ties and recommended fluid grade, see

page 280.

NOTE

If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed, it can still be steered.

06 Maintenance and service

Lamps

234

General

All bulbs are specified, see page 240. Bulbs

and spotlights that are of a special type or that

are only suitable for replacement by a work-

shop are:

General interior lighting in the roof, reading lamps

Glovebox lighting

Direction indicators, door mirror

Approach lighting

Brake light, fog lamp, reversing lamp

Rear side position lamps, position lamps

Xenon, Active Xenon lamps

LED lamps, general

WARNING

On cars with Dual Xenon headlamps, Dual Xenon lamp replacement must be carried out at a workshop — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The headlamps must be handled with extreme caution due to the Dual Xenon lamp’s high-voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Front lamp housing

All front bulbs (except those for fog lamps) are

replaced by first removing the whole lamp

housing from the engine compartment.

WARNING

Always switch off the ignition and remove the remote control key before starting to replace a bulb.

Removing the headlamp 1. Press quickly on the START-/STOP

ENGINE button and remove the remote

control key.

2. (Upper illustration)

Withdraw the lamp housing’s locking

pins.

Pull the lamp housing straight forward.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector

3. (Lower illustration)

Detach the lamp housing connector by

pressing down the clip with your thumb.

At the same time, guide out the con-

nector with your other hand.

4. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a

soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

5. Replace the bulb in question, see

page 240.

06 Maintenance and service

Lamps

235

Installing the headlamp

When installing, check that the long lock pin is

engaged — it should be engaged in both eyes.

1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound

should be heard.

2. Reinstall the lamp housing and locking

pins. Check that they are correctly

inserted.

3. Check the lighting.

The lamp housing must be plugged in and

installed before the lighting is switched on or

the remote control key is inserted into the igni-

tion switch.

Removing the cover

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 234.

1. Release the catches by pressing out.

2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out.

Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Dipped beam, halogen

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder

downwards.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it

in. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

06 Maintenance and service

Lamps

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Main beam, Halogen

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise

and then pulling straight out

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket

and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It

can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Extra main beam, Xenon*

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Remove the cover, see page 235.

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight

out.

5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the

socket. It can only be secured in one posi-

tion.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Direction indicators/flashers

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-

clockwise.

3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the

bulb.

4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in

and turning anticlockwise.

5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-

wise.

6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

06 Maintenance and service

Lamps

237

Side marker lamps

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 234.

1. Detach the headlamp.

2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and

remove it.

3. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.

It can only be installed in one way.

4. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and turn

clockwise.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Front fog lamps

Undo the cover by pulling out the top corner,

closest to the grille, see the illustration above.

1. Pull the cover straight out in the direction

of the centre of the car using a tool, see the

illustration above.

> (Secure the tool (1) and pull straight out

(2).)

2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and

remove the fog lamp.

3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.

4. Fit a new bulb and turn clockwise.

5. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the

bulb holder must always be upward.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the

bumper

1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-

clockwise.

2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in

and turning anticlockwise.

3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-

wise.

4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

06 Maintenance and service

Lamps

238

Location of rear bulbs

Lamp lens, right-hand side

Position (LED)/side marker lamps

Side reflector, rear

Brake light

Reversing lamp

Indicator

Brake light (LED)

Brake lights and reversing lamps

Both the brake light and the reversing lamp

bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Open the panel.

2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-

clockwise.

3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in

and turning anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-

wise.

5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

Number plate lighting

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing

and withdraw it.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it

into place.

06 Maintenance and service

Lamps

239

Courtesy lighting

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

page 234.

1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the

lens closest to the tunnel console and turn

gently so that the lens comes loose.

(Applies to both lamps).

2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the lens.

Lighting, cargo area

G 03

19 42

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so

that the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press

back the lamp housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Removing the mirror glass

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower

edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the

lug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge

on the left and right-hand sides (by the

black rubber sections), and prize carefully

so that the glass comes loose in the lower

edge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire

mirror glass and cover.

4. Replace the bulb.

Fitting the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir-

ror glass back into position.

06 Maintenance and service

Lamps

240

2. Then press the three lower lugs back into

position.

Specification, bulbs

Lighting W Type

Extra main beam,

Xenon, ABL

65 H9

Dipped beam, hal-

ogen

55 H7 LL

Main beam, Halo-

gen

65 H9

Front direction

indicators

21 PY21W

Front fog lamps 35 H8

Courtesy lighting,

cargo area lighting,

number plate light-

ing

5 Tubular

lamp

SV8.5

Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubular

lamp

SV5.5

Lighting W Type

Front side marker

lamps

5 W3WLL

Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular

lamp

SV8.5

06 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades and washer fluid

241

Wiper blades

Service position In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades

(for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they

must be in service position.

1. Turn the remote control key to position 0,

see page 73, and keep the remote control

key in the ignition switch.

2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for

about 1 second. The wipers then move to

standing straight up.

The wipers return to the starting position when

the car is started.

Replacing the wiper blades

Turn up the wiper arm. Press the button

located on the wiper blade mounting and

pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a «click»

is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

G 02

17 63

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer than the blade on the passenger side.

06 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades and washer fluid

242

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window

G 03

27 70

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the

arrow).

3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade’s end

position against the wiper arm as a lever to

detach the blade more easily.

4. Press the new wiper blade into position.

Check that it is firmly installed.

5. Lower the wiper arm.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see

page 265.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.

Filling washer fluid

The windscreen and headlamp washers share

a common reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

For capacities, see page 280.

06 Maintenance and service

Battery

243

Warning symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information in the

owner’s manual.

Store the battery out of

the reach of children.

The battery contains cor-

rosive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked

flames.

Risk of explosion.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner — it contains lead.

Operation

Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.

The service life and function of the battery is

influenced by factors such as the number of

starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-

ditions, climatic conditions etc.

IMPORTANT

Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.

WARNING

Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If sul- phuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

06 Maintenance and service

Battery

244

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits star- ting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Changing

Removal

Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.

Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.

Release the rubber moulding so that the

rear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by screwing one

quarter turn and lifting it away.

06 Maintenance and service

Battery

245

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.

Detach the black negative cable

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-

tery

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

Installation

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the

clamp.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See

Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See Removal).

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

246

General

All electrical functions and components are

protected by a number of fuses in order to pro-

tect the car’s electrical system from damage by

short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does not

work, it may be because the component’s fuse

was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the

same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault

in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit

an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side

to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse

of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Location, fuse boxes

Location of fuse boxes, left-hand drive.

If the car is right-hand drive, the fuse box

changes to under the side of the glovebox.

Under the glovebox

Engine compartment

Cargo area

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

247

Engine compartment

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General fuses, engine compartment On the inside of the cover are tweezers that

facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses.

Positions (see preceding illustration) Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. Fuses in are located under

Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the «Midi Fuse» type and must only be replaced by a work- shop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

8-15 and 34 are of the «JCASE» type and the recommendation for changing is that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

16 33 and 35 41 are of the «MiniFuse» type.

Function A

Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50

Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50

Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60

Primary fuse RJBB KL30 60

Function A

Primary fuse RJBD KL30 50

— —

PTC Air preheater* 100

— —

Windscreen wipers 30

Parking heater* 25

Ventilation fan 40

— —

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

— —

Headlamp levelling*

(Xenon, Dual Xenon)

Primary fuse CEM 20

Radar, ACC control mod-

ule*

Function A

Speed related power

steering*

Engine Control Module

(ECM), transm. SRS

Heated washer nozzles* 10

— —

Lighting panel 5

Headlamp washers* 15

12 V socket, front and rear

seat

Sunroof*, Roof console/

ECC*

Relay, engine compart-

ment box

Auxiliary lamps* 20

Horn 15

Engine Control Module

(ECM)

Control module, auto-

matic gearbox*

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

249

Function A

Compressor A/C 15

Relay coils 5

Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

EGR, VTC, Glow system

(5-cyl. diesel), Bypass

engine cooling system (4-

cyl. diesel)

Engine control module,

Throttle petrol

Engine control module,

Throttle diesel

Injection system, Mass air

flow sensor

Engine valves 10

EVAP, Lambda-sond,

Injection (petrol)

Lambda-sond (4-cyl. pet-

rol, 5-cyl. diesel)

Function A

Crankcase ventilation

heater (5-cyl. petrol)

— —

Diesel filter heater, crank-

case ventilation heater (5-

cyl. diesel)

— —

Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70

— —

Cooling fan (4 — 5-cyl. pet-

rol)

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Under the glovebox

1. Fold aside the interior trim covering the

fuse box.

2. Press the cover’s lock and fold it up.

3. The fuses are accessible.

Positions

Function A

Rain sensor* 5

SRS system 10

ABS brakes 5

Function A

Accelerator pedal, air

heater (PTC)*, heated

seats*

7,5

— —

ICM display, CD & RadioA 15

Steering wheel module 7,5

— —

Main beam 15

Function A

Sunroof* 20

Reversing lamps 7,5

— —

Fog lamp, front* 15

Windscreen washers 15

Adaptive cruise control,

ACC*

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251

Function A

— —

Roof lighting, control panel

driver’s door/Power pas-

senger seat*

7,5

Information display 5

Power driver’s seat* 5

Windscreen wiper, rear 15

Remote control key

receiver, alarm sensors*

Fuel pump 20

Electric steering lock 20

— —

Lock, tank/tailgate 10

Alarm siren*, ECC 5

Start/stop button 5

Brake light switch 5

A Not Premium or High Performance.

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cargo area

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery

on the left-hand side.

Positions

(black) A

Control panel, driver’s door 25

Control panel, passenger

door

Control panel, rear door, left 25

(black) A

Control panel, rear door,

right

— —

12 V socket, cargo area,

refrigerator*

Rear window defroster 30

— —

(black) A

Trailer socket 2* 15

Power seat driver’s side* 25

Trailer socket 1* 40

POT (automatic tailgate

opening)*

06 Maintenance and service

Fuses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253

(white) A

Parking assistance*, Parking

camera*

Control module Four C* 15

Seat heating, driver’s side

front*

Seat heating, passenger side

front*

Seat heating right rear* 15

AWD control module 10

Seat heating left rear* 15

— —

Power seat passenger side* 25

Keyless drive* 20

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

(blue) A

Display RTI* 10

— —

Bass speaker* 25

DAB radio 5

Audio amplifier* 25

Audio systemA 15

Phone, Bluetooth* 5

—

A High Performance and Premium.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

254

General

Tyres greatly affect the car’s driving characte-

ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres-

sure and speed rating are important for how the

car performs.

Direction of rotation

G 02

17 78

The arrow shows the tyre’s direction of rotation.

Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed

to only turn in one direction have the direction

of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must

always rotate in the same direction throughout

its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched

between front and rear positions, never

between left and right-hand sides, or vice

versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the

car’s braking characteristics and capacity to

force rain and slush out of the way are

adversely affected.

NOTE

Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures

specified in the tyre pressure table, see

page 264.

Tyre care

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be

checked by an expert even if they seem

undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even

if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-

tion can therefore be affected. This also applies

to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for

future use. Examples of external signs which

indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are

cracks or discoloration.

New tyres

G 02

18 23

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they

begin to harden at the same time as the friction

capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.

For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as

possible when you replace them. This is espe-

cially important with regard to winter tyres. The

last four digits in the sequence mean the week

and year of manufacture. This is the tyre’s

DOT marking (Department of Transportation),

and this is stated with four digits, for example

1502. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-

tured in week 15 of 2002.

Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed,

see page 257, the wheels should be marked

with which side of the car they were mounted

on, for example L for left and R for right.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

255

Wear and maintenance The correct tyre pressure results in more even

wear, see page 263. Driving style, tyre pres-

sure, climate and road condition affect how

quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-

ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear

patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can

be switched with each other. A suitable dis-

tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km

and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop for checking if you are uncertain

about tread depth.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging

up — and not standing up.

WARNING

A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car.

Tyres with tread wear indicators

G 02

18 29

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless

bands across the width of the tread. On the

side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear

Indicator). When the tyre’s tread depth is down

to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height

with the tread wear indicators. Change to new

tyres as soon as possible. Remember that

tyres with little tread depth provide very poor

grip in rain and snow.

Rims and wheel bolts

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved by

Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso-

ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu-

minium and steel rims.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular

dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent

on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,

the correct tyres must be fitted to all four

wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for

500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into

the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the

studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-

peratures place considerably higher demands

on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there-

fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres

that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime-

tres.

Using snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the front

wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow

chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this

wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space

between the brake discs and the wheels is too

small.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed specifically for the car model, and tyre and wheel rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recom- mends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop.

IMPORTANT

Only single-sided snow chains are permit- ted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or sim- ilar that are properly suited to the car model, tyre size and wheel rim size. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop.

Tools

A foam block contains all the tools. The tools

consist of a towing eye, jack* and wheel

wrench*. The foam block is screwed into a

bracket in the bottom of the spare wheel well.

Jack* The original jack should only be used for

changing wheels. The jack’s thread must

always be well greased.

Spare wheel*

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only

intended for temporary use. Replace the spare

wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible.

The car’s handling may be altered by the use

of the spare wheel. The correct tyre pressure

for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pres-

sure table, see page 264.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel

well with the outside down. Two foam blocks,

one under the spare wheel and one over/inside

affix the spare wheel in position. The upper one

contains all tools.

The same bolt runs through to secure the spare

wheel and the foam blocks.

Taking out the spare wheel 1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear

and forwards.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257

2. Undo the retaining screw.

3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

The lower foam block does not need to be lifted

out.

Tools — returning into place

G 02

93 36

The tools and jack* must be returned to their

correct places after use. The jack must be

cranked together to the correct position in

order to have space.

The foam block and spare wheel must be

replaced in the reverse order to taking out.

Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam

block. It must point forwards in the car.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car’s cargo area when not in use.

Changing wheels

Removing

Set up the warning triangle, see page 217 if a

wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The

car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur-

face.

1. Apply the parking brake and engage first

gear, or position P if the car has an auto-

matic gearbox.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question.

2. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel

wrench* that are located under the cargo

area floor in the cargo area. If another jack

is selected, see page 228.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheels which will remain on the ground.

Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

258

4. Loosen the wheel nuts 1 turn anticlock-

wise with the wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack- ing point and the jack.

5. There are two jacking points on each side

of the car. There is a recess in the plastic

cover at each point. Crank the foot of the

jack down so it is pressed squarely on the

ground.

Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as

illustrated and that the foot is positioned

vertically under the anchorage.

IMPORTANT

The jack mounting point is the rearmost of the two rear recesses.

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.

Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the

wheel.

Installation 1. Clean the contact surfaces on wheels,

hubs and brake discs.

2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot

rotate.

G 02

29 16

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is

important that the wheel bolts are tight-

ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check

the torque with a torque wrench.

5. Fit on the wheel cover (for cars with steel

rims).

NOTE

The hubcap outlet for the valve must be located over the valve on the rim when fit- ted.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Park the car so that passengers have the car — or preferably a crash barrier — between them and the road.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

Emergency puncture repair*

General The emergency puncture repair kit is used to

seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust

the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor

and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as

a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle

must be replaced before its expiration date and

after use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-

tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited

capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in

the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency

puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,

cracks or similar damage.

12 V sockets for the compressor are located by

the centre console in the front, by the rear seat

and in the cargo area. Choose the electrical

socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

Taking out the emergency puncture

repair kit Set up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf-

ficked location. The emergency puncture

repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo

area.

1. Raise the floor hatch in the cargo area floor.

2. Unscrew the retaining screw.

3. Lift away the foam block holding the jack*

and wheel wrench*.

4. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.

Replace the parts after use.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Overview

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

260

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing punctured tyres

G 01

43 38

For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture

repair kit.

2. Detach the label for maximum permitted

speed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and

locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- ken when the bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the

bottle’s stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel’s dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre’s air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and

start the car.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is operating. If cracks or uneven- ness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not continue. Contacting an author- ised tyre centre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

261

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not continue. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the

pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum

pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is

3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the

cable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit

the valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately

3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so

that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Inflating the tyres The car’s original tyres can be inflated by the

compressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off.

Make sure that the switch is in position 0

and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel’s dust cap and screw

in the air hose valve connection to the bot-

tom of the thread on the tyre’s air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car’s 12 V

sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch

to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on

the tyre pressure label/table, see

page 264. (Release air using the pressure

reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too

high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Rechecking the repair and pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure

gauge.

If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres- sure specified on the tyre pressure label/table, see page 264. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air

hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

4. Return the emergency puncture repair kit

to the cargo area.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

262

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends that you drive to the near-

est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace-

ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the

workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date

has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-

mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.

Specifications

Designation of dimensions The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.

Example of designation:

235/60 R18 103 V.

235 Section width (mm)

60 Ratio between section height and

width (%)

R Radial ply

18 Rim diameter in inches («)

103 Tyre load index

V Speed rating for maximum permitted

speed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratings The car is approved as a whole, which means

that tyre dimensions and speed ratings must

not differ from those specified on the car’s reg-

istration document.

The only exception to these conditions is win-

ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those

without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must

not be driven faster than the speed rating of the

tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a

maximum of 160 km/h).

Traffic regulations determine how fast a car

can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

263

NOTE

It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table.

Tyre pressure

G 02

18 30

The tyre pressure label on the driver’s side door

pillar (between front and rear door) shows

which pressures the tyres should have at dif-

ferent loads and speed conditions, this is also

specified in the tyre pressure table, see below.

Tyre pressure for the car’s recommended tyre dimension

ECO pressure

Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary Spare)

NOTE

Temperature differences change the tyre pressure.

06 Maintenance and service

Wheels and tyres

264

Recommended tyre pressure

Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h)

Load, 1 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA

Front (kPa)B Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa)

All engines 235/65 R 17

235/60 R 18

235/55 R 19

0 160 240 240 270 270 270

160 + 240 240 270 270 —

Spare wheelC T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 —

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the «bar» unit beside the SI unit «Pascal»: 1 bar = 100 kPa. C Temporary spare.

Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre

pressure is recommended (applies for full load

and light load) in order to obtain optimum fuel

economy.

Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pressures must be checked every

month. This also applies to the car’s spare

wheel. After several few kilometres of driving,

the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. «Cold

tyres» means the tyres are the same tempera-

ture as the ambient temperature.

Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-

sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs

the car’s roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre

pressure that is too low could result in the tyres

overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-

sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and

steering characteristics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

06 Maintenance and service

Car care

265

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.

Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.

Use car shampoo.

Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.

Hose down the underbody.

Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when it has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,

as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,

impair the service life of wiper blades.

For cleaning:

Set the wiper blades in service position,

see page 241.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick

way of washing the car, but it cannot reach

everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-

mended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed. This is because the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use

sweeping movements and make sure that the

nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the

surface of the car (the distance applies to all

exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the

locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then

when driving long distances in rain or slush.

The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-

06 Maintenance and service

Car care

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing

after starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo

dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured

plastic parts, rubber and trim components,

such as glossy trim mouldings. When using

such a cleaning agent the instructions must be

followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by

Volvo.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull

or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is

at least one year old. However, the car can be

waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax

the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you

begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt

and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white

spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed

using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint-

work.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-

uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the

packaging carefully. Many preparations con-

tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Water-repellent coating*

Never use products such as car wax,

degreaser or similar on glass surfa-

ces as this could ruin their water-repellent

properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage

the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when

removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellent

coating.

Treatment with a special finishing agent avail-

able from Volvo dealers is recommended in

order to maintain the water-repellent proper-

ties. This should be used first after three years

and then each year.

Rustproofing inspection and maintenance

The car received a thorough and complete

rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body

are made of galvanised sheet metal. The

underbody is protected by a wear-resistant

anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating

rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the

exposed members, cavities, closed sections

and side doors.

06 Maintenance and service

Car care

267

Under normal conditions the rustproofing does

not require treatment for approximately 12

years. After this period, it should be treated at

three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that

you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for

assistance if the car needs further treatment.

Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is

important to keep the car clean. The car’s rust-

proofing needs to be checked regularly and

touched-up if necessary in order for it to be

maintained.

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

and follow the instructions included with the

car care product.

Stains on fabric upholstery and roof

upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent, available from

authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to

avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of

the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic

detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the

seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and

approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex

100 standard.

The leather is refined and processed so that it

retains its natural characteristics. It is given a

protective coating, but regular cleaning is

required in order to maintain both characteris-

tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre-

hensive product for the cleaning and treatment

of leather upholstery which, when used in

accordance with the instructions, preserves

the leather’s protective coating.After a period

of use the natural appearance of the leather will

nevertheless emerge, depending more or less

on the surface texture of the leather. This is a

natural maturing of the leather and shows that

it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends

cleaning and application of the protective

cream once to four times per year (or more if

required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo’s

Leather care product.

IMPORTANT

Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Note that materials with colour that runs when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) may discolour the upholstery material.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened

sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular

movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the

stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the

stain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and

allow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective

cream on the felted cloth and massage in

a thin layer of cream with gentle circular

movements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes

before use.

The leather has now been given improved pro-

tection against stains and improved UV pro-

tection.

06 Maintenance and service

Car care

268

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly

moistened with water, available from Volvo

dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior

parts and surfaces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong

stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail-

able from Volvo dealers can be used for more

difficult cleaning.

Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of

the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a

vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Touching up paintwork

Paint is an important part of the car’s rust-

proofing and should therefore be checked reg-

ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged

paintwork should be rectified immediately. The

most common types of paintwork damage are

stone chips, scratches, and marks on the

edges of wings and doors.

Materials

primer in a can

paint in a can or touch-up pen

brush

masking tape

Colour code

Car colour code

It is important that the correct colour is used.

For product decal location, see page 272.

Repairing stone chips

G 02

18 32

Before work is begun, the car must be clean

and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Then remove the tape to

remove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine

brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a

brush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, but

mask around the damaged area to protect

the undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of lapping paste.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged col- our coat, you can paint straight after clean- ing the damaged surface.

06 Maintenance and service

269

G 00

00 00

270

Type designations……………………………………………………………………… 272

Dimensions and weights…………………………………………………………….. 274

Engine specifications…………………………………………………………………. 277

Engine oil………………………………………………………………………………….. 278

Fluids and lubricants………………………………………………………………….. 280

Fuel…………………………………………………………………………………………. 282

Electrical system……………………………………………………………………….. 283

Type approval…………………………………………………………………………… 284

07 Specifications

Type designations

272

Label location

07 Specifications

Type designations

273

Knowing the car’s type designation, vehicle

identification and engine numbers can facili-

tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer

regarding the car and when ordering spare

parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification

number, maximum permissible weights,

codes for colour and upholstery and type

approval number.

Label for parking heater.

The engine oil label specifies oil grade and

viscosity.

Engine type designation, component and

serial number.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car’s identification number. (VIN Vehicle

Identification Number)

Further information on the car is presented in

the registration document.

NOTE

07 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

274

Dimensions

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2774

B Length 4627

C Load length, floor, folded

rear seat 1789

D Load length, floor 972

E Height 1713

F Load height 802

G Front track 1632

Dimensions mm

H Rear track 1586

I Load width, floor 1090

J Width 1891

K Width including door mir-

rors 2120

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank

90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories,

and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see

table) influences the payload and is not

included in the kerb weight.

Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle

weight — Kerb weight.

07 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

275

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version — i.e. a car with- out extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the acces- sory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car- pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.

WARNING

The car’s driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For information on decal location, see page 272.

Gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 100 kg.

07 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

276

Towing capacity and towball load

Engine Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

All All 01200 50

3.2 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

3.2 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

T6 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

2.4D Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

2.4D Manual, M66 1500 75

D5 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

D5 AWD Manual, M66 1800 90

2.4DA Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

A Only the Netherlands

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50

NOTE

The use of a stabilising device is recom- mended with a trailer heavier than 1800 kg.

07 Specifications

Engine specifications

277

Engine specifications

Model Engine Output (kW/ rpm)

Output (hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/ rpm)

No. of

cyl- in-

ders

Bore (mm)

Stroke (mm)

Swept vol- ume (litres)

Compres- sion ratio

T6 B6304T2 210/5600 285/5600 400/15004800 6 82 93.2 2,953 9.3:1

3,2 B6324S 175/6200 238/6200 320/3200 6 84 96,0 3,192 10.8:1

2.4D D5244T14 129/3000

4000

175/3000

4000

420/15002750 5 81 93.2 2.400 16,5:1

D5 D5244T10 151/4000 205/4000 420/15003250 5 81 93.2 2.400 16,5:1

2.4D D5244T16A 120/4000 163/4000 420/17503000 5 81 93.2 2.400 16,5:1

A Only the Netherlands

07 Specifications

Engine oil

278

Engine oil

Adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-

mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.

Check the oil level more frequently for long

journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C

shorter driving distances (shorter than 10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C).

This can produce abnormally high oil tempera-

ture or oil consumption.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse

driving conditions. It provides extra protection

for the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

G 02

18 34

Viscosity chart.

07 Specifications

Engine oil

279

Oil decal

Engine variant Volume between MIN and MAX (litres)

Volume (litres)

G 03

20 78

When the label shown here is fitted in the car’s

engine compartment then the following applies.

For information on decal location, see

page 229.

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

T6 B6304T2 1.2 7.4

3.2 B6324S 1.2 7.4

2.4D D5244T14 1.5 6.0

D5 D5244T10

07 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

280

Other fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Coolant Petrol engine T6 8.9

Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed

with waterA, see packaging. Diesel engine D5

12,6 Diesel engine 2.4D

Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a)

Oil: PAG

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering Power steering 1.2 WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent prod-

uct.

Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 6.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended

by Volvo, mixed with water. Cars without headlamp washing 4,5

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.

Engine Gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

T6 petrol Automatic, TF-80SC 7.0 JWS 3309

2.4D diesel Manual, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3

2.4D diesel Automatic, TF-80SC 7.0 JWS 3309

07 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

281

Engine Gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

D5 diesel Manual, M66 1.9 BOT 350M3

D5 diesel Automatic, TF-80SC 7.0 JWS 3309

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions, the gear- box oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, this may be nec- essary under adverse driving conditions, see page 280.

07 Specifications

Fuel

282

CO2 emissions, fuel consumption and tank volume

Model Engine Gearbox

Emissions of car- bon dioxide (CO2,

g/km)

Consumption (litre/100 km)

Tank volume (litres)

T6 B6304T2 Automatic (TF80SC) AWD 274 11,7 approx. 70

3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF80SC) AWD 267 11,2 approx. 70

D5 D5244T10 Manual (M66) AWD 183 6.9 approx. 70

D5 D5244T10 Automatic (TF80SC) AWD 199 7,5 approx. 70

2.4D D5244T14 Manual (M66) 159 6.0 approx. 70

2.4D D5244T14 Automatic (TF-80SC) 183 6.9 approx. 70

2.4DA D5244T16 Automatic (TF80SC) AWD 199 7,5 approx. 70

A Only the Netherlands

Fuel consumption and emissions of

carbon dioxide Official fuel consumption figures are based on

a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU

Directive 80/1268/ EEC comb. and 92/21/EEC.

The manner in which the car is driven, and

other non-technical factors affect fuel con-

sumption. For more information, see page 10.

See page 209 for more information on fuel.

07 Specifications

Electrical system

283

Electrical system

12 V system with a voltage-regulated alterna-

tor. Single pole system in which the chassis

and engine block are used as conductors. The

negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).

Battery

Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,

CCA — Cold Cranking Amperes (A)

Reserve capacity

(minutes)

T6 12 520-700 100-135

D5, 2.4D 12 700-800 135-160

07 Specifications

Type approval

284

Remote control system

Country

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,

E, EST, F, FIN, GB,

GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,

LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,

SK, SLO

Delphi hereby

certifies that this

remote control key

system conforms to

the essential char-

acteristic require-

ments and other rel-

evant regulations of

directive 1999/5/EC.

IS, LI, N, CH

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,

Germany R-

LPD1-03-0151

CCAB06LP1940T4

08 Alphabetical Index

286

ACC Adaptive cruise control…………….. 156

Active Bending Lights (ABL)…………………. 81

Active chassis FOUR-C…………………… 154

Active Dual Xenon lights………………………. 81

Adapting driving characteristics………….. 154

Adaptive cruise control………………………. 156

fault tracing………………………………….. 160

radar sensor…………………………………. 159

Adaptive cruise control fault tracing…….. 160

Additional heater (Diesel)……………………. 136

Adjusting headlamp pattern…………………. 86

Active Dual Xenon headlamps………….. 86

halogen headlamp………………………….. 86

Adjusting the steering wheel…………………. 79

Airbag

activating/deactivating, PACOS……….. 22

driver’s and front passenger side……… 20

Air conditioning…………………………………. 130

general………………………………………… 126

Air conditioning, AC…………………………… 130

Air distribution……………………………. 127, 132

Air vents…………………………………………… 128

Alarm…………………………………………………. 59

alarm indicator……………………………….. 59

alarm signals………………………………….. 60

arming…………………………………………… 59

checking the alarm…………………………. 46

deactivating…………………………………… 59

deactivating a triggered alarm………….. 60

reduced alarm level………………………… 60

temporary disarming of the alarm…….. 60

Allergy and asthma inducing sub-

stances……………………………………………. 127

All-wheel drive, AWD…………………………. 107

All Wheel Drive (AWD)………………………… 107

Approach light, duration………………………. 85

Audio

headphones socket………………………. 138

rear control panel………………………….. 138

settings……………………………………….. 138

surround……………………………………… 137

Audio system……………………………………. 137

functions……………………………………… 138

overview………………………………………. 137

Audio volume

phone………………………………………….. 196

phone/media player………………………. 196

ring signal, phone…………………………. 196

Auto

climate control settings…………………. 129

Automatic car washes……………………….. 265

Automatic gearbox……………………………. 103

manual gear positions (Geartronic)….. 104

towing and recovery……………………… 224

Automatic locking……………………………….. 53

Automatic relocking…………………………….. 53

AUX…………………………………………………. 137

Auxiliary heater…………………………………. 136

AWD, All-wheel drive…………………………. 107

Backrest…………………………………………….. 75

front seat, lowering…………………………. 75

Backrest rear seat, lowering…………………. 77

Battery……………………………………… 243, 283

maintenance………………………………… 243

remote control key/PCC………………….. 49

start assistance…………………………….. 102

symbols on the battery………………….. 243

warning symbols…………………………… 243

Blind spot (BLIS)……………………………….. 187

08 Alphabetical Index

287

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS…… 187

Bluetooth

handsfree…………………………………….. 194

mute microphone…………………………. 196

transfer call to mobile……………………. 196

Bonnet, opening……………………………….. 228

Brake and clutch fluid………………………… 232

Brake light………………………………………….. 82

Brakes……………………………………………… 108

anti-lock braking system, ABS……….. 108

brake light……………………………………… 82

brake system……………………………….. 108

electric parking brake……………………. 112

emergency brake assistance, EBA….. 108

emergency brake lights…………………… 82

filling brake fluid……………………………. 232

symbols in the combined instrument

panel…………………………………………… 108

Built-in phone…………………………………… 199

Bulbs, see Lighting……………………………. 234

Calls

functions during a call……………. 199, 200

incoming………………………………. 195, 199

operation………………………………. 195, 199

volume in phone…………………………… 200

waiting………………………………………… 200

Call waiting………………………………………. 200

Camera sensor………………………….. 166, 172

Car care…………………………………………… 265

Car care, leather upholstery……………….. 267

Cargo area

cargo cover………………………………….. 216

lighting………………………………………….. 85

mounting points……………………………. 212

safety grille…………………………………… 215

safety net…………………………………….. 213

Cargo cover……………………………………… 216

Car upholstery………………………………….. 267

Car wash………………………………………….. 265

Catalytic converter…………………………….. 209

recovery………………………………………. 224

Centre console…………………………………. 120

Chassis settings……………………………….. 154

Checking and topping up the coolant….. 231

Children…………………………………………….. 32

child safety locks……………………………. 37

child seats and side airbags…………….. 24

location in the car…………………………… 32

safety……………………………………………. 32

Child safety locks……………………………….. 58

Child seat…………………………………………… 32

Child seats…………………………………………. 32

integrated two-stage booster cushion. 35

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 37

recommended……………………………….. 33

size classes for child seats with the ISO-

FIX fixture system…………………………… 38

upper mounting points for child seats.. 40

Cigarette lighter socket………………………. 192

City Safety…………………………………….. 165

Cleaning

automatic car washes……………………. 265

car wash……………………………………… 265

rims…………………………………………….. 266

seatbelts……………………………………… 267

upholstery……………………………………. 267

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)…….. 127

08 Alphabetical Index

288

Climate control…………………………………. 126

general………………………………………… 126

sensors……………………………………….. 126

Clock, setting……………………………………… 72

Collision…………………………………………….. 31

Collision warning………………………………. 170

Collision warning system

radar sensor…………………… 159, 165, 170

Collision Warning with Auto Brake*……… 170

Colour code, paint…………………………….. 268

Combined instrument panel……………….. 123

Comfort inside the passenger compart-

ment………………………………………………… 191

Compass…………………………………………… 97

calibration……………………………………… 97

Condensation in headlamps……………….. 265

Controls

centre console……………………………… 120

Crash, see Collision…………………………….. 31

Cruise control…………………………………… 155

Curtain

panorama roof……………………………….. 98

CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)……… 127

DAB, menu structure…………………………. 148

DAB Radio……………………………………….. 147

Deadlocks………………………………………….. 56

deactivation…………………………………… 56

temporary deactivation……………………. 56

Defroster………………………………………….. 130

Diesel………………………………………………. 210

Diesel particle filter……………………………. 210

Direction indicators……………………………… 83

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor… 106

Display lighting…………………………………… 80

Distance Alert…………………………………… 162

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II……………….. 137

Door mirrors……………………………………….. 94

Driver Alert Control……………………………. 175

Driver Alert System……………………………. 175

Driving……………………………………………… 206

cooling system……………………………… 206

with the tailgate open……………………. 206

with trailer……………………………………. 218

Driving in water…………………………………. 206

Driving with a trailer

towball load…………………………………. 274

towing capacity……………………………. 274

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 152

ECC, electronic climate control…………… 128

Economical driving……………………………. 206

ECO pressure…………………………………… 263

Electrical socket……………………………….. 193

cargo area……………………………………. 193

front seat……………………………………… 193

Electric parking brake………………………… 112

low battery voltage……………………….. 112

releasing automatically………………….. 113

releasing manually………………………… 113

Emergency calls……………………………….. 199

Emergency equipment

warning triangle……………………………. 217

Emergency puncture repair………………… 259

Emissions of carbon dioxide………………. 211

Engine

overheating………………………………….. 218

starting………………………………………… 100

08 Alphabetical Index

289

Engine block heater

fuel-driven……………………………………. 133

Engine braking, automatic………………….. 110

Engine compartment

coolant………………………………………… 231

oil……………………………………………….. 230

overview………………………………………. 229

power steering fluid………………………. 232

Engine oil………………………………….. 229, 278

adverse driving conditions……………… 278

capacities……………………………………. 278

filter…………………………………………….. 230

oil grade………………………………………. 278

Engine specifications…………………………. 277

Environmental labelling, FSC, owner’s

manual………………………………………………. 12

Error messages

Driver Alert Control……………………….. 176

Lane Departure Warning………………… 179

see Messages and symbols…………… 160

Error messages in BLIS……………………… 189

Error messages in Distance Alert………… 163

Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con-

trol…………………………………………………… 160

Expectant mothers, seatbelt…………………. 17

External dimensions………………………….. 274

Fan………………………………………………….. 129

Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 167, 173

First aid equipment……………………………. 217

Floor mats………………………………………… 192

Fluids, capacities………………………………. 280

Fluids and oils…………………………………… 280

FM, menu structure…………………………… 146

Fog lamp

front……………………………………………… 82

Fog lamps

rear……………………………………………….. 83

Fog lamps, on/off……………………………….. 82

Foot brake……………………………………….. 108

FOUR-C Active chassis…………………… 154

FSC, environmental labelling………………… 12

Fuel…………………………………………………. 209

fuel consumption………………………….. 282

fuel economy………………………… 263, 264

fuel filter………………………………………. 210

Fuse box………………………………………….. 246

glovebox……………………………………… 250

Fuses………………………………………………. 246

box in cargo area………………………….. 252

changing……………………………………… 246

general………………………………………… 246

relay/fuse box in engine compart-

ment……………………………………………. 247

Fuse table

fuses in cargo area……………………….. 252

fuses in engine compartment…………. 248

Gearbox

automatic…………………………………….. 103

Gear selector inhibitor……………………….. 105

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-

gagement…………………………………………. 106

Geartronic………………………………………… 104

Glass

laminated/reinforced……………………….. 92

Global opening…………………………………. 126

Glovebox…………………………………………. 192

locking………………………………………….. 54

08 Alphabetical Index

290

Gross vehicle weight…………………………. 274

Hazard warning flashers………………………. 83

HBS Heart Beat Sensor…………………….. 47

HDC………………………………………………… 110

Headlamp levelling……………………………… 80

Headlamp pattern, adjusting………………… 86

Headlamps……………………………………….. 234

Headphones socket…………………………… 138

Head restraint

centre seat, rear……………………………… 77

lowering………………………………………… 77

Heated washer nozzles………………………… 90

Heating……………………………………………. 130

rearview and door mirrors……………….. 95

rear window…………………………………… 95

seats…………………………………………… 129

heat reflecting (Windscreen)…………………. 92

Heat-reflecting windscreen…………………… 92

High engine temperature……………………. 218

High-pressure headlamp washing…………. 90

Hill Descent Control…………………………… 110

HomeLink EU…………………………………. 115

Home safe lighting………………………………. 85

Hoot………………………………………………….. 79

Horn………………………………………………….. 79

IAQS Interior Air Quality System……….. 127

IC Inflatable Curtain………………………….. 26

IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys-

tem………………………………………………….. 201

Ignition keys……………………………………….. 73

IMEI number…………………………………….. 201

Immobiliser………………………………………… 44

Indicator lamps, PCC………………………….. 46

Inflatable curtain…………………………………. 26

Information and warning symbols…………. 68

Information button, PCC………………………. 46

Information displays……………………………. 67

Instrument lighting, see Lighting……………. 80

Instrument overview

left-hand drive………………………………… 64

right-hand drive……………………………… 66

Instruments and controls……………………… 64

Interior lighting, see Lighting………………… 84

Interior rearview mirror…………………………. 95

automatic dimming…………………………. 95

Intermittent wiping………………………………. 89

iPod , connection…………………………….. 140

Jack………………………………………………… 256

Kerb weight………………………………………. 274

Key……………………………………………………. 44

Key blade…………………………………………… 47

Keyless drive……………………………….. 51, 100

Keyless start (keyless drive)…………… 51, 100

Keylock……………………………………………. 105

Keypad in the steering

wheel…………………………… 79, 120, 155, 199

Key positions……………………………………… 73

08 Alphabetical Index

291

Labels……………………………………………… 272

Laminated glass………………………………….. 92

Lamps, see Lighting………………………….. 234

Lane Departure Control……………………… 178

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 267

Lighting……………………………………………. 234

Active Dual Xenon lights………………….. 81

approach light, duration………………….. 85

automatic lighting, passenger compart-

ment……………………………………………… 85

bulbs, specifications……………………… 240

controls…………………………………………. 84

display lighting……………………………….. 80

front fog lamps………………………………. 82

headlamp levelling………………………….. 80

home safe lighting………………………….. 85

in passenger compartment………………. 84

instrument lighting………………………….. 80

main/dipped beam…………………………. 80

position/parking lamps……………………. 82

rear fog lamp…………………………………. 83

Lighting, bulb replacement…………………. 234

cargo area……………………………………. 239

courtesy lighting…………………………… 239

dipped beam halogen……………………. 235

direction indicators……………………….. 236

fog lamp………………………………………. 237

main beam, Xenon lamp………………… 236

main beam halogen………………………. 236

number plate lighting…………………….. 238

side marker lamps………………………… 237

vanity mirror…………………………………. 239

Light switches…………………………………….. 80

cargo area……………………………………. 212

general………………………………………… 212

mounting points……………………………. 212

roof load……………………………………… 216

Locking/unlocking

inside……………………………………………. 53

tailgate…………………………………….. 45, 54

Locks

automatic locking…………………………… 53

locking………………………………………….. 53

unlocking………………………………………. 53

Lubricants………………………………………… 280

Lubricants, capacities………………………… 280

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning…………. 80

Maintenance

rustproofing…………………………………. 266

Making calls………………………………. 195, 199

Manual gearbox

towing and recovery……………………… 224

Manual gear positions (Geartronic)………. 104

Memory function in seats…………………….. 76

Menus and messages………………………… 120

Menu structure

DAB……………………………………………. 148

FM………………………………………………. 146

Messages and symbols

Collision Warning with Auto

Brake…………………………………… 168, 173

Distance Alert………………………………. 163

Driver Alert Control……………………….. 176

Lane Departure Warning………………… 179

Messages and symbols in the Adaptive

cruise control……………………………………. 160

Messages in BLIS……………………………… 189

Messages in the combined instrument

panel……………………………………………….. 123

08 Alphabetical Index

292

Messages in the information display……. 152

Meters in the combined instrument panel

fuel gauge……………………………………… 68

speedometer………………………………….. 68

tachometer……………………………………. 68

Misting…………………………………………….. 130

attending to the windows………………. 126

condensation in headlamps…………… 265

remove with the air vents………………. 132

timer function……………………………….. 130

Mobile phone

connect……………………………………….. 197

handsfree…………………………………….. 194

Oil, see also Engine oil……………………….. 278

Oil level low………………………………………. 230

Overheating……………………………………… 218

Owner’s manual, environmental labelling.. 12

PACOS………………………………………………. 22

PACOS, switch…………………………………… 22

Paintwork

colour code………………………………….. 268

damage and touch-up…………………… 268

Panel lighting……………………………………… 80

Panic function…………………………………….. 45

Panorama roof

curtain…………………………………………… 98

opening and closing……………………….. 98

ventilation position………………………….. 99

Park assist camera……………………………. 184

Parking assistance…………………………….. 181

parking assistance sensors……………. 183

Parking brake……………………………………. 112

Parking heater…………………………………… 133

battery and fuel…………………………….. 133

parking on a hill……………………………. 133

time setting………………………………….. 135

Particle filter……………………………………… 210

Passenger compartment……………………. 191

Passenger compartment filter…………….. 127

Passenger compartment heater

fuel-driven……………………………………. 133

PCC Personal Car Communicator

functions……………………………………….. 45

range……………………………………….. 46, 47

Petrol grade……………………………………… 209

Phone

built-in, overview………………………….. 199

connect……………………………………….. 197

handsfree…………………………………….. 194

incoming calls………………………………. 195

making calls…………………………………. 195

messages……………………………………. 201

on/off………………………………………….. 199

phone book………………………………….. 197

phone book, shortcut……………………. 197

receiving a call……………………………… 196

ring signal……………………………………. 200

SIM card……………………………………… 202

Phone book……………………………………… 200

Polishing………………………………………….. 266

Position/parking lamps………………………… 82

Power panorama roof………………………….. 98

Power seat…………………………………………. 75

Power windows………………………………….. 92

08 Alphabetical Index

293

Puncture, see Tyres…………………………… 256

Putting calls on hold………………………….. 200

Radar sensor……………………………………. 156

limitations……………………………………. 159

Rain sensor………………………………………… 89

Rear bulbs

location……………………………………….. 238

Rear control panel

audio system……………………………….. 138

Rearview and door mirrors

compass……………………………………….. 97

door……………………………………………… 94

electrically retractable……………………… 94

heating………………………………………….. 95

interior…………………………………………… 95

Rear window, defrosting………………………. 95

Recirculation…………………………………….. 130

Recommendations during driving………… 206

Recommended child seats, table………….. 33

Recovery………………………………………….. 225

Refrigerant……………………………………….. 126

Refuelling…………………………………………. 208

fuel cap……………………………………….. 208

fuel filler flap, electrical opening……… 208

fuel filler flap, manual opening………… 208

refuelling……………………………………… 208

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses………………….. 246

Remote control

programmable……………………………… 115

Remote control, see Remote control key. . 44

Remote control key…………………………….. 44

battery replacement………………………… 49

detachable key blade……………………… 44

functions……………………………………….. 45

range…………………………………………….. 46

Remote control key system, type appro-

val…………………………………………………… 284

Resetting the door mirrors……………………. 95

Resetting the power windows………………. 93

Retractable power door mirrors…………….. 94

Reverse gear inhibitor………………………… 103

Rims

cleaning………………………………………. 266

Roll-over protection…………………………….. 29

ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)……… 29

ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll-

over protection)…………………………………… 29

Rustproofing…………………………………….. 266

Safety grille………………………………………. 215

Safety mode………………………………………. 31

Safety net…………………………………………. 213

Seat, see Seats…………………………………… 75

Seatbelt

rear seat………………………………………… 17

seatbelt tensioner…………………………… 18

Seatbelt reminder……………………………….. 17

Seatbelts……………………………………………. 16

Seats…………………………………………………. 75

head restraints, rear………………………… 77

heating………………………………………… 129

lowering the front backrest………………. 75

lowering the rear backrest……………….. 77

power seats…………………………………… 75

Securing loads (Loading)……………………. 212

Service programme…………………………… 228

Set time interval………………………………… 162

08 Alphabetical Index

294

Side airbags……………………………………….. 24

Signal input, external…………………………. 137

SIM card………………………………………….. 202

SIPS bag decal………………………………… 25

SIPS bags………………………………………….. 24

Soot filter…………………………………………. 211

Soot filter full…………………………………….. 211

Spare wheel……………………………………… 256

temporary spare…………………………… 256

Spin control……………………………………… 152

Spin control function…………………………. 152

SRS Airbag…………………………………… 20, 21

SRS system……………………………………….. 19

switch…………………………………………… 22

Stability and traction control system……. 152

Stability system………………………………… 152

Stains………………………………………………. 267

Start assistance………………………………… 102

Steering force, speed related……………… 154

Steering force level, see Steering force… 154

Steering lock…………………………………….. 101

Steering wheel……………………………………. 79

keypad……………… 79, 120, 137, 155, 199

keypad, adaptive cruise control……… 157

steering wheel adjustment……………….. 79

Stone chips and scratches…………………. 268

Storage spaces in the passenger compart-

ment………………………………………………… 191

Surround………………………………………….. 137

Symbols…………………………………………… 152

indicator symbols…………………………… 68

information symbols……………………….. 68

warning symbols…………………………….. 68

Symbols and messages

Collision Warning with Auto

Brake…………………………………… 168, 173

Distance Alert………………………………. 163

Driver Alert Control……………………….. 176

Lane Departure Warning………………… 179

Symbols and messages in the Adaptive

cruise control……………………………………. 160

Tailgate……………………………………………… 55

locking/unlocking………………………. 45, 54

open……………………………………………… 55

Temperature

actual temperature……………………….. 126

Temperature control………………………….. 130

Timer……………………………………………….. 130

Tools……………………………………………….. 256

Total airing function……………………… 53, 126

Towball

installation……………………………………. 220

removal……………………………………….. 222

Towbar, see Towing equipment………….. 219

Towing…………………………………………….. 224

towing eye…………………………………… 224

Towing capacity………………………………… 274

Towing equipment…………………………….. 219

specifications……………………………….. 220

Towing eye………………………………………. 224

Trailer………………………………………………. 218

cable…………………………………………… 218

driving with a trailer………………………. 218

snaking……………………………………….. 222

08 Alphabetical Index

295

Trailer Stability Assist………………………… 222

Transponder………………………………………. 92

Trip computer…………………………………… 150

Trip meter………………………………………….. 71

Type approval, remote control key sys-

tem………………………………………………….. 284

Type designation………………………………. 272

Tyres

direction of rotation………………………. 254

driving characteristics……………………. 254

maintenance………………………………… 254

pressure………………………………………. 263

puncture repair…………………………….. 259

specifications……………………………….. 262

speed ratings……………………………….. 262

tread wear indicators…………………….. 255

winter tyres………………………………….. 255

Unlocking

from the inside……………………………….. 53

from the outside…………………………….. 53

USB, connection……………………………….. 140

Vanity mirror……………………………….. 84, 193

Ventilation………………………………………… 127

Vibration damper………………………………. 219

Warning lamp

adaptive cruise control………………….. 156

collision warning system……………….. 170

stability and traction control system. . 152

Warning lamps

airbags SRS…………………………………… 69

alternator not charging……………………. 69

fault in brake system………………………. 69

low oil pressure………………………………. 69

parking brake applied……………………… 69

seatbelt reminder……………………………. 69

warning…………………………………………. 69

Warning sound

collision warning system……………….. 170

Warning symbol, AIRBAG system…………. 19

Warning triangle………………………………… 217

Washer fluid, filling…………………………….. 242

Washer nozzles, heated……………………….. 90

Washers

rear window…………………………………… 90

washer fluid, filling………………………… 242

windscreen……………………………………. 90

Water and dirt-repellent coating……………. 92

Water-repellent surface, cleaning………… 266

Waxing…………………………………………….. 266

Weights

kerb weight………………………………….. 274

Wheels

changing……………………………………… 257

installation……………………………………. 258

rims…………………………………………….. 255

snow chains…………………………………. 256

spare wheel…………………………………. 256

Wheels and tyres………………………………. 254

Whiplash injury, WHIPS……………………….. 27

WHIPS

child seat/booster cushion………………. 27

whiplash injury……………………………….. 27

Windows, rearview and door mirrors……… 92

Windscreen………………………………………… 92

Windscreen washing……………………………. 90

08 Alphabetical Index

296

Windscreen wipers……………………………… 89

rain sensor…………………………………….. 89

Winter driving……………………………………. 207

Winter tyres………………………………………. 255

Wiper blades…………………………………….. 241

changing……………………………………… 241

cleaning………………………………………. 242

Источник

Просмотр

Это тоже интересно: